US20160163374A1 - Memory device - Google Patents
Memory device Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- US20160163374A1 US20160163374A1 US15/043,063 US201615043063A US2016163374A1 US 20160163374 A1 US20160163374 A1 US 20160163374A1 US 201615043063 A US201615043063 A US 201615043063A US 2016163374 A1 US2016163374 A1 US 2016163374A1
- Authority
- US
- United States
- Prior art keywords
- memory cell
- oxide semiconductor
- transistor
- electrode
- insulating layer
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Abandoned
Links
Images
Classifications
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H10—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H10B—ELECTRONIC MEMORY DEVICES
- H10B12/00—Dynamic random access memory [DRAM] devices
- H10B12/20—DRAM devices comprising floating-body transistors, e.g. floating-body cells
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G11—INFORMATION STORAGE
- G11C—STATIC STORES
- G11C11/00—Digital stores characterised by the use of particular electric or magnetic storage elements; Storage elements therefor
- G11C11/21—Digital stores characterised by the use of particular electric or magnetic storage elements; Storage elements therefor using electric elements
- G11C11/34—Digital stores characterised by the use of particular electric or magnetic storage elements; Storage elements therefor using electric elements using semiconductor devices
- G11C11/40—Digital stores characterised by the use of particular electric or magnetic storage elements; Storage elements therefor using electric elements using semiconductor devices using transistors
- G11C11/401—Digital stores characterised by the use of particular electric or magnetic storage elements; Storage elements therefor using electric elements using semiconductor devices using transistors forming cells needing refreshing or charge regeneration, i.e. dynamic cells
- G11C11/4063—Auxiliary circuits, e.g. for addressing, decoding, driving, writing, sensing or timing
- G11C11/407—Auxiliary circuits, e.g. for addressing, decoding, driving, writing, sensing or timing for memory cells of the field-effect type
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G11—INFORMATION STORAGE
- G11C—STATIC STORES
- G11C11/00—Digital stores characterised by the use of particular electric or magnetic storage elements; Storage elements therefor
- G11C11/21—Digital stores characterised by the use of particular electric or magnetic storage elements; Storage elements therefor using electric elements
- G11C11/34—Digital stores characterised by the use of particular electric or magnetic storage elements; Storage elements therefor using electric elements using semiconductor devices
- G11C11/40—Digital stores characterised by the use of particular electric or magnetic storage elements; Storage elements therefor using electric elements using semiconductor devices using transistors
- G11C11/401—Digital stores characterised by the use of particular electric or magnetic storage elements; Storage elements therefor using electric elements using semiconductor devices using transistors forming cells needing refreshing or charge regeneration, i.e. dynamic cells
- G11C11/403—Digital stores characterised by the use of particular electric or magnetic storage elements; Storage elements therefor using electric elements using semiconductor devices using transistors forming cells needing refreshing or charge regeneration, i.e. dynamic cells with charge regeneration common to a multiplicity of memory cells, i.e. external refresh
- G11C11/404—Digital stores characterised by the use of particular electric or magnetic storage elements; Storage elements therefor using electric elements using semiconductor devices using transistors forming cells needing refreshing or charge regeneration, i.e. dynamic cells with charge regeneration common to a multiplicity of memory cells, i.e. external refresh with one charge-transfer gate, e.g. MOS transistor, per cell
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G11—INFORMATION STORAGE
- G11C—STATIC STORES
- G11C11/00—Digital stores characterised by the use of particular electric or magnetic storage elements; Storage elements therefor
- G11C11/21—Digital stores characterised by the use of particular electric or magnetic storage elements; Storage elements therefor using electric elements
- G11C11/34—Digital stores characterised by the use of particular electric or magnetic storage elements; Storage elements therefor using electric elements using semiconductor devices
- G11C11/40—Digital stores characterised by the use of particular electric or magnetic storage elements; Storage elements therefor using electric elements using semiconductor devices using transistors
- G11C11/401—Digital stores characterised by the use of particular electric or magnetic storage elements; Storage elements therefor using electric elements using semiconductor devices using transistors forming cells needing refreshing or charge regeneration, i.e. dynamic cells
- G11C11/4063—Auxiliary circuits, e.g. for addressing, decoding, driving, writing, sensing or timing
- G11C11/407—Auxiliary circuits, e.g. for addressing, decoding, driving, writing, sensing or timing for memory cells of the field-effect type
- G11C11/409—Read-write [R-W] circuits
- G11C11/4097—Bit-line organisation, e.g. bit-line layout, folded bit lines
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G11—INFORMATION STORAGE
- G11C—STATIC STORES
- G11C5/00—Details of stores covered by group G11C11/00
- G11C5/02—Disposition of storage elements, e.g. in the form of a matrix array
- G11C5/025—Geometric lay-out considerations of storage- and peripheral-blocks in a semiconductor storage device
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H10—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H10B—ELECTRONIC MEMORY DEVICES
- H10B12/00—Dynamic random access memory [DRAM] devices
- H10B12/01—Manufacture or treatment
- H10B12/02—Manufacture or treatment for one transistor one-capacitor [1T-1C] memory cells
- H10B12/05—Making the transistor
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H10—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H10B—ELECTRONIC MEMORY DEVICES
- H10B12/00—Dynamic random access memory [DRAM] devices
- H10B12/30—DRAM devices comprising one-transistor - one-capacitor [1T-1C] memory cells
- H10B12/48—Data lines or contacts therefor
- H10B12/482—Bit lines
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H10—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H10B—ELECTRONIC MEMORY DEVICES
- H10B12/00—Dynamic random access memory [DRAM] devices
- H10B12/30—DRAM devices comprising one-transistor - one-capacitor [1T-1C] memory cells
- H10B12/48—Data lines or contacts therefor
- H10B12/488—Word lines
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G11—INFORMATION STORAGE
- G11C—STATIC STORES
- G11C8/00—Arrangements for selecting an address in a digital store
- G11C8/08—Word line control circuits, e.g. drivers, boosters, pull-up circuits, pull-down circuits, precharging circuits, for word lines
Definitions
- the present invention relates to a memory device and a semiconductor device including the memory device.
- a metal oxide having semiconductor characteristics which is called an oxide semiconductor
- an oxide semiconductor has attracted attention as a novel semiconductor material having high mobility as in the case of polysilicon or microcrystalline silicon and having uniform element characteristics as in the case of amorphous silicon.
- the metal oxide is used for various applications; for example, indium oxide is a well-known metal oxide and used as a material of a pixel electrode in a liquid crystal display device.
- examples of such metal oxides having semiconductor characteristics include tungsten oxide, tin oxide, indium oxide, and zinc oxide.
- Transistors in each of which a channel formation region is formed using such a metal oxide having semiconductor characteristics have been known (Patent Documents 1 and 2).
- Patent Document 1 Japanese Published Patent Application No. 2007-123861
- Patent Document 2 Japanese Published Patent Application No. 2007-096055
- Examples of a semiconductor memory device include a DRAM and an SRAM which are categorized as a volatile memory; a mask ROM, an EPROM, an EEPROM, a flash memory, and a ferroelectric memory which are categorized as a nonvolatile memory; and the like.
- a DRAM has a simple structure in which a memory cell includes a transistor and a capacitor and needs fewer semiconductor elements for forming a memory cell than other memory devices such as an SRAM. Therefore, memory capacity per unit area can be increased as compared to other memory devices, and thus, a DRAM is advantageous in cost reduction.
- a DRAM is suitable for large storage capacity, but memory capacity per unit area needs to be further increased as in other memory devices in order that an integrated circuit having higher degree of integration is realized while an increase in a chip size is suppressed.
- the area of a capacitor for holding charge provided in each memory cell has to be reduced and the area of each memory cell has to be reduced.
- an object of the present invention is to propose a memory device in which a period in which data is held is ensured and memory capacity per unit area can be increased. Further, an object of the present invention is to propose a semiconductor device including the memory device.
- a memory device is formed using a material capable of sufficiently reducing the off-state current of a transistor, such as an oxide semiconductor material that is a wide gap semiconductor.
- the oxide semiconductor material preferably contains In, Ga, and Zn.
- the off-state current of a transistor in which an oxide semiconductor is used for a channel formation region is extremely small. Therefore, by forming a memory cell using the transistor, data can be held for a long time.
- a plurality of memory cells included in a memory device are stacked to overlap, and further, the memory cells and a driver circuit for driving the memory cells are stacked to overlap.
- An embodiment of the present invention is a memory device including a driver circuit provided over a substrate and a plurality of memory cell arrays which are provided over the driver circuit and driven by the driver circuit.
- Each of the plurality of memory cell arrays includes a plurality of memory cells arranged in matrix.
- Each of the plurality of memory cells includes a first transistor including an oxide semiconductor layer, a source electrode, a drain electrode, a first gate insulating layer, and a first gate electrode overlapping with the oxide semiconductor layer with the first gate insulating layer provided therebetween, and a capacitor including one of the source electrode and the drain electrode, the first gate insulating layer, and a conductive layer overlapping with the one of the source electrode and the drain electrode with the first gate insulating layer provided therebetween.
- the plurality of memory cell arrays is stacked to overlap.
- Each of the plurality of memory cell arrays may include a bit line which is electrically connected to the other of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the first transistor, a word line which is electrically connected to the first gate electrode of the first transistor, and a capacitor line which is electrically connected to the conductive layer of the capacitor.
- the bit lines of the plurality of memory cell arrays may be electrically connected to each other.
- the word lines of the plurality of memory cell arrays may be electrically connected to each other.
- the capacitor lines of the plurality of memory cell arrays may be electrically connected to each other.
- the bit lines of the two adjacent memory cell arrays of the plurality of memory cell arrays may be arranged so as not to overlap with each other.
- the word lines of the two adjacent memory cell arrays of the plurality of memory cell arrays may be arranged so as not to overlap with each other.
- the driver circuit can be formed using a second transistor.
- the second transistor includes a channel formation region that is provided in a substrate including a semiconductor material other than an oxide semiconductor, a pair of impurity regions that are provided so that the channel formation region is sandwiched between the pair of impurity regions, a second gate insulating layer that is provided over the channel formation region, and a second gate electrode that overlaps with the channel formation region and is provided over the second gate insulating layer.
- one of the pair of impurity regions is a source and the other is a drain.
- the second transistor is provided over an insulating surface and includes a channel formation region that is provided in a semiconductor layer including a semiconductor material other than an oxide semiconductor, a pair of impurity regions that are provided so that the channel formation region is sandwiched between the pair of impurity regions, a second gate insulating layer that overlaps with the channel formation region, and a second gate electrode that is provided to overlap with the channel formation region with the second gate insulating layer provided therebetween.
- one of the pair of impurity regions is a source and the other is a drain.
- the substrate including a semiconductor material is preferably a single crystal semiconductor substrate or an SOI substrate. It is also preferable to use silicon as the semiconductor material other than an oxide semiconductor.
- the driver circuit include a bit line driver circuit for driving a bit line and a word line driver circuit for driving a word line;
- the bit line driver circuit include a first driver circuit and a second driver circuit; each of the first driver circuit and the second driver circuit include a column decoder and a sense amplifier portion;
- the word line driver circuit include a third driver circuit and a fourth driver circuit; each of the third driver circuit and the fourth driver circuit include a row decoder; and the first to fourth driver circuits be arranged below the plurality of memory cell arrays.
- the first transistor is formed using an oxide semiconductor; however, the disclosed invention is not limited thereto.
- a material which can realize the off-state current characteristics equivalent to those of the oxide semiconductor such as a wide gap material like silicon carbide (specifically, a semiconductor material whose energy gap Eg is larger than 3 eV) may be used.
- a transistor (first transistor) in which an oxide semiconductor is used for a channel formation region has extremely small off-state current, stored data can be held for an extremely long time by using the transistor. In other words, power consumption can be sufficiently reduced because refresh operation becomes unnecessary or the frequency of refresh operation can be extremely low. Moreover, stored data can be held for a long time even when power is not supplied.
- a memory device does not require high voltage for writing data and does not have a problem of deterioration of elements.
- a memory device unlike a conventional nonvolatile memory, it is not necessary to inject and extract electrons into and from a floating gate, and thus a problem such as deterioration of a gate insulating layer does not arise at all.
- the semiconductor device does not have a limitation on the number of times data can be rewritten, which is a problem of a conventional nonvolatile memory, and the reliability thereof is drastically improved.
- data is written by turning on or off the transistor, high-speed operation can be easily realized.
- a plurality of memory cells included in a memory device is stacked to overlap, and furthermore, the memory cells and a driver circuit for driving the memory cells are stacked to overlap.
- memory capacity per unit area can be increased.
- the area of a memory cell is 8 F 2 to 10 F 2 (F is a half pitch determined by a design rule).
- F is a half pitch determined by a design rule.
- the area of a memory cell can be reduced to 1 F 2 by stacking 8 to 10 memory cell arrays so as to overlap.
- Bit lines of the two adjacent memory cell arrays of the plurality of memory cell arrays may be arranged so as not to overlap with each other, so that parasitic capacitance of the bit lines can be reduced and accuracy of reading data can be improved. Further, speed of writing and reading data can be improved. Furthermore, a load on a driver circuit for driving the bit line can be reduced.
- Word lines of the two adjacent memory cell arrays of the plurality of memory cell arrays can be arranged so as not to overlap with each other.
- parasitic capacitance of the word lines can be reduced and speed of writing and reading data can be improved.
- a load on a driver circuit for driving the word line can be reduced.
- a transistor (second transistor) in which a material other than an oxide semiconductor is used for a channel formation region can operate at sufficiently high speed, when it is combined with the transistor (first transistor) in which an oxide semiconductor is used for a channel formation region, a memory device can perform operation (e.g., reading data) at sufficiently high speed. Further, the transistor (second transistor) in which a material other than an oxide semiconductor is used for a channel formation region can favorably realize a variety of driver circuits which are required to operate at high speed.
- the area par memory cell array becomes small due to multilevel interconnection by dividing a bit line driver circuit into a first driver circuit and a second driver circuit and dividing a word line driver circuit into a third driver circuit and a fourth driver circuit, so that all the driver circuits can be arranged in a region overlapping with the memory cell array.
- a memory device can be downsized.
- FIG. 1 illustrates a structure of a memory device
- FIGS. 2A and 2B illustrate arrangement of a driver circuit and the like of a memory device
- FIGS. 3A to 3H are schematic diagrams each illustrating a method for dividing a memory cell array of a memory device
- FIGS. 4A to 4C each illustrate arrangement of a driver circuit and the like of a memory device
- FIG. 5 is a circuit diagram illustrating a configuration of a memory cell of a memory device
- FIG. 6 is a circuit diagram illustrating a configuration of a memory cell array and a driver circuit of a memory device
- FIG. 7 is a circuit diagram illustrating a configuration of a driver circuit of a memory device
- FIG. 8 shows a method for driving a memory device
- FIGS. 9A and 9B are cross-sectional views illustrating a structure of a memory device
- FIGS. 10A and 10B are respectively a cross-sectional view and a top view illustrating a structure of a memory cell
- FIGS. 11A and 11B are cross-sectional views each illustrating a structure of a memory cell
- FIGS. 12A to 12D are cross-sectional views each illustrating a structure of a memory cell
- FIGS. 13A to 13E illustrate a method for manufacturing a memory cell
- FIGS. 14A to 14D illustrate a method for manufacturing a memory cell
- FIGS. 15A to 15F each illustrate a semiconductor device
- FIGS. 16A and 16B are cross-sectional views illustrating a structure of a memory device
- FIGS. 17A to 17D are cross-sectional views each illustrating a structure of a memory cell
- FIGS. 18A to 18D are cross-sectional views each illustrating a structure of a memory cell
- FIGS. 19A and 19B are cross-sectional views illustrating a structure of a memory device
- FIGS. 20A to 20E illustrate structures of oxide materials
- FIGS. 21A to 21C illustrate a structure of an oxide material
- FIGS. 22A to 22C illustrate a structure of an oxide material
- FIG. 23 shows the gate voltage dependence of mobility obtained by calculation
- FIGS. 24A to 24C show the gate voltage dependence of drain current and mobility obtained by calculation
- FIGS. 25A to 25C show the gate voltage dependence of drain current and mobility obtained by calculation
- FIGS. 26A to 26C show the gate voltage dependence of drain current and mobility obtained by calculation
- FIGS. 27A and 27B illustrate cross-sectional structures of transistors which are used in calculation
- FIGS. 28A to 28C are graphs each showing characteristics of a transistor including an oxide semiconductor film
- FIGS. 29A and 29B show V g -I d characteristics after a BT test of a transistor of Sample 1;
- FIGS. 30A and 30B show V g -I d characteristics after a BT test of a transistor of Sample 2;
- FIG. 31 shows XRD spectra of Sample A and Sample B
- FIG. 32 is a graph showing relation between off-state current and substrate temperature in measurement of a transistor
- FIG. 33 is a graph showing V g dependence of I d and field-effect mobility
- FIG. 34A is a graph showing relation between substrate temperature and threshold voltage
- FIG. 34B is a graph showing relation between substrate temperature and field-effect mobility
- FIGS. 35A and 35B are a top view and a cross-sectional view of a semiconductor device
- FIGS. 36A and 36B are a top view and a cross-sectional view of a semiconductor device.
- FIGS. 37A and 37B are cross-sectional views each illustrating a structure of a memory device.
- a gate electrode over a gate insulating layer does not exclude a structure where a component is placed between the gate insulating layer and the gate electrode.
- electrode does not limit a function of a component.
- an “electrode” is sometimes used as part of a “wiring”, and vice versa.
- the term “electrode” or “wiring” can include the case where a plurality of “electrodes” or “wirings” is formed in an integrated manner.
- part of a word line may be used as a first gate electrode of a first transistor and part of a capacitor line may be used as an electrode layer of a capacitor.
- Source and drain Functions of a “source” and a “drain” are sometimes replaced with each other when a transistor of opposite polarity is used or when the direction of current flowing is changed in circuit operation, for example Therefore, the terms “source” and “drain” can be replaced with each other in this specification and the like.
- the term “electrically connected” includes the case where components are connected through an object having any electric function. There is no particular limitation on an object having any electric function as long as electric signals can be transmitted and received between components that are connected through the object.
- Examples of an “object having any electric function” are a switching element such as a transistor, a resistor, an inductor, a capacitor, and an element with a variety of functions as well as an electrode and a wiring.
- FIG. 1 A structure of a memory device according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 1 , FIGS. 2A and 2B , FIGS. 3A to 3H , FIGS. 4A to 4C , FIG. 5 , FIG. 6 , FIG. 7 , and FIG. 8 .
- FIG. 1 is a schematic view illustrating an example of a structure of a memory device.
- the memory device according to an embodiment of the present invention has a stacked structure which includes a plurality of memory cell arrays (in FIG. 1 , two memory cell arrays are typically illustrated) in the upper portion and a peripheral circuit including as a control circuit or a driver circuit which is required to operate at high speed for driving the plurality of memory cell arrays in the lower portion.
- the driver circuit or the control circuit may include a logic circuit, an analog circuit, and/or an arithmetic circuit.
- the memory device illustrated in FIG. 1 includes a memory cell array 201 a including a plurality of memory cells and a memory cell array 201 b including a plurality of memory cells in the upper portion, and a peripheral circuit 210 including a first driver circuit 211 , a second driver circuit 212 , a third driver circuit 213 , a fourth driver circuit 214 , a fifth driver circuit 215 , a controller 218 , an address buffer 221 , an I/O buffer 220 , and the like, which is necessary for operating the memory cell array 201 a and the memory cell array 201 b , in the lower portion.
- the first driver circuit 211 includes a column decoder 217 a and a sense amplifier group 216 a
- the second driver circuit 212 includes a column decoder 217 b and a sense amplifier group 216 b.
- the memory cell array 201 a and the memory cell array 201 b are stacked to overlap. Accordingly, memory capacity per unit area can be increased. Although an example in which two memory cell arrays (the memory cell array 201 a and the memory cell array 201 b ) are stacked to overlap is illustrated in FIG. 1 , the number of memory cell arrays stacked to overlap is not limited to two in an embodiment of the present invention.
- a plurality of memory cell arrays is stacked to overlap with the use of multilevel interconnection.
- a method in which the memory cell array is divided and stacked to overlap will be described with reference to schematic views.
- FIGS. 3A to 3H each schematically illustrate a method for dividing and stacking a memory cell array to overlap.
- a memory cell array 601 is driven by a bit line driver circuit 611 and a word line driver circuit 612 .
- the memory cell array 601 includes a plurality of memory cells arranged in matrix and each memory cell is electrically connected to a bit line and a word line.
- the bit line is arranged in a row direction (the horizontal direction in the figure).
- the word line is arranged in a column direction (the vertical direction in the figure).
- the bit line is driven by the bit line driver circuit 611 and the word line is driven by the word line driver circuit 612 .
- FIG. 3A illustrates a structure in the case where a memory cell array is one layer (the case where multilevel interconnection is not used).
- the memory cell array 601 is divided and the divided memory cell arrays are stacked to overlap in order to increase memory capacity per unit area.
- FIG. 3B and FIG. 3C examples of a method for dividing the memory cell array 601 into two parts.
- the memory cell array 601 is divided laterally into two parts.
- the memory cell array 601 is divided longitudinally into two parts. Then, a memory cell array 601 A and a memory cell array 601 B are stacked to overlap. Further, the bit line driver circuit 611 and the word line driver circuit 612 are also stacked to overlap with the memory cell array 601 A and the memory cell array 601 B.
- the word lines of the memory cell array 601 A and the memory cell array 601 B which are stacked to overlap can be electrically connected to each other.
- the bit lines of the memory cell array 601 A and the memory cell array 601 B which are stacked to overlap can be electrically connected to each other.
- the word line of the memory cell array 601 A and the word line of the memory cell array 601 B are preferably arranged so as not to overlap with each other.
- the bit line of the memory cell array 601 A and the bit line of the memory cell array 601 B are preferably arranged so as not to overlap with each other.
- a memory cell array in an odd-numbered row may be the memory cell array 601 A and a memory cell array in an even-numbered row may be the memory cell array 601 B.
- a memory cell in an odd-numbered column may be the memory cell array 601 A and a memory cell array in an even-numbered column may be the memory cell array 601 B.
- FIGS. 3D and 3E examples of a method for dividing the memory cell array 601 into three parts.
- the memory cell array 601 is divided laterally into three parts.
- the memory cell array 601 is divided longitudinally into three parts. Then, a memory cell array 601 A, a memory cell array 601 B, and a memory cell array 601 C are stacked to overlap. Further, the bit line driver circuit 611 and the word line driver circuit 612 are also stacked to overlap with the memory cell array 601 A, the memory cell array 601 B, and the memory cell array 601 C.
- the word lines of the memory cell array 601 A, the memory cell array 601 B, and the memory cell array 601 C which are stacked to overlap can be connected to one another.
- the bit lines of the memory cell array 601 A, the memory cell array 601 B, and the memory cell array 601 C which are stacked to overlap can be electrically connected to one another.
- the word line of the memory cell array 601 A and the word line of the memory cell array 601 B are preferably arranged so as not to overlap with each other, and the word line of the memory cell array 601 B and the word line of the memory cell array 601 C are preferably arranged so as not to overlap with each other.
- bit line of the memory cell array 601 A and the bit line of the memory cell array 601 B are arranged so as not to overlap with each other, and the bit line of the memory cell array 601 B and the bit line of the memory cell array 601 C are preferably arranged so as not to overlap with each other.
- parasitic capacitance of the word lines and the bit lines can be reduced.
- FIGS. 3F to 3H methods illustrated in FIGS. 3F to 3H can be given.
- the memory cell array 601 is divided laterally into two parts and is further divided longitudinally into two parts.
- the memory cell array 601 is divided laterally into four parts.
- the memory cell array 601 is divided longitudinally into four parts. Then, a memory cell array 601 A, a memory cell array 601 B, a memory cell array 601 C, and a memory cell array 601 D are stacked to overlap with one another. Further, the bit line driver circuit 611 and the word line driver circuit 612 are also stacked to overlap with the memory cell array 601 A, the memory cell array 601 B, the memory cell array 601 C, and the memory cell array 601 D.
- the bit lines of the memory cell array 601 A and the memory cell array 601 B which are stacked to overlap can be electrically connected to each other; the bit lines of the memory cell array 601 C and the memory cell array 601 D which are stacked to overlap can be electrically connected to each other; the word lines of the memory cell array 601 A and the memory cell array 601 C which are stacked to overlap can be electrically connected to each other; and the word lines of the memory cell array 601 B and the memory cell array 601 D which are stacked to overlap can be electrically connected to each other.
- the word lines of the memory cell array 601 A, the memory cell array 601 B, the memory cell array 601 C, and the memory cell array 601 D which are stacked to overlap can be electrically connected to one another.
- the bit lines of the memory cell array 601 A, the memory cell array 601 B, the memory cell array 601 C, and the memory cell array 601 D which are stacked to overlap can be electrically connected to one another.
- the word line of the memory cell array 601 A and the word line of the memory cell array 601 B, the word line of the memory cell array 601 B and the word line of the memory cell array 601 C, and the word line of the memory cell array 601 C and the word line of the memory cell array 601 D are preferably arranged so as not to overlap with each other.
- the bit line of the memory cell array 601 A and the bit line of the memory cell array 601 B, the bit line of the memory cell array 601 B and the bit line of the memory cell array 601 C, and the bit line of the memory cell array 601 C and the bit line of the memory cell array 601 D are preferably arranged so as not to overlap with each other.
- parasitic capacitance of the word lines and the bit lines can be reduced.
- a memory cell array may be divided into five or more.
- the memory cell array 601 be divided so that each of the divided memory cell arrays has a horizontal-to-vertical ratio as close to as 1:1. In addition, it is also preferable that the memory cell array 601 be divided so that each of the divided memory cell arrays includes the same number of memory cells. Thus, memory capacity per unit area can be further increased.
- the area of a memory cell is 8 F 2 to 10 F 2 (F is a half pitch determined by a design rule).
- the area of a memory cell can be reduced to 1 F 2 by stacking 8 to 10 memory cell arrays so as to overlap.
- FIG. 5 illustrates an example of a circuit configuration of a memory cell which can be applied to the memory cell array (the memory cell array 201 a and the memory cell array 201 b in FIG. 1 , the memory cell array 601 and the memory cell arrays 601 A to 601 D in FIG. 3A to 3H , or the like).
- a memory cell 170 includes a transistor 162 in which an oxide semiconductor is used for a channel formation region and a capacitor 164 .
- a bit line BL is electrically connected to a source or drain electrode of the transistor 162
- a word line WL is electrically connected to a gate electrode of the transistor 162
- a source or drain electrode of the transistor 162 is electrically connected to a first terminal of the capacitor 164 .
- the transistor 162 in which an oxide semiconductor is used for a channel formation region has a characteristic of a significantly small off-state current. For that reason, when the transistor 162 is in an off state, a potential of the first terminal of the capacitor 164 (or charge accumulated in the capacitor 164 ) can be held for an extremely long period. Further, in the transistor 162 in which an oxide semiconductor is used for a channel formation region, a short channel effect is not likely to be caused, which is advantageous.
- the potential of the word line WL is set to a potential at which the transistor 162 is turned on, and the transistor 162 is turned on. Accordingly, the potential of the bit line BL is supplied to the first terminal of the capacitor 164 (writing). After that, the potential of the word line WL is set to a potential at which the transistor 162 is turned off, so that the transistor 162 is turned off. Thus, the potential of the first terminal of the capacitor 164 is held (holding).
- the off-state current of the transistor 162 is extremely small, the potential of the first terminal of the capacitor 164 (or charge accumulated in the capacitor 164 ) can be held for a long time.
- bit line BL and the capacitor 164 which are in a floating state are electrically connected to each other, and the charge is redistributed between the bit line BL and the capacitor 164 .
- the potential of the bit line BL is changed.
- the amount of change in potential of the bit line BL varies depending on the potential of the first terminal of the capacitor 164 (or charge accumulated in the capacitor 164 ).
- the potential of the bit line BL after charge redistribution is (C B *V B0 +C*V)/(C B +C), where V is the potential of the first terminal of the capacitor 164 , C is the capacitance of the capacitor 164 , C B is the capacitance of the bit line BL (hereinafter also referred to as a bit line capacitance), and V B0 is the potential of the bit line BL before the charge redistribution.
- the memory cell illustrated in FIG. 5 can hold charge accumulated in the capacitor 164 for a long time, since the off-state current of the transistor 162 is extremely small. In other words, power consumption can be sufficiently reduced because refresh operation becomes unnecessary or the frequency of refresh operation can be extremely low.
- a normally-off (enhancement) transistor is used as the transistor 162 , and power is not supplied, a ground potential may be input to the gate of the transistor 162 . With that structure, the transistor 162 can remain off even when power is not supplied, and charge accumulated in the capacitor 164 can be kept held. Accordingly, stored data can be held for a long time even when power is not supplied.
- FIG. 6 a circuit diagram of the memory cell array 201 and part of the peripheral circuit is illustrated in FIG. 6 .
- the memory cell array 201 and part of the peripheral circuit are illustrated as if provided in the same plane.
- part of the peripheral circuit other than the memory cell array 201 is provided under the memory cell array 201 .
- the memory cell array 201 is divided into a plurality of memory cell arrays, and the plurality of memory cell arrays is provided so as to overlap.
- the memory cells 170 illustrated in FIG. 5 are applied to the memory cell array 201 illustrated in FIG. 6 .
- the memory cell array 201 illustrated in FIG. 6 includes m word lines WL, n bit lines BLa, n bit lines BLb, and a plurality of memory cells 170 arranged in a matrix of m (rows) (in the vertical direction) and n (columns) (in the horizontal direction).
- the word lines WL( 1 ) to WL(i) are electrically connected to the fourth driver circuit 214
- the word lines WL(i+1) to WL(m) are electrically connected to the third driver circuit 213 .
- bit lines BLa( 1 ) to BLa(j) and the bit lines BLb( 1 ) to BLb(j) are electrically connected to the second driver circuit 212
- bit lines BLa(j+1) to BLa(n) and the bit lines BLb(j+1) to BLb(n) are electrically connected to the first driver circuit 211 .
- the first driver circuit 211 and the second driver circuit 212 are each electrically connected to the fifth driver circuit 215 .
- the first driver circuit 211 includes the column decoder 217 a and the sense amplifier group 216 a , and the sense amplifier group 216 a includes sense amplifiers 222 ( j +1) to 222 ( n ).
- the column decoder 217 a is electrically connected to the sense amplifiers 222 ( j +1) to 222 ( n ) through column address lines CA(j+1) to CA(n), and the sense amplifiers 222 ( j+ 1) to 222 ( n ) are electrically connected to the memory cell array 201 through the bit lines BLa(j+1) to BLa(n) and the bit lines BLb(j+1) to BLb(n).
- the second driver circuit 212 includes the column decoder 217 b and the sense amplifier group 216 b , and the sense amplifier group 216 b includes sense amplifiers 222 ( 1 ) to 222 ( j ).
- the column decoder 217 b is electrically connected to the sense amplifiers 222 ( 1 ) to 222 ( j ) through column address lines CA( 1 ) to CA(j), and the sense amplifiers 222 ( 1 ) to 222 ( j ) are electrically connected to the memory cell array 201 through the bit lines BLa( 1 ) to BLa(j) and the bit lines BLb( 1 ) to BLb(j).
- FIG. 7 illustrates a circuit configuration of a sense amplifier which can be applied to the sense amplifier groups 216 a and 216 b.
- a gate electrode of a transistor 401 , a gate electrode of a transistor 402 , and a gate electrode of a transistor 403 are electrically connected to a signal line ⁇ pc.
- One of a source electrode and a drain electrode of the transistor 402 and one of a source electrode and a drain electrode of the transistor 403 are electrically connected to a signal line Vpc.
- the other of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the transistor 402 is electrically connected to the signal line BLa.
- the other of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the transistor 403 is electrically connected to the signal line BLb.
- One of a source electrode and a drain electrode of the transistor 401 is electrically connected to the signal line BLa and the other of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the transistor 401 is electrically connected to the signal line BLb.
- a gate electrode of a transistor 404 , a gate electrode of a transistor 405 , one of a source electrode and a drain electrode of a transistor 406 , and one of a source electrode and a drain electrode of a transistor 407 are electrically connected to the signal line BLa, and a gate electrode of the transistor 406 , a gate electrode of the transistor 407 , one of a source electrode and a drain electrode of the transistor 404 , and one of a source electrode and a drain electrode of the transistor 405 are electrically connected to the signal line BLb.
- the other of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the transistor 404 and the other of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the transistor 406 are electrically connected to one of a source electrode and a drain electrode of a transistor 408
- the other of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the transistor 405 and the other of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the transistor 407 are electrically connected to one of a source electrode and a drain electrode of a transistor 409 .
- One of a source electrode and a drain electrode of a transistor 410 is electrically connected to the signal line BLa
- the other of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the transistor 410 is electrically connected to a signal line IOa.
- One of a source electrode and a drain electrode of a transistor 411 is electrically connected to the signal line BLb, and the other of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the transistor 411 is electrically connected to a signal line IOb.
- a gate electrode of the transistor 410 and a gate electrode of the transistor 411 are electrically connected to a signal line CAi.
- a potential VH is supplied to the other of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the transistor 409
- a potential VL is supplied to the other of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the transistor 408 .
- the transistor 405 , the transistor 407 , and the transistor 409 are p-channel transistors, and the transistors 401 to 404 , the transistor 406 , the transistor 408 , the transistor 410 , and the transistor 411 are n-channel transistors.
- the case where the memory cell 170 ( 1 , 1 ) in the first row and the first column of the memory cells in the memory cell array 201 is selected and writing and reading data is performed thereon is described.
- a row on which writing or reading data is performed is also referred to as a selected row
- a column on which writing or reading data is performed is also referred to as a selected column. Therefore, hereinafter, the case where the first row is the selected row and the first column is the selected column is described.
- the potential VDD is supplied to the signal line CA( 1 ) in the first column (also referred to as “the signal line CA( 1 ) is activated”).
- the bit line BLa( 1 ) and the bit line BLb( 1 ) are electrically connected the signal line IOa the and the signal line IOb, respectively.
- the potential VDD is supplied to a signal line ⁇ n and the potential VSS is supplied to a signal line ⁇ p.
- a predetermined power supply voltage (a potential difference between the potential VL and the potential VH) is input to the sense amplifier (also referred to as “the sense amplifier is activated”).
- the potential VSS is supplied to the signal line ⁇ pc.
- the potential VH can be VDD and the potential VL can be VSS.
- a read circuit, a write circuit, and a latch circuit group included in the fifth driver circuit 215 illustrated in FIG. 6 are supplied with potentials corresponding to data to be written to the signal line IOa and the signal line IOb.
- the signal line IOa is supplied with VDD and the signal line IOb is supplied with VSS.
- the bit line BLa( 1 ) is supplied with VDD and the bit line BLb( 1 ) is supplied with VSS.
- bit line BLa( 1 ) and the bit line BLb( 1 ) is held at VDD or VSS even when the signal line CA( 1 ) is deactivated (here, supplied with the potential VSS) as long as the sense amplifier is activated.
- the word line WL( 1 ) in the first row which is a selected row is activated, so that the transistor 162 of the memory cell 170 ( 1 , 1 ) is turned on.
- the word line WL( 1 ) is supplied with a potential VDDH which is higher than the potential VDD.
- the first terminal of the capacitor 164 of the memory cell 170 ( 1 , 1 ) is supplied with VDD.
- the word line WL( 1 ) is deactivated (here, supplied with the potential VSS), so that the transistor 162 of the memory cell 170 ( 1 , 1 ) is turned off.
- data “1” can be written to the memory cell 170 ( 1 , 1 ).
- the potential of the first terminal of the capacitor 164 or charge accumulated in the capacitor 164 ) is held.
- the potential VDD is applied to the signal line ⁇ pc
- the bit line BLa( 1 ) and the bit line BLb( 1 ) are precharged
- the potential Vpc is applied to the bit line BLa( 1 ) and the bit line BLb( 1 ).
- the potential Vpc is VDD/2.
- the potential VSS is applied to the signal line ⁇ pc, and thus, precharge is completed.
- the word line WL( 1 ) in the first row which is a selected row is activated, so that the transistor 162 of the memory cell 170 ( 1 , 1 ) is turned on.
- the word line WL( 1 ) is supplied with the potential VDDH which is higher than the potential VDD.
- charge is redistributed between the bit line BLa( 1 ) and the capacitor 164 of the memory cell 170 ( 1 , 1 ), and the potential of the bit line BLa( 1 ) is slightly increased.
- the sense amplifier is activated.
- the potential VL is applied to the n-channel transistor 408 included in the sense amplifier.
- the potential of the bit line BLa( 1 ) is slightly higher than that of the bit line BLb( 1 ), and therefore, the sense amplifier amplifies the difference and decreases the potential of the bit line BLb( 1 ) to the potential VL.
- the potential VH is applied to the p-channel transistor 409 included in the sense amplifier.
- the potential of the bit line BLb( 1 ) is equal to the potential VL which is lower than that of the bit line BLa( 1 ), and therefore, the sense amplifier amplifies the difference and increases the potential of the bit line BLa( 1 ) to the potential VH.
- the bit line BLa( 1 ) is supplied with the potential VH and the bit line BLb( 1 ) is supplied with the potential VL.
- the potential VH is VDD
- the potential VL is VSS.
- the signal line CA( 1 ) in the first column which is a selected column is activated.
- the signal line CA( 1 ) is supplied with the potential VDD.
- the bit line BLa( 1 ) and the bit line BLb( 1 ) are electrically connected to the signal line IOa and the signal line IOb, respectively, which are electrically connected to the read circuit, the write circuit, and the latch circuit group of the fifth driver circuit 215 .
- the potentials of the bit line BLa( 1 ) and the bit line BLb( 1 ) are read.
- the signal line CA( 1 ) is deactivated (here, supplied with the potential VSS), so that the bit line BLa( 1 ) and the bit line BLb( 1 ) are electrically disconnected from the signal line IOa and the signal line IOb.
- the word line WL( 1 ) is deactivated (here, supplied with the potential VSS), so that the transistor 162 of the memory cell 170 ( 1 , 1 ) is turned off.
- data “1” is stored again in the memory cell 170 ( 1 , 1 ).
- the sense amplifier may be deactivated by changing the potential applied to the signal line ⁇ n from VDD to VSS and changing the potential applied to the signal line ⁇ p from VSS to VDD.
- the bit line BLa( 1 ) and the bit line BLb( 1 ) may be precharged by applying the potential VDD to the signal line ⁇ pc.
- data “1” can be read from the memory cell 170 ( 1 , 1 ).
- a plurality of memory cell arrays 201 is stacked with the use of multilevel interconnection.
- the memory cell arrays 201 may be divided into a region driven by the first driver circuit 211 and the third driver circuit 213 (a first memory cell array), a region driven by the first driver circuit 211 and the fourth driver circuit 214 (a second memory cell array), a region driven by the second driver circuit 212 and the third driver circuit 213 (a third memory cell array), and a region driven by the second driver circuit 212 and the fourth drive circuit 214 (a fourth memory cell array), and the first to fourth memory cell arrays may be stacked to overlap.
- Such a dividing structure of the memory cell array 201 corresponds to the structure illustrated in the schematic view in FIG. 3F .
- An example in which regions driven by the same combination of driver circuits of the first to fourth driver circuits 211 to 214 are formed in the same layer is described, but it is not limited thereto.
- Memory cells driven by the same combination of driver circuits can be formed in different layers.
- FIG. 2A is a block diagram of the peripheral circuit 210 in the lower portion of the memory device illustrated in FIG. 1
- FIG. 2B illustrates the symmetry with respect to a center point 250 of the memory cell array 201 a
- FIG. 2A illustrates the case where the peripheral circuit 210 is provided under the memory cell array 201 a.
- the peripheral circuit 210 illustrated in FIG. 2A includes the first driver circuit 211 , the second driver circuit 212 , the third driver circuit 213 , the fourth driver circuit 214 , the fifth driver circuit 215 , the controller 218 , the address buffer 221 , and the I/O buffer 220 .
- the first driver circuit 211 includes the column decoder 217 a and the sense amplifier group 216 a
- the second driver circuit 212 includes the column decoder 217 b and the sense amplifier group 216 b
- the third driver circuit 213 and the fourth driver circuit 214 include a row decoder 223 a and a row decoder 223 b , respectively.
- the fifth driver circuit 215 includes a write circuit, a read circuit, and a latch circuit group.
- the controller 218 includes a mode register 219 .
- a semiconductor substrate including a Group 14 element, such as silicon, germanium, silicon germanium, or silicon carbide, a compound semiconductor substrate, such as gallium arsenide or indium phosphide, an SOI substrate, or the like can be used, for example
- SOI substrate generally means a substrate where a silicon layer is provided over an insulating surface.
- SOI substrate also means a substrate where a semiconductor layer containing a material other than silicon is provided over an insulating surface.
- the SOI substrate can be a substrate having a structure in which a semiconductor layer is provided over an insulating substrate such as a glass substrate, with an insulating layer provided therebetween. It is preferable to form the peripheral circuit 210 using any of the above-described substrates because the peripheral circuit 210 can be made to operate at high speed.
- the address buffer 221 outputs a row address signal to the row decoder 223 a and the row decoder 223 b , or a column address signal to the column decoder 217 a and the column decoder 217 b , according to a variety of control signals on an input of an address signal ADR from the outside.
- the row decoder 223 a and the row decoder 223 b select a row specified by a row address according to the input row address signal.
- the column decoder 217 a and the column decoder 217 b select a column specified by a column address according to the input column address signal.
- the sense amplifier groups 216 a and 216 b are electrically connected to bit lines BL, and detect and amplify the potentials of the bit lines BL.
- the fifth driver circuit 215 includes the read circuit, the write circuit, and the latch circuit group, and is electrically connected to the sense amplifier groups 216 a and 216 b .
- the read circuit receives an output signal of a sense amplifier of a column specified by a column address as an input signal, and reads out data stored in a memory cell.
- the write circuit outputs a signal corresponding to data to be written to a bit line BL of a column specified by a column address.
- the latch circuit group stores data read from a memory cell or data to be written to a memory cell.
- the I/O buffer 220 receives data which is input from the outside through a data signal line, and outputs data to the write circuit and the latch circuit group of the fifth driver circuit 215 . In addition, the I/O buffer 220 receives data which is stored in the read circuit and the latch circuit group, and outputs data to the outside.
- the controller 218 includes a command decoder, the mode register 219 , and the like and receives a variety of control signals (e.g., /CS, /RAS, /CAS, and /WE).
- the command decoder decodes a command that is input by means of the variety of control signals.
- the mode register 219 is a register for setting an operation mode of a semiconductor device. Data is written to the mode register 219 according to a command and supplied with data to be written thereto by means of an address signal.
- the controller 218 generates a variety of control signals based on an output of the command decoder, and outputs the control signals to a variety of circuits.
- the first driver circuit 211 and the second driver circuit 212 are arranged so as to be symmetrical with respect to the center point 250 of the memory cell array 201 a .
- the third driver circuit 213 and the fourth driver circuit 214 are arranged so as to be symmetrical with respect to the center point 250 of the memory cell array 201 a .
- the first to fourth circuits 211 to 214 are arranged so that a direction in which circuit elements for different rows are disposed in the third driver circuit 213 and the fourth driver circuit 214 (the horizontal direction in FIG. 2A ) and a direction in which circuit elements for different columns are disposed in the first driver circuit 211 and the second driver circuit 212 (the vertical direction in FIG.
- “being symmetrical with respect to a point” means being in a positional relation as in the arrangement of the first driver circuit 211 and the second driver circuit 212 illustrated in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2A , where the first driver circuit 211 overlaps with the second driver circuit 212 by rotating 180 degrees with respect to the center point 250 .
- “being symmetrical with respect to a point” does not necessarily mean “being completely symmetrical with respect to a point” but “being substantially symmetrical with respect to a point”.
- a column decoder and a row decoder are divided and arranged in the peripheral circuit 210 , so that an area of the peripheral circuit 210 can be reduced. Further, the column decoder and the row decoder are divided and arranged in the peripheral circuit 210 , so that the peripheral circuit 210 can be provided under the memory cell array 201 a , leading to downsizing of a memory device. In particular, when the area of the memory cell array 201 a is substantially equal to the area of the peripheral circuit 210 , a wasted region can be eliminated, so that the area and size of a memory device can be decreased.
- the scale of the peripheral circuit 210 may be increased to improve its function as for kinds of interfaces or commands of a memory device.
- FIG. 2A illustrates the case where the peripheral circuit 210 is provided directly under the memory cell array 201 a
- the peripheral circuit 210 does not need to be provided directly under the memory cell array 201 a .
- the peripheral circuit 210 including the first to fourth driver circuits 211 to 214 and the like be provided directly under the memory cell array 201 a.
- FIGS. 4A to 4C illustrate arrangements of the first to fourth driver circuits 211 to 214 . Note that for easy understanding, circuits other than the first to fourth driver circuits 211 to 214 are not illustrated in FIGS. 4A to 4C .
- the number of wirings which electrically connect the first driver circuit 211 and the memory cell array may be different from the number of wirings which electrically connect the second driver circuit 212 and the memory cell array (the memory cell array 201 a or the memory cell array 201 b in FIG. 1 ) (see FIGS. 4A and 4B ).
- the area of the first driver circuit 211 may be different from the area of the second driver circuit 212 .
- the number of wirings which electrically connect the first drive circuit 211 and the memory cell array (the memory cell array 201 a or the memory cell array 201 b in FIG. 1 ) be equal to the number of wirings which electrically connect the second driver circuit 212 and the memory cell array (the memory cell array 201 a or the memory cell array 201 b in FIG. 1 ). Accordingly, the number of address signal lines connected to the first driver circuit 211 or the second driver circuit 212 can be reduced. As a result, the scale of the circuit can be reduced, leading to a decrease in the area and size of a memory device.
- the number of wirings which electrically connect the first driver circuit 211 and the memory cell array is equal to the number of wirings which electrically connect the second driver circuit 212 and the memory cell array (the memory cell array 201 a or the memory cell array 201 b in FIG. 1 ) and the first driver circuit 211 and the second driver circuit 212 are arranged so as to be substantially symmetrical with respect to the center point of the memory cell array 201 a , variation in parasitic resistance or parasitic capacitance of a wiring such as a bit line or a word line can be reduced, leading to stable operation.
- first driver circuit 211 and the second driver circuit 212 are described here, a similar effect can be obtained with the third driver circuit 213 and the fourth driver circuit 214 .
- FIG. 1 and FIG. 2A illustrate the case where the number of each of the first to fourth driver circuits 211 to 214 is one;
- FIG. 4C illustrates the case where each of the first to fourth driver circuits 211 to 214 is divided into two.
- a first driver circuit 211 a and a second driver circuit 212 a are arranged so as to be symmetrical with respect to the center point 250 of the memory cell array 201 a
- a first driver circuit 211 b and a second driver circuit 212 b are arranged so as to be symmetrical with respect to the center point 250 of the memory cell array 201 a .
- a third driver circuit 213 a and a fourth driver circuit 214 a are arranged so as to be symmetrical with respect to the center point 250 of the memory cell array 201 a
- a third driver circuit 213 b and a fourth driver circuit 214 b are arranged so as to be symmetrical with respect to the center point 250 of the memory cell array 201 a.
- the first driver circuit 211 and the second driver circuit 212 are each divided and the divided first driver circuits 211 are arranged so as to be symmetrical to the divided second driver circuits 212 with respect to the center point of the memory cell array 201 a .
- the third driver circuit 213 and the fourth driver circuit 214 are each divided and the divided third driver circuits 213 are arranged so as to be symmetrical to the divided fourth driver circuits 214 with respect to the center point of the memory cell array 201 a . Accordingly, a wasted region can be eliminated, and therefore, the area of the peripheral circuit 210 can be decreased.
- the peripheral circuit 210 can be provided under the memory cell array 201 a . Thus, the size of the memory device can be reduced. Moreover, by making the area of the memory cell array 201 a substantially equal to the area of the peripheral circuit 210 , a wasted region can be eliminated. Thus, the area and size of the memory device can be reduced.
- FIG. 4C illustrates the case where each of the first to fourth driver circuits 211 to 214 is divided into two, an embodiment of the present invention is not limited to this example
- Each of the first to fourth driver circuits 211 to 214 may be divided into three or more.
- the arrangement in which the first to fourth driver circuits 211 to 214 are arranged so as to be symmetrical with respect to the center point 250 of the memory cell array 201 a the above-described effect can be obtained.
- This embodiment can be implemented in appropriate combination with the configurations described in the other embodiments.
- FIGS. 9A and 9B a structure and a manufacturing method of a memory device according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 9A and 9B , FIGS. 10A and 10B , FIGS. 11A and 11B , FIGS. 12A to 12D , FIGS. 13A to 13E , FIGS. 14A to 14D , and FIGS. 16A and 16B .
- FIG. 9A and FIG. 16A are cross-sectional views of a memory device.
- a cross section B 1 -B 2 is parallel to the channel length direction of a transistor.
- a cross section C 1 -C 2 is parallel to the channel width direction of a transistor.
- the memory device illustrated in FIG. 9A and FIG. 16A includes the memory cell array 201 a and the memory cell array 201 b in the upper portion and the peripheral circuit 210 in the lower portion.
- a memory cell 170 a included in the memory cell array 201 a and a memory cell 170 b included in the memory cell array 201 b are illustrated as an example of the plurality of memory cells included in the memory cell array 201 a and the memory cell array 201 b .
- FIG. 9B and FIG. 16B illustrate structures of the memory cell 170 a and the memory cell 170 b in FIG. 9A and FIG. 16A (referred to as a structure of the memory cell 170 ) in detail, respectively.
- the memory cell 170 a and the memory cell 170 b can have a similar structure.
- the memory cell array 201 a and the memory cell array 201 b in the upper portion each include the transistor 162 in which an oxide semiconductor is used for a channel formation region
- the peripheral circuit 210 in the lower portion includes a transistor 160 in which a semiconductor material other than an oxide semiconductor is used for a channel formation region.
- Embodiment 1 can be referred to for the details of the memory cell array 201 a and the memory cell array 201 b which are provided in the upper portion of the memory device and the peripheral circuit 210 .
- a structure in which two memory cell arrays (the memory cell array 201 a and the memory cell array 201 b ) are stacked is illustrated as an example in FIG. 9A and FIG. 16A , the number of memory cell arrays to be stacked is not limited to this.
- Either an n-channel transistor or a p-channel transistor can be used as the transistor 160 and the transistor 162 .
- both the transistor 160 and the transistor 162 are n-channel transistors in the following description.
- the technical feature of an embodiment of the present invention is to use a semiconductor material with which off-state current can be sufficiently decreased, such as an oxide semiconductor, for a channel formation region of the transistor 162 so that data can be held. Therefore, it is not necessary to limit a specific structure of the memory device, such as a material of the memory device or a structure of the memory device, to the structure described here.
- the transistor 160 includes a channel formation region 116 provided in a substrate 100 including a semiconductor material (such as silicon); impurity regions 120 provided such that the channel formation region 116 is sandwiched therebetween; metal compound regions 124 in contact with the impurity regions 120 ; a gate insulating layer 108 provided over the channel formation region 116 ; a gate electrode 110 provided over the gate insulating layer 108 ; and a source or drain electrode 130 a and a source or drain electrode 130 b electrically connected to the metal compound regions 124 .
- an insulating layer 128 is provided so as to cover the transistor 160 .
- the source or drain electrode 130 a and the source or drain electrode 130 b are electrically connected to the metal compound regions 124 through openings formed in the insulating layer 128 .
- an electrode 136 a is formed in contact with the source or drain electrode 130 a
- an electrode 136 b is formed in contact with the source or drain electrode 130 b.
- an element isolation insulating layer 106 is formed over the substrate 100 so as to surround the transistor 160 , and the insulating layer 128 is formed over the transistor 160 .
- the transistor 160 preferably has a structure without a sidewall insulating layer as illustrated in FIG. 9A .
- a sidewall insulating layer may be provided on a side surface of the gate electrode 110 , and the impurity regions 120 may include a region having a different impurity concentration in a region overlapping with the sidewall insulating layer.
- the transistor 162 includes an oxide semiconductor layer 144 provided over the insulating layer 128 and the like; an electrode 142 a and an electrode 142 b which are electrically connected to the oxide semiconductor layer 144 ; a gate insulating layer 146 covering the oxide semiconductor layer 144 , the electrode 142 a , and the electrode 142 b ; and an electrode 148 a provided over the gate insulating layer 146 so as to overlap with the oxide semiconductor layer 144 .
- the electrode 148 a serves as a gate electrode of the transistor 162 .
- One of the electrode 142 a and the electrode 142 b serves as a drain electrode of the transistor 162 and the other serves as a source electrode.
- an oxide semiconductor layer used for a transistor is preferably an oxide semiconductor layer which is purified by sufficiently removing an impurity such as hydrogen therefrom and then sufficiently supplying oxygen thereto.
- the hydrogen concentration in the oxide semiconductor layer is 5 ⁇ 10 19 atoms/cm 3 or less, preferably 5 ⁇ 10 18 atoms/cm 3 or less, more preferably 5 ⁇ 10 17 atoms/cm 3 or less, for example.
- SIMS secondary ion mass spectrometry
- the concentration of carriers in the oxide semiconductor layer is less than 1 ⁇ 10 12 /cm 3 , preferably less than 1 ⁇ 10 11 /cm 3 , more preferably less than 1.45 ⁇ 10 10 /cm 3 .
- the off-state current (per unit channel width (1 ⁇ m), here) at room temperature (25° C.) is 100 zA (1 zA (zeptoampere) is 1 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 21 A) or less, preferably 10 zA or less.
- the concentration of an alkali metal and an alkaline earth metal in the oxide semiconductor layer 144 be sufficiently reduced.
- the concentration of an alkali metal or an alkaline earth metal measured by SIMS for example, the concentration of Na is 5 ⁇ 10 16 cm ⁇ 3 or lower, preferably 1 ⁇ 10 16 cm ⁇ 3 or lower, more preferably 1 ⁇ 10 15 cm ⁇ 3 or lower; the concentration of Li is 5 ⁇ 10 15 cm ⁇ 3 or lower, preferably 1 ⁇ 10 15 cm ⁇ 3 or lower; or the concentration of K is 5 ⁇ 10 15 cm ⁇ 3 or lower, preferably 1 ⁇ 10 15 cm ⁇ 3 or lower.
- soda-lime glass which contains a large amount of alkali metal such as sodium and is inexpensive can also be used (Kamiya, Nomura, and Hosono, “Carrier Transport Properties and Electronic Structures of Amorphous Oxide Semiconductors: The present status”, KOTAI BUTSURI ( SOLID STATE PHYSICS ), 2009, Vol. 44, pp. 621-633). But such consideration is not appropriate.
- An alkali metal and an alkaline earth metal are adverse impurities for the oxide semiconductor and are preferably contained as little as possible.
- An alkali metal in particular, Na diffuses into an oxide and becomes Na when an insulating film in contact with the oxide semiconductor is an oxide.
- Na cuts a bond between metal and oxygen or enters the bond in the oxide semiconductor.
- transistor characteristics e.g., the shift of a threshold value to the negative side (causing the transistor to be normally on) or a decrease in mobility
- this also causes variation in the characteristics.
- the concentration of an alkali metal is strongly required to set to the above value in the case where the hydrogen concentration in the oxide semiconductor is lower than or equal to 5 ⁇ 10 19 cm ⁇ 3 , particularly lower than or equal to 5 ⁇ 10 18 cm ⁇ 3 .
- the oxide semiconductor layer 144 may exhibit slight (weak) p-type conductivity by adding an impurity imparting p-type conductivity such as tin (Sn) to the oxide semiconductor layer 144 .
- the oxide semiconductor layer which is purified as described above becomes i-type (intrinsic) or substantially i-type, so that the oxide semiconductor layer 144 which exhibits weak p-type conductivity can be obtained by adding a small amount of an impurity for controlling valence electrons.
- the threshold voltage of the transistor 162 can be slightly shifted toward the positive side. Accordingly, the transistor 162 is prevented from becoming normally on and off-state current can be further reduced.
- a second gate electrode may be provided on a surface of the oxide semiconductor layer 144 of the transistor 162 , which is opposite to the surface provided with the gate electrode (the electrode 148 a ), with an insulating layer provided therebetween so that the threshold voltage is controlled by the second gate electrode.
- the oxide semiconductor layer processed in an island shape is used for the transistor 162 in order to suppress leakage among elements due to miniaturization
- an oxide semiconductor layer not processed in an island shape may be used.
- the oxide semiconductor layer can be prevented from being contaminated by etching during processing.
- a capacitor 164 includes the electrode 142 b , the gate insulating layer 146 , and a conductive layer 148 b . That is, the electrode 142 b functions as one electrode of the capacitor 164 , and the conductive layer 148 b functions as the other electrode of the capacitor 164 . With such a structure, capacitance can be sufficiently secured. When the oxide semiconductor layer 144 and the gate insulating layer 146 are stacked, insulation between the electrode 142 b and the conductive layer 148 b can be sufficiently secured. Furthermore, in the case where no capacitor is needed, a structure in which the capacitor 164 is not provided is also possible.
- the electrode 142 a and the electrode 142 b preferably have tapered end portions.
- the electrode 142 a and the electrode 142 b have tapered end portions, coverage of the electrode 142 a and the electrode 142 b with the gate insulating layer 146 can be improved and disconnection of the gate insulating layer 146 can be prevented.
- the taper angle is in the range of 30° to 60°, for example Note that the “taper angle” means an angle formed by the side surface and the bottom surface of a layer having a tapered shape (for example, the electrode 142 a ) when observed from a cross section thereof (a plane perpendicular to the substrate surface).
- An insulating layer 150 and an insulating layer 152 are provided over the transistor 162 and the capacitor 164 .
- An electrode 154 a is provided in an opening formed in the gate insulating layer 146 , the insulating layer 150 , the insulating layer 152 , and the like, and a wiring 156 which is electrically connected to the electrode 154 a is formed over the insulating layer 152 .
- the wiring 156 is a wiring for electrically connecting one memory cell to another memory cell in each memory cell array (memory cell arrays arranged in the same layer), and can be a bit line, for example.
- the electrode 148 a is a wiring which extends in a direction of C 1 -C 2 and electrically connects one memory cell to another memory cell in each memory cell array (memory cell arrays arranged in the same layer), and can be a word line, for example (see FIG. 16A ).
- the conductive layer 148 b is a wiring which extends in a direction of C 1 -C 2 and electrically connects one memory cell to another memory cell in each memory cell array (memory cell arrays arranged in the same layer), and can be a capacitor line, for example.
- the wiring 156 included in the memory cell array 201 a is electrically connected to an electrode 136 c through an electrode 502 a , an electrode 501 a , and an electrode 126 .
- the peripheral circuit 210 in the lower layer and a bit line of the memory cell array 201 a in the upper layer can be electrically connected to each other.
- the electrode 501 a is electrically connected to the electrode 136 c through the electrode 126 is illustrated in FIG. 9A , it is not limited thereto.
- the electrode 501 a is formed, whereby the electrode 501 a and the electrode 136 c may be in direct contact with each other.
- the electrode 148 a is electrically connected to an electrode 556 through an electrode 557 .
- the peripheral circuit 210 in the lower layer and a word line of the memory cell array 201 a in the upper layer can be electrically connected to each other.
- the electrode 148 a is electrically connected to the electrode 556 through the electrode 557 is illustrated in FIG. 16A , it is not limited thereto.
- the electrode 148 a is formed, whereby the electrode 148 a and the electrode 556 may be in direct contact with each other.
- the conductive layer 148 b serving as a capacitor line can also be electrically connected to the peripheral circuit 210 in the lower layer.
- bit line included in the memory cell array 201 a is electrically connected to the bit line included in the memory cell array 201 b is described with reference to FIG. 9A .
- the wiring 156 serving as the bit line included in the memory cell array 201 a and the wiring 156 serving as the bit line included in the memory cell array 201 b are electrically connected to each other through an electrode 500 , an electrode 501 b , and an electrode 502 b .
- the electrode 501 b may be formed, whereby the electrode 501 b and the wiring 156 of the memory cell array 201 a may be in direct contact with each other.
- FIG. 9A Although an example in which the position where an electrode for electrically connecting the bit line of the memory cell array 201 a to the peripheral circuit 210 is formed and the position where an electrode for electrically connecting the bit line of the memory cell array 201 a to the bit line of the memory cell array 201 b are greatly different in the plane layout is illustrated in FIG. 9A , it is not limited thereto.
- Bit lines of a plurality of memory cell arrays can be connected at various positions.
- an electrode for electrically connecting the bit line of the memory cell array 201 a to the bit line of the memory cell array 201 b may be formed to overlap with an electrode for electrically connecting the bit line of the memory cell array 201 a to the peripheral circuit 210 .
- connection positions of bit lines of the plurality of memory cell arrays may overlap with one another, for example With a planar layout in which connection positions overlap with one another, an increase in the element area due to a contact region can be prevented. In other words, the degree of integration of the memory device can be increased.
- the electrode 148 a serving as the word line included in the memory cell array 201 a and the electrode 148 a serving as the word line included in the memory cell array 201 b are electrically connected to each other through an electrode 551 , an electrode 552 , and an electrode 553 .
- the electrode 148 a of the memory cell array 201 b may be formed, whereby the electrode 148 a of the memory cell array 201 b and the electrode 552 of the memory cell array 201 a may be in direct contact with each other.
- FIG. 16A Although an example in which the position where an electrode for electrically connecting the word line of the memory cell array 201 a to the peripheral circuit 210 is formed and the position where an electrode for electrically connecting the word line of the memory cell array 201 a to the word line of the memory cell array 201 b are greatly different in the plane layout is illustrated in FIG. 16A , it is not limited thereto.
- Word lines of a plurality of memory cell arrays can be connected at various positions.
- an electrode for electrically connecting the word line of the memory cell array 201 a to the word line of the memory cell array 201 b may be formed to overlap with an electrode for electrically connecting the word line of the memory cell array 201 a to the peripheral circuit 210 .
- connection positions of word lines of the plurality of memory cell arrays may overlap with one another, for example With a planar layout in which connection positions overlap with one another, an increase in the element area due to a contact region can be prevented. In other words, the degree of integration of the memory device can be increased.
- capacitor lines of the plurality of memory cell arrays can be electrically connected to each other in a manner similar to that of the word lines.
- the insulating layer 140 is provided between the memory cell array 201 a in the upper portion and the peripheral circuit 210 in the lower portion.
- the feature of an embodiment of the present invention is that a plurality of memory cell array is stacked. Therefore, it is desirable that the surface of the insulating layer 140 and the surface of the insulating layer 152 be planarized by CMP or the like.
- the transistor 160 includes a semiconductor material other than an oxide semiconductor in a channel formation region.
- the semiconductor material other than an oxide semiconductor may be, for example, silicon, germanium, silicon germanium, silicon carbide, gallium arsenide, or the like and is preferably a single crystal semiconductor. Alternatively, an organic semiconductor material or the like may be used.
- a transistor including such a semiconductor material can operate at sufficiently high speed. Therefore, a transistor including a material other than an oxide semiconductor can favorably realize a variety of circuits (e.g., a logic circuit or a driver circuit) which needs to operate at high speed.
- the transistor 162 includes an oxide semiconductor material in a channel formation region.
- a transistor including an oxide semiconductor material disclosed in this specification and the like can realize an extremely small off-state current.
- the memory cell 170 can hold stored data for an extremely long time. In other words, refresh operation becomes unnecessary or the frequency of the refresh operation can be extremely lowered, which leads to a sufficient reduction in power consumption. Moreover, stored data can be held for a long period even when power is not supplied. Further, when a normally-off (enhancement) transistor is used as the transistor 162 , and power is not supplied, a ground potential may be input to the gate of the transistor 162 . With that structure, the transistor 162 can remain off and stored data can be kept held even when power is not supplied.
- the memory cell 170 does not require high voltage for writing data and does not have the problem of deterioration of elements.
- the memory cell 170 does not have a limitation on the number of times data can be rewritten, which is a problem of a conventional nonvolatile memory, and the reliability thereof is drastically improved.
- data is written by turning on or off the transistor 162 , high-speed operation can be easily realized. Additionally, there is an advantage in that operation for erasing data is not needed.
- a memory device having a novel feature can be realized by being provided with both a peripheral circuit such as a driver circuit including a transistor including a material other than an oxide semiconductor (in other words, a transistor capable of operating at sufficiently high speed) and a memory circuit including a transistor including an oxide semiconductor (in a broader sense, a transistor whose off-state current is sufficiently small).
- a peripheral circuit such as a driver circuit including a transistor including a material other than an oxide semiconductor (in other words, a transistor capable of operating at sufficiently high speed) and a memory circuit including a transistor including an oxide semiconductor (in a broader sense, a transistor whose off-state current is sufficiently small).
- a driver circuit and a control circuit included in the peripheral circuit 210 illustrated in FIG. 9 are arranged as illustrated in FIG. 1 and FIGS. 2A and 2B . Accordingly, the area and size of the memory device can be decreased.
- FIGS. 10A and 10B illustrate an example of a structure of the memory cell.
- FIG. 10A is a cross-sectional view of the memory cell
- FIG. 10B is a plan view of the memory cell.
- FIG. 10A corresponds to a cross section along line A 1 -A 2 in FIG. 10B .
- the memory cell illustrated in FIGS. 10A and 10B includes the transistor 162 including an oxide semiconductor.
- the transistor 162 including an oxide semiconductor can hold charge for a long time owing to its characteristics.
- the memory cell illustrated in FIGS. 10A and 10B corresponds to the circuit diagram of the memory cell illustrated in FIG. 5 .
- FIGS. 10A and 10B Since the structure of the memory cell illustrated in FIGS. 10A and 10B is similar to the structure illustrated in FIG. 9B or FIG. 16B , the same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals and description is omitted.
- FIGS. 11A and 11B , FIGS. 12A to 12D , FIGS. 17A to 17D , and FIGS. 18A to 18D each illustrate an example of a structure of a memory cell which is different from that in FIGS. 10A and 10B .
- oxide conductive layers 143 a and 143 b serving as source and drain regions are provided between the oxide semiconductor layer 144 and the electrodes 142 a and 142 b .
- the resistance of the source and drain regions can be decreased and the transistor 162 can be made to operate at high speed.
- the withstand voltage of the transistor 162 can be increased.
- a capacitor 164 includes the oxide conductive layer 143 b , the electrode 142 b , the gate insulating layer 146 , and the conductive layer 148 b.
- a transistor 162 illustrated in FIG. 11B is similar to the transistor 162 in FIG. 11A in that the oxide conductive layers 143 a and 143 b serving as source or drain regions are provided between the oxide semiconductor layer 144 and the electrodes 142 a and 142 b .
- the oxide conductive layers 143 a and 143 b are in contact with the upper and side surfaces of the oxide semiconductor layer 144 .
- the oxide conductive layers 143 a and 143 b are in contact with the upper surface of the oxide semiconductor layer 144 .
- the resistance of the source or drain regions can be decreased and the transistor 162 can be operated at high speed.
- the withstand voltage of the transistor 162 can be increased.
- FIGS. 10A and 10B or the like can be referred to for the structure of a capacitor 164 .
- a transistor 162 illustrated in FIG. 12A is similar to the transistor 162 illustrated in FIGS. 10A and 10B in that the electrodes 142 a and 142 b , the oxide semiconductor layer 144 , the gate insulating layer 146 , and the electrode 148 a are provided over the insulating layer 140 .
- a difference between the transistor 162 illustrated in FIG. 12A and the transistor 162 illustrated FIGS. 10A and 10B is the position where the oxide semiconductor layer 144 and the electrodes 142 a and 142 b are electrically connected to each other. In other words, in the transistor 162 illustrated in FIGS.
- FIGS. 10A and 10B at least part of the upper surface of the oxide semiconductor layer 144 is in contact with the electrodes 142 a and 142 b as a result of forming the electrodes 142 a and 142 b after forming the oxide semiconductor layer 144 .
- the transistor 162 illustrated in FIG. 12A part of the upper surfaces of the electrodes 142 a and 142 b is in contact with the oxide semiconductor layer 144 .
- FIGS. 10A and 10B or the like can be referred to for the structure of a capacitor 164 .
- FIGS. 10A and 10B , FIGS. 11A and 11B , and FIG. 12A illustrate top-gate transistors
- bottom-gate transistors may be used.
- FIGS. 12B and 12C illustrate bottom-gate transistors.
- the electrode 148 a is provided over the insulating layer 140 ; the gate insulating layer 146 is provided over the electrode 148 a ; the electrodes 142 a and 142 b are provided over the gate insulating layer 146 ; and the oxide semiconductor layer 144 is provided over the gate insulating layer 146 and the electrodes 142 a and 142 b so as to overlap with the gate electrode 148 a .
- a capacitor 164 includes the conductive layer 148 b , the gate insulating layer 146 , and the electrode 142 b which are provided over the insulating layer 140 .
- An insulating layer 150 and an insulating layer 151 are provided over the transistor 162 and the capacitor 164 .
- the insulating layer 152 in FIG. 10A is provided over the insulating layer 151 .
- a transistor 162 illustrated in FIG. 12C is similar to the transistor 162 illustrated in FIG. 12B in that the electrode 148 a , the gate insulating layer 146 , the electrodes 142 a and 142 b , and the oxide semiconductor layer 144 are provided over the insulating layer 140 .
- a difference between the transistor 162 illustrated in FIG. 12C and the transistor 162 illustrated FIG. 12B is the position of contact between the oxide semiconductor layer 144 and the electrodes 142 a and 142 b . In other words, in the transistor 162 illustrated in FIG.
- FIG. 12B At least part of the lower surface of the oxide semiconductor layer 144 is in contact with the electrodes 142 a and 142 b as a result of forming the oxide semiconductor layer 144 after forming the electrodes 142 a and 142 b .
- the transistor 162 illustrated in FIG. 12C part of the lower surfaces of the electrodes 142 a and 142 b is in contact with the oxide semiconductor layer 144 .
- the description of FIG. 12B can be referred to for the structure of a capacitor 164 or the like.
- the transistor 162 may have a dual-gate structure including two gate electrodes positioned above and below a channel formation region with gate insulating layers provided therebetween.
- FIG. 12D illustrates a dual-gate transistor.
- the transistor 162 illustrated in FIG. 12D is similar to the transistor 162 illustrated in FIG. 12B in that the electrode 148 a , the gate insulating layer 146 , the electrodes 142 a and 142 b , and the oxide semiconductor layer 144 are provided over the insulating layer 140 .
- the insulating layer 150 is provided so as to cover the electrodes 142 a and 142 b and the oxide semiconductor layer 144
- a conductive layer 159 is provided over the insulating layer 150 so as to overlap with the oxide semiconductor layer 144 .
- the insulating layer 150 functions as a second gate insulating layer of the transistor 162
- the conductive layer 159 functions as a second gate electrode of the transistor 162 .
- the potential of the conductive layer 159 may be the same as or different from that of the electrode 148 a .
- the potential of the conductive layer 159 may be GND or 0 V, or the conductive layer 159 may be in a floating state.
- the capacitor 164 includes the electrode 148 b , the gate insulating layer 146 , and the electrode 142 b is illustrated in FIGS. 11A and 11B and FIGS. 12A to 12D , it is not limited thereto.
- the capacitor 164 is provided so as to overlap with the transistor 162 , whereby the area of a memory cell can be reduced. Thus, memory capacity per unit area of the memory device can be increased. Further, in the case where parasitic capacitance is generated in capacitance between wirings, it can be used instead of the capacitor 164 .
- the capacitor 164 can include the electrode 142 b , an insulating layer 842 , and an electrode 840 which overlaps with the electrode 142 b with the insulating layer 842 provided therebetween. Note that in FIG. 17A , other structures are similar to those in FIG. 12A .
- the capacitor 164 can include the electrode 142 b , the insulating layer 150 , the gate insulating layer 146 , and an electrode 841 which overlaps with the electrode 142 b with the insulating layer 150 and the gate insulating layer 146 provided therebetween.
- the electrode 841 and the electrode 148 a be provided so as not to overlap with each other.
- the capacitor 164 can include the electrode 142 b , the insulating layer 842 , the gate insulating layer 146 , and the electrode 840 which overlaps with the electrode 142 b with the insulating layer 842 and the gate insulating layer 146 provided therebetween.
- the electrode 840 and the electrode 148 a be provided so as not to overlap with each other.
- the capacitor 164 can include the electrode 142 b , the insulating layer 150 , the insulating layer 151 , and the electrode 841 which overlaps with the electrode 142 b with the insulating layer 150 and the insulating layer 151 provided therebetween.
- FIG. 17D other structures are similar to those in FIG. 12B .
- FIG. 17D an example in which both the insulating layer 150 and the insulating layer 151 are used as dielectric layers of the capacitor 164 is illustrated in FIG. 17D , it is not limited thereto. Only the insulating layer 150 may be used as a dielectric layer of the capacitor 164 .
- the capacitor 164 can include the electrode 142 b , the insulating layer 842 , the gate insulating layer 146 , and the electrode 840 which overlaps with the electrode 142 b with the insulating layer 842 and the gate insulating layer 146 provided therebetween.
- the electrode 840 and the electrode 148 a be provided so as not to overlap with each other.
- the capacitor 164 can include the electrode 142 b , the insulating layer 150 , the insulating layer 151 , and the electrode 841 which overlaps with the electrode 142 b with the insulating layer 150 and the insulating layer 151 provided therebetween.
- FIG. 18B other structures are similar to those in FIG. 12C .
- FIG. 18B an example in which both the insulating layer 150 and the insulating layer 151 are used as dielectric layers of the capacitor 164 is illustrated in FIG. 18B , it is not limited thereto. Only the insulating layer 150 may be used as a dielectric layer of the capacitor 164 .
- the capacitor 164 can include the electrode 142 b , the insulating layer 842 , the gate insulating layer 146 , and the electrode 840 which overlaps with the electrode 142 b with the insulating layer 842 and the gate insulating layer 146 provided therebetween.
- the electrode 840 and the electrode 148 a be provided so as not to overlap with each other.
- the capacitor 164 can include the electrode 142 b , the insulating layer 150 , and the electrode 841 which overlaps with the electrode 142 b with the insulating layer 150 provided therebetween. Note that in FIG. 18D , other structures are similar to those in FIG. 12D .
- any of the structures of the capacitor 164 of the memory cell illustrated in FIGS. 17A to 17D and FIGS. 18A to 18D can be applied to the structures of the memory cells illustrated in FIGS. 11A and 11B .
- the electrode 154 a can be shared between two adjacent memory cells 170 c and 170 d .
- the electrode 154 a (and the opening which is provided with the electrode) is shared between the two adjacent memory cells, higher integration of a memory cell array can be achieved.
- the electrode 154 a for electrically connecting the wiring 156 serving as a bit line and a source or a drain of the transistor 162 is shared.
- FIGS. 19A and 19B an example in which the memory cell illustrated in FIG. 18B is used as the memory cell 170 in the structure of the memory device illustrated in FIGS. 9A and 9B is illustrated in FIGS. 19A and 19B .
- FIGS. 19A and 19B the same portions as those in FIGS. 9A and 9B and FIG. 18B are denoted by the same reference numerals and description is omitted.
- the area of a memory cell can be reduced. Therefore, in the memory device illustrated in FIGS. 19A and 19B , memory capacity per unit area can be increased.
- memory cells to be stacked are not limited to the memory cell illustrated in FIG. 18B ; memory cells having any of structures illustrated in FIGS. 17A to 17D and FIGS. 18A to 18D can be used.
- a memory cell may have a structure in which a structure of a capacitor is different from those illustrated in FIGS. 17A to 17D and FIGS. 18A to 18D .
- FIGS. 13A to 13E a method for manufacturing a memory cell array is described with reference to FIGS. 13A to 13E .
- one memory cell is illustrated as an example in FIGS. 13A to 13E
- a plurality of memory cells can be manufactured at the same time to form a memory cell array.
- a plurality of memory cell arrays stacked to be multilayered can be formed.
- the oxide semiconductor layer 144 is formed by forming an oxide semiconductor layer over the insulating layer 140 and then by processing the oxide semiconductor layer (see FIG. 13A ).
- the insulating layer 140 is formed using a material including an inorganic insulating material such as silicon oxide, silicon oxynitride, silicon nitride oxide, silicon nitride, or aluminum oxide. It is preferable to use a low dielectric constant (low-k) material for the insulating layer 140 because capacitance due to overlap of electrodes or wirings can be sufficiently reduced. Note that a porous insulating layer with any of the above materials may be employed as the insulating layer 140 . A porous insulating layer has a lower dielectric constant than an insulating layer with high density, and thus allows a further reduction in capacitance generated by electrodes or wirings.
- an inorganic insulating material such as silicon oxide, silicon oxynitride, silicon nitride oxide, silicon nitride, or aluminum oxide. It is preferable to use a low dielectric constant (low-k) material for the insulating layer 140 because capacitance due to overlap of electrodes or wirings can be sufficiently reduced. Note that
- the insulating layer 140 can be formed using an organic insulating material such as polyimide or acrylic.
- the insulating layer 140 can be formed to have a single-layer structure or a stacked-layer structure using the above-described material. In this embodiment, the case of using silicon oxide for the insulating layer 140 is described.
- An oxide semiconductor used for the oxide semiconductor layer 144 preferably contains at least indium (In) or zinc (Zn). It is particularly preferable that In and Zn be contained.
- gallium (Ga) is preferably additionally contained.
- Tin (Sn) is preferably contained as a stabilizer.
- Hafnium (Hf) is preferably contained as a stabilizer.
- Aluminum (Al) is preferably contained as a stabilizer.
- one or more lanthanoids which include lanthanum (La), cerium (Ce), praseodymium (Pr), neodymium (Nd), samarium (Sm), europium (Eu), gadolinium (Gd), terbium (Tb), dysprosium (Dy), holmium (Ho), erbium (Er), thulium (Tm), ytterbium (Yb), and lutetium (Lu) may be contained.
- La lanthanum
- Ce cerium
- Pr praseodymium
- Nd neodymium
- Sm samarium
- Eu europium
- Gd gadolinium
- Tb terbium
- Dy dysprosium
- Ho holmium
- Er erbium
- Tm thulium
- Yb ytterbium
- Lu lutetium
- an “In—Ga—Zn-based oxide” means an oxide containing In, Ga, and Zn as its main components and there is no particular limitation on the ratio of In:Ga:Zn. Further, a metal element in addition to In, Ga, and Zn may be contained.
- the oxide semiconductor layer 144 may be formed using a material represented by the chemical formula, InMO 3 (ZnO) m , (m>0, where m is not an integer).
- M represents one or more metal elements selected from Ga, Fe, Mn, and Co.
- a material represented by In 3 SnO 5 (ZnO) n (n>0, where n is an integer) may be used as an oxide semiconductor.
- the composition is not limited to those described above, and a material having an appropriate composition may be used in accordance with necessary semiconductor characteristics (such as mobility, threshold voltage, and variation).
- necessary semiconductor characteristics such as mobility, threshold voltage, and variation.
- the carrier density, the impurity concentration, the defect density, the atomic ratio of a metal element to oxygen, the interatomic distance, the density, and the like be set as appropriate.
- the In—Sn—Zn-based oxide With the In—Sn—Zn-based oxide, a high mobility can be relatively easily obtained. However, the mobility can be increased by reducing the defect density in the bulk also in the case of using the In—Ga—Zn-based oxide.
- the oxide semiconductor layer 144 may be either single crystal or non-single-crystal. In the latter case, the oxide semiconductor layer 144 may be either amorphous or polycrystalline. Further, the oxide semiconductor may have either an amorphous structure including a crystalline portion or a non-amorphous structure.
- An amorphous oxide semiconductor can have a flat surface with relative ease; therefore, when a transistor is manufactured with the use of the oxide semiconductor, interface scattering can be reduced, and relatively high mobility can be obtained with relative ease.
- the oxide semiconductor is preferably formed over a flat surface.
- the oxide semiconductor is preferably formed over a surface with an average surface roughness (R a ) of less than or equal to 1 nm, preferably less than or equal to 0.3 nm, more preferably less than or equal to 0.1 nm.
- R a is obtained by three-dimensionally expanding centerline average roughness that is defined by JIS B 0601 so as to be able to be applied to a surface.
- R a can be expressed as an “average value of the absolute values of deviations from a reference surface to a specific surface” and is defined by the following formula.
- R a 1 S 0 ⁇ ⁇ y 1 y 2 ⁇ ⁇ x 1 x 2 ⁇ ⁇ f ⁇ ( x , y ) - Z 0 ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ x ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ y [ Formula ⁇ ⁇ 1 ]
- S 0 represents the area of a measurement surface (a rectangular region which is defined by four points represented by the coordinates (x 1 ,y 1 ), (x 1 ,y 2 ), (x 2 ,y 1 ), and (x 2 ,y 2 )), and Z 0 represents average height of a measurement surface.
- R a can be measured using an atomic force microscope (AFM).
- the thickness of the oxide semiconductor layer 144 is preferably greater than or equal to 3 nm and less than or equal to 30 nm This is because the transistor might be normally on when the oxide semiconductor layer is too thick (e.g., when the thickness is greater than or equal to 50 nm).
- the oxide semiconductor layer 144 is preferably formed by a method in which impurities such as hydrogen, water, a hydroxyl group, or hydride do not enter the oxide semiconductor layer 144 .
- the oxide semiconductor layer can be formed by a sputtering method or the like.
- the oxide semiconductor layer 144 is formed by a sputtering method with the use of an In—Ga—Zn—O-based oxide target.
- ITZO In—Sn—Zn-based oxide which is referred to as ITZO
- a target which has an atomic ratio of In:Sn:Zn of 1:2:2, 2:1:3, 1:1:1, 20:45:35, or the like is used.
- the filling rate of the oxide target is greater than or equal to 90% and less than or equal to 100%, preferably greater than or equal to 95% and less than or equal to 99.9%. This is because, with the use of the metal oxide target with a high filling rate, a dense oxide semiconductor layer can be formed.
- a film formation atmosphere may be a rare gas (typically, argon) atmosphere, an oxygen atmosphere, or a mixed atmosphere containing a rare gas and oxygen.
- An atmosphere of a high-purity gas from which impurities such as hydrogen, water, a hydroxyl group, or hydride are sufficiently removed is preferable, in order to prevent hydrogen, water, a hydroxyl group, hydride, or the like from entering the oxide semiconductor layer.
- the oxide semiconductor layer 144 can be formed as follows.
- the substrate is held in a film formation chamber which is kept under reduced pressure, and is then heated so that the substrate temperature reaches a temperature higher than 200° C. and lower than or equal to 500° C., preferably higher than 300° C. and lower than or equal to 500° C., more preferably higher than or equal to 350° C. and lower than or equal to 450° C.
- an entrapment vacuum pump such as a cryopump, an ion pump, or a titanium sublimation pump is desirably used as an evacuation unit.
- an evacuation unit may be a turbo pump provided with a cold trap.
- impurities such as hydrogen, water, a hydroxyl group, or hydride (preferably, also a compound containing a carbon atom) are removed, whereby the concentration of impurities such as hydrogen, water, a hydroxyl group, or hydride in the oxide semiconductor layer formed in the film formation chamber can be reduced.
- the substrate temperature is low (for example, lower than or equal to 100° C.) during film formation, a substance containing a hydrogen atom might enter the oxide semiconductor; thus, it is preferable that the substrate be heated at a temperature in the above range.
- the oxide semiconductor layer is formed with the substrate heated at the temperature described above, since the substrate temperature is high, hydrogen bonds are cut by heat and a substance containing a hydrogen atom is less likely to be taken into the oxide semiconductor layer. Therefore, when the oxide semiconductor layer is formed with the substrate heated at the temperature described above, the concentration of impurities such as hydrogen, water, a hydroxyl group, or hydride in the oxide semiconductor layer can be sufficiently reduced. Moreover, damage due to sputtering can be reduced.
- the following conditions are employed: the distance between the substrate and the target is 60 mm; the pressure is 0.4 Pa; the direct-current (DC) power is 0.5 kW; the substrate temperature is 400° C.; and the film formation atmosphere is an oxygen atmosphere (the proportion of the oxygen flow rate is 100%).
- a pulse direct-current power source is preferable because powder substances (also referred to as particles or dust) generated in film formation can be reduced and the film thickness can be uniform.
- powder substances also referred to as particles or dust
- the reverse sputtering refers to a method in which voltage is applied to a substrate to generate plasma in the vicinity of the substrate to modify a surface on the substrate side.
- argon instead of argon, a gas of nitrogen, helium, oxygen, or the like may be used.
- the oxide semiconductor layer 144 is formed by processing an oxide semiconductor layer.
- the oxide semiconductor layer can be processed by forming a mask having a desired shape over the oxide semiconductor layer and by etching the oxide semiconductor layer.
- the mask may be formed by a method such as photolithography. Alternatively, a method such as an inkjet method may be used to form the mask.
- a method such as an inkjet method may be used to form the mask.
- For the etching of the oxide semiconductor layer either dry etching or wet etching may be employed. It is needless to say that both of them may be employed in combination.
- heat treatment may be performed on the oxide semiconductor layer 144 .
- the heat treatment can further remove the substance containing a hydrogen atom from the oxide semiconductor layer 144 .
- the heat treatment is performed in an inert gas atmosphere at a temperature higher than or equal to 250° C. and lower than or equal to 700° C., preferably higher than or equal to 450° C. and lower than or equal to 600° C., or lower than a strain point of the substrate.
- the inert gas atmosphere is preferably an atmosphere which contains nitrogen or a rare gas (e.g., helium, neon, or argon) as its main component and does not contain water, hydrogen, or the like.
- the purity of nitrogen or a rare gas such as helium, neon, or argon introduced into a heat treatment apparatus is set to 6N (99.9999%) or more, preferably 7N (99.99999%) or more (i.e., the impurity concentration is 1 ppm or less, preferably 0.1 ppm or less).
- the heat treatment can be performed at 450° C. for one hour in a nitrogen atmosphere.
- the oxide semiconductor layer 144 is not exposed to the air during the heat treatment so that entry of water or hydrogen can be prevented.
- Impurities are reduced by the heat treatment, so that a transistor with extremely excellent characteristics can be realized.
- the oxide semiconductor layer 144 may exhibit slight (weak) p-type conductivity by adding an impurity imparting p-type conductivity such as tin (Sn) to the oxide semiconductor layer 144 .
- the oxide semiconductor layer 144 which exhibits weak p-type conductivity can be obtained by adding a small amount of an impurity for controlling valence electrons to the oxide semiconductor layer 144 which is purified as described above.
- the threshold voltage of the transistor 162 can be slightly shifted toward the positive side. Accordingly, the transistor 162 is prevented from becoming normally on and off-state current can be further reduced.
- the above heat treatment can also be referred to as dehydration treatment, dehydrogenation treatment, or the like because it has the effect of removing hydrogen, water, or the like.
- the heat treatment can be performed, for example, before the oxide semiconductor layer is processed into an island shape or after the gate insulating film is formed.
- Such dehydration treatment or dehydrogenation treatment may be conducted once or plural times.
- the electrodes 142 a and 142 b are formed by forming a conductive layer used for forming source and drain electrodes (including a wiring formed using the same layer as the source and drain electrodes) over the oxide semiconductor layer 144 and the like and by processing the conductive layer (see FIG. 13B ).
- the conductive layer can be formed by a PVD method or a CVD method.
- a material of the conductive layer an element selected from aluminum, chromium, copper, tantalum, titanium, molybdenum, and tungsten, an alloy including any of these elements as a component, or the like can be used.
- a material including one of manganese, magnesium, zirconium, beryllium, neodymium, and scandium or a combination of a plurality of these elements may be used.
- the conductive layer may have a single-layer structure or a stacked-layer structure including two or more layers.
- the conductive layer may have a single-layer structure of a titanium film or a titanium nitride film, a single-layer structure of an aluminum film including silicon, a two-layer structure in which a titanium film is stacked over an aluminum film, a two-layer structure in which a titanium film is stacked over a titanium nitride film, a three-layer structure in which a titanium film, an aluminum film, and a titanium film are stacked in this order, or the like.
- the conductive layer has a single-layer structure of a titanium film or a titanium nitride film, there is an advantage that the conductive layer can be easily processed into the electrodes 142 a and 142 b having tapered shapes.
- the conductive layer may be formed using a conductive metal oxide.
- a conductive metal oxide indium oxide (In 2 O 3 ), tin oxide (SnO 2 ), zinc oxide (ZnO), indium oxide-tin oxide alloy (In 2 O 3 —SnO 2 , which is abbreviated to ITO in some cases), indium oxide-zinc oxide alloy (In 2 O 3 —ZnO), or any of these metal oxide materials including silicon or silicon oxide can be used.
- the conductive layer is preferably etched such that the electrodes 142 a and 142 b are formed to have tapered end portions.
- the taper angle is in the range of 30° to 60°, for example.
- the channel length (L) of the transistor in the upper portion is determined by a distance between lower edge portions of the electrode 142 a and the electrode 142 b .
- light exposure is preferably performed with extreme ultraviolet rays whose wavelength is several nanometers to several tens of nanometers, which is extremely short.
- the resolution of light exposure with extreme ultraviolet rays is high and the focal depth is large.
- the channel length (L) of the transistor to be formed later can be set in the range of 10 nm to 1000 nm (1 ⁇ m), and the circuit can operate at higher speed.
- power consumption of the memory device can be reduced by miniaturization.
- the gate insulating layer 146 is formed so as to cover the electrodes 142 a and 142 b and to be in contact with part of the oxide semiconductor layer 144 (see FIG. 13C ).
- the gate insulating layer 146 can be formed by a CVD method, a sputtering method, or the like.
- the gate insulating layer 146 is preferably formed so as to contain silicon oxide, silicon nitride, silicon oxynitride, gallium oxide, aluminum oxide, tantalum oxide, hafnium oxide, yttrium oxide, hafnium silicate (HfSi x O y (x>0, y>0)), hafnium silicate (HfSi x O y (x>0, y>0)) to which nitrogen is added, hafnium aluminate (HfAl x O y (x>0, y>0)) to which nitrogen is added, or the like.
- the gate insulating layer 146 may have a single-layer structure or a stacked-layer structure in which these materials are combined. There is no particular limitation on the thickness of the gate insulating layer 146 ; the thickness is preferably small in order to ensure the operation of the transistor when the memory device is miniaturized. For example, in the case of using silicon oxide, the thickness can be in the range of 1 nm to 100 nm, preferably 10 nm to 50 nm.
- the gate insulating layer 146 may be formed using a high dielectric constant (high-k) material such as hafnium oxide, tantalum oxide, yttrium oxide, hafnium silicate (HfSi x O y (x>0, y>0)), hafnium silicate (HfSi x O y (x>0, y>0)) to which nitrogen is added, hafnium aluminate (HfAl x O y (x>0, y>0)) to which nitrogen is added.
- high-k high dielectric constant
- a high-k material for the gate insulating layer 146 makes it possible to increase the thickness in order to suppress gate leakage as well as ensuring electrical properties.
- a stacked-layer structure of a film including a high-k material and a film including any of silicon oxide, silicon nitride, silicon oxynitride, silicon nitride oxide, aluminum oxide, and the like may also be employed.
- the insulating layer in contact with the oxide semiconductor layer 144 may be formed using an insulating material containing a Group 13 element and oxygen.
- an insulating material containing a Group 13 element works well with the oxide semiconductor.
- an insulating material containing a Group 13 element refers to an insulating material containing one or more Group 13 elements.
- gallium oxide, aluminum oxide, aluminum gallium oxide, gallium aluminum oxide, or the like can be given.
- aluminum gallium oxide refers to a material in which the amount of aluminum is larger than that of gallium in atomic percent
- gallium aluminum oxide refers to a material in which the amount of gallium is larger than or equal to that of aluminum in atomic percent.
- a material containing gallium oxide may be used for a gate insulating layer, so that favorable characteristics can be kept at the interface between the oxide semiconductor layer and the gate insulating layer.
- pile-up of hydrogen at the interface between the oxide semiconductor layer and the insulating layer can be suppressed, for example Note that a similar effect can be obtained in the case where an element belonging to the same group as a constituent element of the oxide semiconductor is used for an insulating layer.
- it is effective to form an insulating layer with the use of a material containing aluminum oxide.
- aluminum oxide has a property of not easily transmitting water.
- the insulating material of the insulating layer in contact with the oxide semiconductor layer 144 is preferably made to contain oxygen in a proportion higher than that in the stoichiometric proportion by heat treatment in an oxygen atmosphere or by oxygen doping.
- Oxygen doping refers to adding oxygen into a bulk. Note that the term “bulk” is used in order to clarify that oxygen is added not only to a surface of a thin film but also to the inside of the thin film.
- oxygen doping includes oxygen plasma doping in which oxygen plasma is added to a bulk. The oxygen doping may be performed by an ion implantation method or an ion doping method.
- the composition of gallium aluminum oxide (aluminum gallium oxide) can be set to be Ga x Al 2 ⁇ x ,O 3+ ⁇ (0 ⁇ x ⁇ 2, 0 ⁇ 1) by heat treatment in an oxygen atmosphere or by oxygen doping.
- an insulating layer which has a region where the proportion of oxygen is higher than that in the stoichiometric proportion can be formed.
- the oxide semiconductor layer can be an i-type or substantially i-type oxide semiconductor.
- the insulating layer having a region where the proportion of oxygen is higher than that in the stoichiometric proportion may be applied to the insulating layer 140 serving as a base film for the oxide semiconductor layer 144 instead of the gate insulating layer 146 , or may be applied to both the gate insulating layer 146 and the base insulating layer 140 .
- second heat treatment is preferably performed in an inert gas atmosphere or an oxygen atmosphere.
- the temperature of the heat treatment is set in the range of 200° C. to 450° C., preferably 250° C. to 350° C.
- the heat treatment may be performed at 250° C. for one hour in a nitrogen atmosphere.
- oxygen can be supplied to the oxide semiconductor layer 144 to cover oxygen deficiency in the oxide semiconductor layer 144 , so that an i-type (intrinsic semiconductor) or substantially i-type oxide semiconductor layer can also be formed.
- the second heat treatment is performed in this embodiment after the gate insulating layer 146 is formed; there is no limitation on the timing of the second heat treatment.
- the second heat treatment may be performed after the gate electrode is formed.
- the first heat treatment and the second heat treatment may be performed in succession, the first heat treatment may also serve as the second heat treatment, or the second heat treatment may also serve as the first heat treatment.
- the oxide semiconductor layer 144 can be purified so as to contain a substance including a hydrogen atom as little as possible.
- a conductive layer for forming a gate electrode (including a wiring formed using the same layer as the gate electrode) is formed and is processed, so that the electrode 148 a and the conductive layer 148 b are formed (see FIG. 13D ).
- the electrode 148 a and the conductive layer 148 b can be formed using a metal material such as molybdenum, titanium, tantalum, tungsten, aluminum, copper, neodymium, or scandium, or an alloy material containing any of these materials as its main component. Note that the electrode 148 a and the conductive layer 148 b may have a single-layer structure or a stacked-layer structure.
- the insulating layer 150 is formed over the gate insulating layer 146 , the electrode 148 a , and the conductive layer 148 b (see FIG. 13E ).
- the insulating layer 150 can be formed by a PVD method, a CVD method, or the like.
- the insulating layer 150 can be formed using a material including an inorganic insulating material such as silicon oxide, silicon oxynitride, silicon nitride, hafnium oxide, gallium oxide, or aluminum oxide. Note that the insulating layer 150 is preferably formed using a low dielectric constant material or a low dielectric constant structure (such as a porous structure).
- the insulating layer 150 has a low dielectric constant, capacitance generated between wirings, electrodes, or the like can be reduced and operation at higher speed can be achieved.
- the insulating layer 150 has a single-layer structure in this embodiment, an embodiment of the disclosed invention is not limited to this example
- the insulating layer 150 may have a stacked-layer structure including two or more layers.
- the insulating layer 152 is formed over the insulating layer 150 (see FIG. 13E ).
- the feature of an embodiment of the present invention is that a plurality of memory cells is stacked. Therefore, it is desirable that the surface of the insulating layer 152 be planarized by CMP or the like.
- an opening reaching the electrode 142 a is formed in the gate insulating layer 146 , the insulating layer 150 , and the insulating layer 152 .
- An electrode 154 a is formed in the opening.
- the wiring 156 in contact with the electrode 154 a is formed over the insulating layer 152 (see FIG. 13E ).
- the opening is formed by selective etching with a mask or the like.
- the wiring 156 is formed by forming a conductive layer by a PVD method or a CVD method and then by patterning the conductive layer.
- a material of the conductive layer an element selected from aluminum, chromium, copper, tantalum, titanium, molybdenum, and tungsten, an alloy including any of these elements as a component, or the like can be used.
- a material including one of manganese, magnesium, zirconium, beryllium, neodymium, and scandium or a combination of a plurality of these elements may be used.
- the electrode 154 a can be formed in such a manner that a thin titanium film (about 5 nm) is formed in a region including the opening of the insulating layer 150 and the insulating layer 152 by a PVD method and then an aluminum film is formed so as to be embedded in the opening, for example
- the titanium film formed by a PVD method functions to reduce an oxide film (e.g., a natural oxide film) formed on a surface where the titanium film is formed, and to decrease the contact resistance with a lower electrode or the like (here, the electrode 142 a ).
- hillock of the aluminum film can be prevented.
- a copper film may be formed by a plating method after the formation of a barrier film of titanium, titanium nitride, or the like.
- the transistor 162 including the purified oxide semiconductor layer 144 and the capacitor 164 are completed (see FIG. 13E ).
- the insulating layer 140 is formed so as to cover the wiring 156 . Then, an opening is formed in the insulating layer 140 , and the electrode 500 in FIG. 9A or the electrode 553 in FIG. 16A is formed. After that, by repeating the manufacturing method illustrated in FIGS. 13A to 13E , a structure in which a plurality of memory cells is stacked can be realized.
- the insulating layer 140 can be formed by a PVD method, a CVD method, or the like.
- the insulating layer 140 can be formed so as to have a single-layer structure or a stacked-layer structure using a material including an inorganic insulating material such as silicon oxide, silicon oxynitride, silicon nitride, hafnium oxide, gallium oxide, or aluminum oxide or a material including an organic material such as polyimide or acrylic.
- the electrode 501 a and the electrode 501 b illustrated in FIG. 9A can be manufactured in a manner similar to that of the electrode 142 a and the electrode 142 b .
- the electrode 502 a and the electrode 502 b illustrated in FIG. 9A can be manufactured in a manner similar to that of the electrode 154 a.
- the electrode 552 illustrated in FIG. 16A can be manufactured in a manner similar to that of the wiring 156 .
- the electrode 551 illustrated in FIG. 16A can be manufactured in a manner similar to that of the electrode 154 a.
- the electrodes 142 a and 142 b are formed over the insulating layer 140 , and the oxide semiconductor layer 144 is formed over the insulating layer 140 and the electrodes 142 a and 142 b .
- the gate insulating layer 146 is formed over the electrodes 142 a and 142 b and the oxide semiconductor layer 144 .
- the gate electrode 148 a is formed so as to overlap with the oxide semiconductor layer 144
- the conductive layer 148 b is formed so as to overlap with the electrode 142 b.
- the electrode 148 a and the conductive layer 148 b are formed over the insulating layer 140 , and the gate insulating layer 146 is formed over the insulating layer 140 , the electrode 148 a , and the conductive layer 148 b . Then, the electrodes 142 a and 142 b are formed over the gate insulating layer 146 . After that, the oxide semiconductor layer 144 is formed over the gate insulating layer 146 so as to overlap with the electrode 148 a ; thus, the transistor 162 and the capacitor 164 are completed.
- the insulating layer 150 and the insulating layer 151 may be formed so as to cover the transistor 162 and the capacitor 164 .
- the insulating layer 150 preferably contains oxygen in a proportion higher than that in the stoichiometric proportion by heat treatment in an oxygen atmosphere or by oxygen doping, and the insulating layer 151 preferably hardly allows water or hydrogen to pass through.
- the oxide semiconductor layer 144 which is i-type or substantially i-type by filling oxygen vacancies in the oxide semiconductor layer 144 .
- the electrode 148 a and the conductive layer 148 b are formed over the insulating layer 140 , and the gate insulating layer 146 is formed over the insulating layer 140 , the electrode 148 a , and the conductive layer 148 b .
- the oxide semiconductor layer 144 is formed over the gate insulating layer 146 so as to overlap with the electrode 148 a .
- the electrodes 142 a and 142 b are formed over the oxide semiconductor layer 144 ; thus, the transistor 162 and the capacitor 164 are completed.
- FIG. 12B can be referred to for the insulating layer 150 and the insulating layer 151 .
- the electrode 148 a and the conductive layer 148 b are formed over the insulating layer 140 , and the gate insulating layer 146 (in FIG. 12D , the first gate insulating layer) is formed over the insulating layer 140 , the electrode 148 a (in FIG. 12D , the first gate electrode), and the electrode layer 148 .
- the oxide semiconductor layer 144 is formed over the gate insulating layer 146 so as to overlap with the electrode 148 a , and the electrodes 142 a and 142 b are formed over the oxide semiconductor layer 144 .
- the insulating layer 150 in FIG.
- the second gate insulating layer is formed over the oxide semiconductor layer 144 and the electrodes 142 a and 142 b , and the conductive layer 159 (in FIG. 12D , the second gate electrode) is formed so as to overlap with the oxide semiconductor layer 144 .
- the transistor 162 and the capacitor 164 are completed.
- the description of the material and the manufacturing method of the electrode 148 a can be referred to for the material and the manufacturing method of the conductive layer 159 .
- the oxide semiconductor layer 144 is formed over the insulating layer 140 , and an oxide conductive layer and a conductive layer are stacked over the insulating layer 140 and the oxide semiconductor layer 144 .
- a sputtering method As a method for forming the oxide conductive layer, a sputtering method, a vacuum evaporation method (an electron beam evaporation method or the like), an arc discharge ion plating method, or a spray method is used.
- a material of the oxide conductive layer zinc oxide, zinc aluminum oxide, zinc aluminum oxynitride, zinc gallium oxide, indium tin oxide, or the like can be used. In addition, any of the above materials may contain silicon oxide. Note that the description of the conductive layer used for forming the electrodes 142 a and 142 b can be referred to for the film formation method and the material of the conductive layer.
- the electrodes 142 a and 142 b and the oxide conductive layers 143 a and 143 b are formed by forming a mask over the conductive layer and selectively etching the conductive layer and the oxide conductive layer.
- etching conditions e.g., type of an etching agent, the concentration of an etching agent, and etching time
- etching conditions are adjusted as appropriate in order to prevent excessive etching of the oxide semiconductor layer.
- the gate insulating layer 146 is formed over the electrodes 142 a and 142 b and the oxide semiconductor layer 144 .
- the electrode 148 a is formed so as to overlap with the oxide semiconductor layer 144
- the conductive layer 148 b is formed so as to overlap with the electrode 142 b.
- the transistor 162 and the capacitor 164 are completed (see FIG. 11A ).
- an oxide semiconductor layer and an oxide conductive layer are stacked and are processed in one photolithography step, so that an island-shaped oxide semiconductor layer and an island-shaped oxide conductive layer are formed.
- the oxide conductive layers 143 a and 143 b serving as source and drain regions are formed by forming the electrodes 142 a and 142 b over the island-shaped oxide conductive layer and then by etching the island-shaped oxide conductive layer using the electrodes 142 a and 142 b as masks.
- the gate insulating layer 146 is formed over the electrodes 142 a and 142 b and the oxide semiconductor layer 144 .
- the electrode 148 a is formed so as to overlap with the oxide semiconductor layer 144
- the conductive layer 148 b is formed so as to overlap with the electrode 142 b.
- the transistor 162 and the capacitor 164 are completed (see FIG. 11B ).
- the oxide semiconductor layer 144 is purified and thus contains hydrogen at a concentration of 5 ⁇ 10 19 atoms/cm 3 or less, preferably 5 ⁇ 10 18 atoms/cm 3 or less, more preferably 5 ⁇ 10 17 atoms/cm 3 or less.
- the carrier density of the oxide semiconductor layer 144 is, for example, less than 1 ⁇ 10 12 /cm 3 , preferably less than 1.45 ⁇ 10 10 /cm 3 , which is sufficiently lower than the carrier density of a general silicon wafer (approximately 1 ⁇ 10 14 /cm 3 ).
- the off-state current of the transistor 162 is sufficiently small.
- the off-state current (per unit channel width (1 ⁇ m), here) of the transistor 162 at room temperature (25° C.) is 100 zA (1 zA (zeptoampere) is 1 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 21 A) or less, preferably 10 zA or less.
- the concentration of an alkali metal or an alkaline earth metal is sufficiently decreased in the oxide semiconductor layer 144 .
- the concentration of an alkali metal or an alkaline earth metal is decreased to such a degree that, for example, the concentrations of Na is 5 ⁇ 10 16 cm ⁇ 3 or less, preferably 1 ⁇ 10 16 cm ⁇ 3 or less, more preferably 1 ⁇ 10 15 cm ⁇ 3 or less, the concentration of Li is 5 ⁇ 10 15 cm ⁇ 3 or less, preferably 1 ⁇ 10 15 cm ⁇ 3 or less, and the concentration of K is 5 ⁇ 10 15 cm ⁇ 3 or less, preferably 1 ⁇ 10 15 cm ⁇ 3 or less.
- FIGS. 14A to 14D One embodiment of an oxide semiconductor layer which can be used for a channel formation region of the transistor 162 in the above embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 14A to 14D .
- the oxide semiconductor layer of this embodiment has a stacked structure including a first crystalline oxide semiconductor layer and a second crystalline oxide semiconductor layer which is over the first crystalline oxide semiconductor layer and has a larger thickness than the first crystalline oxide semiconductor layer.
- a first oxide semiconductor film with a thickness greater than or equal to 1 nm and less than or equal to 10 nm is formed over an insulating layer 140 .
- an oxide insulating layer with a thickness greater than or equal to 50 nm and less than or equal to 600 nm is formed as the insulating layer 140 by a PCVD method or a sputtering method.
- a single layer selected from a silicon oxide film, a gallium oxide film, an aluminum oxide film, a silicon oxynitride film, an aluminum oxynitride film, and a silicon nitride oxide film or a stack of any of these films can be used.
- the first oxide semiconductor film is formed by a sputtering method, and the substrate temperature in the film formation by a sputtering method is set to be higher than or equal to 200° C. and lower than or equal to 400° C.
- first heat treatment is performed under a condition where the atmosphere of a chamber in which the substrate is set is an atmosphere of nitrogen or dry air.
- the temperature of the first heat treatment is higher than or equal to 400° C. and lower than or equal to 750° C.
- a first crystalline oxide semiconductor layer 145 a is formed (see FIG. 14A ).
- the first heat treatment causes crystallization from a film surface and crystal grows from the film surface toward the inside of the film; thus, c-axis aligned crystals are obtained.
- the first heat treatment a large amount of zinc and oxygen gather about the film surface, and one or more layers of graphene-type two-dimensional crystal including zinc and oxygen and having a hexagonal upper plane are formed at the outermost surface; the one or more layers at the outermost surface grow in the thickness direction to form a stack of layers.
- crystal growth proceeds from the surface to the inside and further from the inside to the bottom.
- oxygen in the insulating layer 140 that is an oxide insulating layer is diffused to an interface between the insulating layer 140 and the first crystalline oxide semiconductor layer 145 a or the vicinity of the interface (within ⁇ 5 nm from the interface), whereby oxygen deficiencies in the first crystalline oxide semiconductor layer are reduced. Therefore, it is preferable that oxygen be included in (a bulk of) the insulating layer 140 used as a base insulating layer for the first crystalline oxide semiconductor layer or at the interface between the first crystalline oxide semiconductor layer 145 a and the insulating layer 140 at an amount that exceeds at least the stoichiometric proportion.
- a second oxide semiconductor film with a thickness more than 10 nm is formed over the first crystalline oxide semiconductor layer 145 a .
- the second oxide semiconductor film is formed by a sputtering method, and the substrate temperature in the film formation is set to be higher than or equal to 200° C. and lower than or equal to 400° C.
- precursors can be arranged in the oxide semiconductor film formed above and in contact with the surface of the first crystalline oxide semiconductor layer, and so-called orderliness can be obtained.
- the distance between the substrate and the target is 170 mm
- the substrate temperature is 400° C.
- the pressure is 0.4 Pa
- the direct-current (DC) power is 0.5 kW.
- second heat treatment is performed under a condition where the atmosphere of a chamber in which the substrate is set is an atmosphere of nitrogen or dry air.
- the temperature of the second heat treatment is higher than or equal to 400° C. and lower than or equal to 750° C.
- a second crystalline oxide semiconductor layer 145 b is formed (see FIG. 14B ).
- the second heat treatment is performed in a nitrogen atmosphere, an oxygen atmosphere, or a mixed atmosphere of nitrogen and oxygen, whereby the density of the second crystalline oxide semiconductor layer is increased and the number of defects therein is reduced.
- crystal growth proceeds with the use of the first crystalline oxide semiconductor layer 145 a as a nucleus, in the thickness direction, that is, from the bottom to the inside; thus, the second crystalline oxide semiconductor layer 145 b is formed.
- steps from the formation of the insulating layer 140 to the second heat treatment be successively performed without exposure to the air.
- the steps from the formation of the insulating layer 140 to the second heat treatment are preferably performed in an atmosphere which is controlled to include little hydrogen and moisture (such as an inert gas atmosphere, a reduced-pressure atmosphere, or a dry-air atmosphere); in terms of moisture, for example, a dry nitrogen atmosphere with a dew point of ⁇ 40° C. or lower, preferably a dew point of ⁇ 50° C. or lower may be employed.
- the stack of the oxide semiconductor layers including the first crystalline oxide semiconductor layer 145 a and the second crystalline oxide semiconductor layer 145 b is processed into an oxide semiconductor layer 145 including a stack of island-shaped oxide semiconductor layers (see FIG. 14C ).
- the interface between the first crystalline oxide semiconductor layer 145 a and the second crystalline oxide semiconductor layer 145 b is indicated by a dotted line, and the stacked structure of the first crystalline oxide semiconductor layer and the second crystalline oxide semiconductor layer is illustrated; however, the interface is actually not distinct and is illustrated for easy understanding.
- the stack of the oxide semiconductor layers can be processed by being etched after a mask having a desired shape is formed over the stack of the oxide semiconductor layers.
- the mask may be formed by a method such as photolithography. Alternatively, a method such as an inkjet method may be used to form the mask.
- etching of the stack of oxide semiconductor layers either wet etching or dry etching may be employed. It is needless to say that both of them may be employed in combination.
- a feature of the first crystalline oxide semiconductor layer and the second crystalline oxide semiconductor layer obtained by the above formation method is that these layers have c-axis alignment.
- the first crystalline oxide semiconductor layer and the second crystalline oxide semiconductor layer comprise an oxide including a crystal with c-axis alignment (also referred to as c-axis aligned crystal (CAAC)), which has neither a single crystal structure nor an amorphous structure.
- CAAC c-axis aligned crystal
- the first crystalline oxide semiconductor layer and the second crystalline oxide semiconductor layer partly include a crystal grain boundary.
- an oxide including crystals with c-axis alignment also referred to as c-axis aligned crystal (CAAC)
- CAAC c-axis aligned crystal
- metal atoms are arranged in a layered manner, or metal atoms and oxygen atoms are arranged in a layered manner along the c-axis, and the direction of the a-axis or the b-axis is varied in the a-b plane (the crystal rotates around the c-axis).
- an oxide including CAAC means a non-single crystal oxide including a phase which has a triangular, hexagonal, regular triangular, or regular hexagonal atomic arrangement when seen from the direction perpendicular to the a-b plane and in which metal atoms are arranged in a layered manner or metal atoms and oxygen atoms are arranged in a layered manner when seen from the direction perpendicular to the c-axis direction.
- the CAAC is not a single crystal, but this does not mean that the CAAC is composed of only an amorphous component. Although the CAAC includes a crystallized portion (crystalline portion), a boundary between one crystalline portion and another crystalline portion is not clear in some cases.
- oxygen may be substituted for part of oxygen included in the CAAC.
- the c-axes of individual crystalline portions included in the CAAC may be aligned in one direction (e.g., a direction perpendicular to a surface of a substrate over which the CAAC is formed or a surface of the CAAC).
- the normals of the a-b planes of the individual crystalline portions included in the CAAC may be aligned in one direction (e.g., a direction perpendicular to a surface of a substrate over which the CAAC is formed or a surface of the CAAC).
- the CAAC becomes a conductor, a semiconductor, or an insulator depending on its composition or the like.
- the CAAC transmits or does not transmit visible light depending on its composition or the like.
- CAAC there is a crystal which is formed into a film shape and has a triangular or hexagonal atomic arrangement when observed from the direction perpendicular to a surface of the film or a surface of a supporting substrate, and in which metal atoms are arranged in a layered manner or metal atoms and oxygen atoms (or nitrogen atoms) are arranged in a layered manner when a cross section of the film is observed.
- FIGS. 20A to 20E An example of a crystal structure of the CAAC will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 20A to 20E , FIGS. 21A to 21C , and FIGS. 22A to 22C .
- the vertical direction corresponds to the c-axis direction and a plane perpendicular to the c-axis direction corresponds to the a-b plane, unless otherwise specified.
- an upper half and “a lower half” are simply used, they refer to an upper half above the a-b plane and a lower half below the a-b plane (an upper half and a lower half with respect to the a-b plane).
- O surrounded by a circle represents tetracoodianate O and O surrounded by a double circle represents tricoodenate O.
- FIG. 20A illustrates a structure including one hexacoordinate In atom and six tetracoordinate oxygen (hereinafter referred to as tetracoordinate O) atoms proximate to the In atom.
- tetracoordinate O tetracoordinate oxygen
- FIG. 20A illustrates a structure including one metal atom and oxygen atoms proximate thereto.
- the structure in FIG. 20A is actually an octahedral structure, but is illustrated as a planar structure for simplicity. Note that three tetracoordinate O atoms exist in each of an upper half and a lower half in FIG. 20A .
- electric charge is 0.
- FIG. 20B illustrates a structure including one pentacoordinate Ga atom, three tricoordinate oxygen (hereinafter referred to as tricoordinate O) atoms proximate to the Ga atom, and two tetracoordinate O atoms proximate to the Ga atom. All the tricoordinate O atoms exist on the a-b plane. One tetracoordinate O atom exists in each of an upper half and a lower half in FIG. 20B . An In atom can also have the structure illustrated in FIG. 20B because an In atom can have five ligands. In the small group illustrated in FIG. 20B , electric charge is 0.
- FIG. 20C illustrates a structure including one tetracoordinate Zn atom and four tetracoordinate O atoms proximate to the Zn atom.
- one tetracoordinate O atom exists in an upper half and three tetracoordinate O atoms exist in a lower half.
- three tetracoordinate O atoms may exist in the upper half and one tetracoordinate O atom may exist in the lower half in FIG. 20C .
- electric charge is 0.
- FIG. 20D illustrates a structure including one hexacoordinate Sn atom and six tetracoordinate O atoms proximate to the Sn atom.
- three tetracoordinate O atoms exist in each of an upper half and a lower half
- electric charge is +1.
- FIG. 20E illustrates a small group including two Zn atoms.
- one tetracoordinate O atom exists in each of an upper half and a lower half.
- electric charge is ⁇ 1.
- a plurality of small groups forms a medium group
- a plurality of medium groups forms a large group (also referred to as a unit cell).
- the three O atoms in the upper half with respect to the hexacoordinate In atom in FIG. 20A each have three proximate In atoms in the downward direction, and the three O atoms in the lower half each have three proximate In atoms in the upward direction.
- the one O atom in the upper half with respect to the pentacoordinate Ga atom in FIG. 20B has one proximate Ga atom in the downward direction, and the one O atom in the lower half has one proximate Ga atom in the upward direction.
- the 20C has one proximate Zn atom in the downward direction, and the three O atoms in the lower half each have three proximate Zn atoms in the upward direction.
- the number of the tetracoordinate O atoms above the metal atom is equal to the number of the metal atoms proximate to and below each of the tetracoordinate O atoms.
- the number of the tetracoordinate O atoms below the metal atom is equal to the number of the metal atoms proximate to and above each of the tetracoordinate O atoms.
- the coordination number of the tetracoordinate O atom is 4, the sum of the number of the metal atoms proximate to and below the O atom and the number of the metal atoms proximate to and above the O atom is 4. Accordingly, when the sum of the number of tetracoordinate O atoms above a metal atom and the number of tetracoordinate O atoms below another metal atom is 4, the two kinds of small groups including the metal atoms can be bonded.
- the hexacoordinate metal (In or Sn) atom is bonded through three tetracoordinate O atoms in the lower half, it is bonded to the pentacoordinate metal (Ga or In) atom or the tetracoordinate metal (Zn) atom.
- a metal atom whose coordination number is 4, 5, or 6 is bonded to another metal atom through a tetracoordinate O atom in the c-axis direction.
- a medium group can be formed in a different manner by combining a plurality of small groups so that the total electric charge of the layered structure is 0.
- FIG. 21A illustrates a model of a medium group included in a layered structure of an In—Sn—Zn—O-based material.
- FIG. 21B illustrates a large group including three medium groups.
- FIG. 21C illustrates an atomic arrangement in the case where the layered structure in FIG. 21B is observed from the c-axis direction.
- a tricoordinate O atom is omitted for simplicity, and a tetracoordinate O atom is illustrated by a circle; the number in the circle shows the number of tetracoordinate O atoms.
- circled 3 three tetracoordinate O atoms existing in each of an upper half and a lower half with respect to a Sn atom are denoted by circled 3 .
- circled 1 one tetracoordinate O atom existing in each of an upper half and a lower half with respect to an In atom is denoted by circled 1 .
- 21A also illustrates a Zn atom proximate to one tetracoordinate O atom in a lower half and three tetracoordinate O atoms in an upper half, and a Zn atom proximate to one tetracoordinate O atom in an upper half and three tetracoordinate O atoms in a lower half.
- a Sn atom proximate to three tetracoordinate O atoms in each of an upper half and a lower half is bonded to an In atom proximate to one tetracoordinate O atom in each of an upper half and a lower half
- the In atom is bonded to a Zn atom proximate to three tetracoordinate O atoms in an upper half
- the Zn atom is bonded to an In atom proximate to three tetracoordinate O atoms in each of an upper half and a lower half through one tetracoordinate O atom in a lower half with respect to the Zn atom
- the In atom is bonded to a small group that includes two Zn atoms and is proximate to one tetracoordinate O atom in an upper half
- the small group is
- electric charge for one bond of a tricoordinate O atom and electric charge for one bond of a tetracoordinate O atom can be assumed to be ⁇ 0.667 and ⁇ 0.5, respectively.
- electric charge of a (hexacoordinate or pentacoordinate) In atom, electric charge of a (tetracoordinate) Zn atom, and electric charge of a (pentacoordinate or hexacoordinate) Sn atom are +3, +2, and +4, respectively. Accordingly, electric charge in a small group including a Sn atom is +1. Therefore, electric charge of ⁇ 1, which cancels +1, is needed to form a layered structure including a Sn atom.
- the small group including two Zn atoms as illustrated in FIG. 20E can be given.
- electric charge of one small group including a Sn atom can be cancelled, so that the total electric charge of the layered structure can be 0.
- an In—Sn—Zn—O-based crystal (In 2 SnZn 3 O 8 ) can be obtained.
- a layered structure of the obtained In—Sn—Zn—O-based crystal can be expressed as a composition formula, In 2 SnZn 2 O 7 (ZnO) m (m is 0 or a natural number).
- a four-component metal oxide such as an In—Sn—Ga—Zn-based oxide
- a three-component metal oxide such as an In—Ga—Zn-based oxide (also referred to as IGZO), an In—Al—Zn-based oxide, a Sn—Ga—Zn-based oxide, an Al—Ga—Zn-based oxide, a Sn—Al—Zn-based oxide, an In—Hf—Zn-based oxide, an In—La—Zn-based oxide, an In—Ce—Zn-based oxide, an In—Pr—Zn-based oxide, an In—Nd—Zn-based oxide, an In—Sm—Zn-based oxide, an In—Eu—Zn-based oxide, an In—Gd—Zn-based oxide, an In—Tb—Zn-based oxide, an In—Dy—Zn-based oxide, an In—Ho—Zn-based oxide, an In—Sn—Ga—Zn-based oxide
- FIG. 22A illustrates a model of a medium group included in a layered structure of an In—Ga—Zn—O-based material.
- an In atom proximate to three tetracoordinate O atoms in each of an upper half and a lower half is bonded to a Zn atom proximate to one tetracoordinate O atom in an upper half
- the Zn atom is bonded to a Ga atom proximate to one tetracoordinate O atom in each of an upper half and a lower half through three tetracoordinate O atoms in a lower half with respect to the Zn atom
- the Ga atom is bonded to an In atom proximate to three tetracoordinate O atoms in each of an upper half and a lower half through one tetracoordinate O atom in a lower half with respect to the Ga atom.
- a plurality of such medium groups is bonded, so that a large group is formed.
- FIG. 22B illustrates a large group including three medium groups.
- FIG. 22C illustrates an atomic arrangement in the case where the layered structure in FIG. 22B is observed from the c-axis direction.
- a large group can be formed using not only the medium group illustrated in FIG. 22A but also a medium group in which the arrangement of the In atom, the Ga atom, and the Zn atom is different from that in FIG. 22A .
- a substrate heating temperature be 100° C. to 500° C., more preferably 200° C. to 400° C., still preferably 250° C. to 300° C.
- the deposited oxide semiconductor film is subjected to heat treatment at a temperature higher than the substrate heating temperature in the film formation. Accordingly, microdefects in the film and defects at the interface of stacked layers can be repaired.
- the first and second crystalline oxide semiconductor layers are formed using an oxide material containing at least Zn, for example, a four-component metal oxide such as an In—Al—Ga—Zn—O-based material, or an In—Sn—Ga—Zn—O-based material; a three-component metal oxide such as an In—Ga—Zn—O-based material, an In—Al—Zn—O-based material, an In—Sn—Zn—O-based material, a Sn—Ga—Zn—O-based material, an Al—Ga—Zn—O-based material, or a Sn—Al—Zn—O-based material; a two-component metal oxide such as an In—Zn—O-based material, a Sn—Zn—O-based material, an Al—Zn—O-based material, or a Zn—Mg—O-based material; or a Zn—O-based material.
- a four-component metal oxide such as an In—
- an In—Si—Ga—Zn—O-based material an In—Ga—B—Zn—O-based material, or an In—B—Zn—O-based material may be used.
- the above materials may contain SiO 2 .
- an In—Ga—Zn—O-based material means an oxide material containing indium (In), gallium (Ga), and zinc (Zn), and there is no limitation on the composition ratio thereof.
- the In—Ga—Zn—O-based material may include an element other than In, Ga, and Zn.
- a stacked structure including three or more layers may be formed by repeatedly performing a process of film formation and heat treatment for forming a third crystalline oxide semiconductor layer after the second crystalline oxide semiconductor layer is formed.
- Embodiment 2 can be referred to for materials and formation methods of the electrodes 142 a and 142 b , the gate insulating layer 146 , the electrode 148 a , and the conductive layer 148 b.
- the oxide semiconductor layer 145 including the stack of the oxide semiconductor layers formed by the above formation method can be used as appropriate for the transistor 162 described in Embodiment 2.
- the transistor 162 in which the stack of the oxide semiconductor layers of this embodiment is used as the oxide semiconductor layer 144 , an electric field is not applied from one surface to the other surface of the oxide semiconductor layer and current does not flow in the thickness direction of the stack of the oxide semiconductor layers.
- the transistor has a structure in which current mainly flows along the interface of the stack of the oxide semiconductor layers; therefore, even when the transistor 162 is irradiated with light or even when a BT stress is applied to the transistor 162 , deterioration of transistor characteristics is suppressed or reduced.
- the transistor 162 By forming the transistor 162 with the use of a stack of a first crystalline oxide semiconductor layer and a second crystalline oxide semiconductor layer, like the oxide semiconductor layer 145 , the transistor can have stable electrical characteristics and high reliability.
- This embodiment can be implemented in an appropriate combination with the structures described in the other embodiments.
- FIGS. 15A to 15F application of the memory device described in any of the above embodiments to a semiconductor device such as an electronic device will be described with reference to FIGS. 15A to 15F .
- application of the above-described memory device to electronic devices such as a computer, a cellular phone (also referred to as a mobile phone or a mobile phone set), a portable information terminal (including a portable game machine, an audio reproducing device, and the like), a camera such as a digital camera or a digital video camera, electronic paper, and a television set (also referred to as a television or a television receiver) is described.
- FIG. 15A illustrates a notebook personal computer that includes a housing 701 , a housing 702 , a display portion 703 , a keyboard 704 , and the like.
- the memory device described in any of the above embodiments is provided. Therefore, a notebook personal computer in which writing and reading of data are performed at high speed, data is stored for a long time, and power consumption is sufficiently reduced can be realized.
- FIG. 15B illustrates a personal digital assistant (PDA).
- PDA personal digital assistant
- a display portion 713 In a main body 711 , a display portion 713 , an external interface 715 , an operation button 714 , and the like are provided. Further, a stylus 712 and the like for operation of the personal digital assistant are provided.
- the main body 711 the memory device described in any of the above embodiments is provided. Therefore, a personal digital assistant in which writing and reading of data are performed at high speed, data is stored for a long time, and power consumption is sufficiently reduced can be realized.
- FIG. 15C illustrates an e-book reader 720 mounted with electronic paper, which includes two housings, a housing 721 and a housing 723 .
- the housing 721 and the housing 723 are provided with a display portion 725 and a display portion 727 , respectively.
- the housings 721 and 723 are connected by a hinge portion 737 and can be opened or closed with the hinge portion 737 .
- the housing 721 is provided with a power switch 731 , an operation key 733 , a speaker 735 , and the like.
- At least one of the housings 721 and 723 is provided with the memory device described in any of the above embodiments. Therefore, an e-book reader in which writing and reading of data are performed at high speed, data is stored for a long time, and power consumption is sufficiently reduced can be realized.
- FIG. 15D illustrates a cellular phone which includes two housings, a housing 740 and a housing 741 .
- the housings 740 and 741 which are shown unfolded in FIG. 15D can overlap with each other by sliding; thus, the size of the cellular phone can be reduced, which makes the cellular phone suitable for being carried.
- the housing 741 includes a display panel 742 , a speaker 743 , a microphone 744 , an operation key 745 , a pointing device 746 , a camera lens 747 , an external connection terminal 748 , and the like.
- the housing 740 includes a solar cell 749 for charging the cellular phone, an external memory slot 750 , and the like.
- an antenna is incorporated in the housing 741 .
- At least one of the housings 740 and 741 is provided with the memory device described in any of the above embodiments. Therefore, a cellular phone in which writing and reading of data are performed at high speed, data is stored for a long time, and power consumption is sufficiently reduced can be realized.
- FIG. 15E illustrates a digital camera which includes a main body 761 , a display portion 767 , an eyepiece 763 , an operation switch 764 , a display portion 765 , a battery 766 , and the like.
- the main body 761 the memory device described in any of the above embodiments is provided. Therefore, a digital camera in which writing and reading of data are performed at high speed, data is stored for a long time, and power consumption is sufficiently reduced can be realized.
- FIG. 15F illustrates a television set 770 which includes a housing 771 , a display portion 773 , a stand 775 , and the like.
- the television set 770 can be operated with an operation switch of the housing 771 or a remote controller 780 .
- the memory device described in any of the above embodiments is mounted on the housing 771 and the remote controller 780 . Therefore, a television set in which writing and reading of data are performed at high speed, data is stored for a long time, and power consumption is sufficiently reduced can be realized.
- the memory device in any of the above embodiments is mounted on each of the electronic devices described in this embodiment. Therefore, electronic devices in which power consumption is reduced can be realized.
- the actually measured field-effect mobility of an insulated gate transistor can be lower than its intrinsic mobility because of a variety of reasons; this phenomenon occurs not only in the case of using an oxide semiconductor.
- One of the reasons that reduce the mobility is a defect inside a semiconductor or a defect at an interface between the semiconductor and an insulating film
- the field-effect mobility on the assumption that no defect exists inside the semiconductor can be calculated theoretically.
- the field-effect mobility of an ideal oxide semiconductor without a defect inside the semiconductor is calculated theoretically, and calculation results of characteristics of minute transistors that are manufactured using such an oxide semiconductor are shown.
- the measured field-effect mobility can be expressed as the following formula.
- E represents the height of the potential barrier
- k represents the Boltzmann constant
- T represents the absolute temperature.
- e represents the elementary charge
- N represents the average defect density per unit area in a channel
- e represents the dielectric constant of the semiconductor
- n represents the number of carriers per unit area in the channel
- C ox represents the capacitance per unit area
- V g represents the gate voltage
- t represents the thickness of the channel.
- the thickness of the semiconductor layer is less than or equal to 30 nm
- the thickness of the channel may be regarded as being the same as the thickness of the semiconductor layer.
- the drain current I d in a linear region can be expressed as the following formula.
- I d W ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ V g ⁇ V d ⁇ C ox L ⁇ exp ⁇ ( - E kT ) [ Formula ⁇ ⁇ 4 ]
- L represents the channel length and W represents the channel width, and L and W are each 10 ⁇ m.
- V d represents the drain voltage.
- the right side of Formula 5 is a function of V g . From the formula, it is found that the defect density N can be obtained from the slope of a line in a graph which is obtained by plotting actual measured values with ln(I d /V g ) as the ordinate and 1/V g as the abscissa. That is, the defect density can be evaluated from the I d -V g characteristics of the transistor.
- the defect density N of an oxide semiconductor in which the ratio of indium (In), tin (Sn), and zinc (Zn) is 1:1:1 is approximately 1 ⁇ 10 12 /cm 2 .
- ⁇ 0 can be calculated to be 120 cm 2 /Vs from Formula 2 and Formula 3.
- the measured mobility of an In—Sn—Zn oxide including a defect is approximately 35 cm 2 /Vs.
- the mobility ⁇ 0 of the oxide semiconductor is expected to be 120 cm 2 /Vs.
- the mobility ⁇ 1 at a position that is distance x away from the interface between the channel and the gate insulating layer can be expressed as the following formula.
- D represents the electric field in the gate direction
- B and G are constants.
- B and G can be obtained from actual measurement results; according to the above measurement results, B is 4.75 ⁇ 10 7 cm/s and G is 10 nm (the depth to which the influence of interface scattering reaches).
- D is increased (i.e., when the gate voltage is increased)
- the second term of Formula 6 is increased and accordingly the mobility ⁇ 1 is decreased.
- a gate, a source, and a drain were assumed to be 5.5 eV, 4.6 eV, and 4.6 eV, respectively.
- the thickness of a gate insulating layer was assumed to be 100 nm, and the relative permittivity thereof was assumed to be 4.1.
- the channel length and the channel width were each assumed to be 10 ⁇ m, and the drain voltage V d was assumed to be 0.1 V.
- the mobility has a peak of more than 100 cm 2 /Vs at a gate voltage that is a little over 1 V and is decreased as the gate voltage becomes higher because the influence of interface scattering is increased. Note that in order to reduce interface scattering, it is desirable that a surface of the semiconductor layer be flat at the atomic level (atomic layer flatness).
- FIGS. 24A to 24C Calculation results of characteristics of minute transistors which are manufactured using an oxide semiconductor having such a mobility are shown in FIGS. 24A to 24C , FIGS. 25A to 25C , and FIGS. 26A to 26C .
- FIGS. 27A and 27B illustrate cross-sectional structures of the transistors used for the calculation.
- the transistors illustrated in FIGS. 27A and 27B each include a semiconductor region 8103 a and a semiconductor region 8103 c which have n + -type conductivity in an oxide semiconductor layer.
- the resistivities of the semiconductor region 8103 a and the semiconductor region 8103 c are 2 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 3 ⁇ cm.
- the transistor illustrated in FIG. 27A is formed over a base insulating layer 8101 and an embedded insulator 8102 which is embedded in the base insulating layer 8101 and formed of aluminum oxide.
- the transistor includes the semiconductor region 8103 a , the semiconductor region 8103 c , an intrinsic semiconductor region 8103 b serving as a channel formation region therebetween, and a gate 8105 .
- a gate insulating layer 8104 is formed between the gate 8105 and the semiconductor region 8103 b .
- a sidewall insulator 8106 a and a sidewall insulator 8106 b are formed on both side surfaces of the gate 8105 , and an insulator 8107 is formed over the gate 8105 so as to prevent a short circuit between the gate 8105 and another wiring.
- the sidewall insulator has a width of 5 nm
- a source 8108 a and a drain 8108 b are provided in contact with the semiconductor region 8103 a and the semiconductor region 8103 c , respectively. Note that the channel width of this transistor is 40 nm.
- the transistor of FIG. 27B is the same as the transistor of FIG. 27A in that it is formed over the base insulating layer 8101 and the embedded insulator 8102 formed of aluminum oxide and that it includes the semiconductor region 8103 a , the semiconductor region 8103 c , the intrinsic semiconductor region 8103 b provided therebetween, the gate 8105 having a width of 33 nm, the gate insulating layer 8104 , the sidewall insulator 8106 a , the sidewall insulator 8106 b , the insulator 8107 , the source 8108 a , and the drain 8108 b.
- the transistor illustrated in FIG. 27B is different from the transistor illustrated in FIG. 27A in the conductivity type of semiconductor regions under the sidewall insulator 8106 a and the sidewall insulator 8106 b .
- the semiconductor regions under the sidewall insulator 8106 a and the sidewall insulator 8106 b are part of the semiconductor region 8103 a having n + -type conductivity and part of the semiconductor region 8103 c having n + -type conductivity
- the semiconductor regions under the sidewall insulator 8106 a and the sidewall insulator 8106 b are part of the intrinsic semiconductor region 8103 b .
- a region having a width of L off which overlaps with neither the semiconductor region 8103 a (the semiconductor region 8103 c ) nor the gate 8105 is provided.
- This region is called an offset region, and the width L off is called an offset length.
- the offset length is equal to the width of the sidewall insulator 8106 a (the sidewall insulator 8106 b ).
- FIGS. 24A to 24C show the gate voltage (V g : a potential difference between the gate and the source) dependence of the drain current (I d , a solid line) and the mobility ( ⁇ , a dotted line) of the transistor having the structure illustrated in FIG. 27A .
- the drain current I d is obtained by calculation under the assumption that the drain voltage (a potential difference between the drain and the source) is +1 V and the mobility ⁇ is obtained by calculation under the assumption that the drain voltage is +0.1 V.
- FIG. 24A shows the gate voltage dependence of the transistor in the case where the thickness of the gate insulating layer is 15 nm
- FIG. 24B shows that of the transistor in the case where the thickness of the gate insulating layer is 10 nm
- FIG. 24C shows that of the transistor in the case where the thickness of the gate insulating layer is 5 nm.
- the drain current I d off-state current
- the drain current I d in an on state on-state current.
- the graphs show that the drain current exceeds 10 ⁇ A, which is required in a memory cell and the like, at a gate voltage of around 1 V.
- FIGS. 25A to 25C show the gate voltage V g dependence of the drain current I d (a solid line) and the mobility ⁇ (a dotted line) of the transistor having the structure illustrated in FIG. 27B where the offset length L off is 5 nm
- the drain current I d is obtained by calculation under the assumption that the drain voltage is +1 V and the mobility ⁇ is obtained by calculation under the assumption that the drain voltage is +0.1 V.
- FIG. 25A shows the gate voltage dependence of the transistor in the case where the thickness of the gate insulating layer is 15 nm
- FIG. 25B shows that of the transistor in the case where the thickness of the gate insulating layer is 10 nm
- FIG. 25C shows that of the transistor in the case where the thickness of the gate insulating layer is 5 nm.
- FIGS. 26A to 26C show the gate voltage dependence of the drain current I d (a solid line) and the mobility ⁇ (a dotted line) of the transistor having the structure illustrated in FIG. 27B where the offset length L off is 15 nm
- the drain current I d is obtained by calculation under the assumption that the drain voltage is +1 V and the mobility ⁇ is obtained by calculation under the assumption that the drain voltage is +0.1 V.
- FIG. 26A shows the gate voltage dependence of the transistor in the case where the thickness of the gate insulating layer is 15 nm
- FIG. 26B shows that of the transistor in the case where the thickness of the gate insulating layer is 10 nm
- FIG. 26C shows that of the transistor in the case where the thickness of the gate insulating layer is 5 nm.
- the off-state current is significantly decreased, whereas no noticeable change arises in the peak value of the mobility ⁇ and the on-state current.
- the peak of the mobility ⁇ is approximately 80 cm 2 /Vs in FIGS. 24A to 24C , approximately 60 cm 2 /Vs in FIGS. 25A to 25C , and approximately 40 cm 2 /Vs in FIGS. 26A to 26C ; thus, the peak of the mobility ⁇ is decreased as the offset length L off is increased. Further, the same applies to the off-state current. The on-state current is also decreased as the offset length L off is increased; however, the decrease in the on-state current is much more gradual than the decrease in the off-state current. Further, the graphs show that in either of the structures, the drain current exceeds 10 ⁇ A, which is required in a memory cell and the like, at a gate voltage of around 1 V.
- a transistor in which an oxide semiconductor containing In, Sn, and Zn as main components is used as a channel formation region can have favorable characteristics by depositing the oxide semiconductor while heating a substrate or by performing heat treatment after an oxide semiconductor film is formed.
- a main component refers to an element included in a composition at greater than or equal to 5 atomic %.
- the case where the field effect mobility of the transistor is improved by intentionally heating the substrate after formation of the oxide semiconductor film will be described with reference to FIGS. 28A to 28C , FIGS. 29A and 29B , FIGS. 30A and 30B , FIG. 31 , FIG. 32 , FIG. 33 , and FIGS. 34A and 34B .
- the field-effect mobility of the transistor can be improved. Further, the threshold voltage of the transistor can be positively shifted to make the transistor normally off.
- FIGS. 28A to 28C each show characteristics of a transistor in which an oxide semiconductor film including In, Sn, and Zn as main components and having a channel length L of 3 ⁇ m and a channel width W of 10 ⁇ m, and a gate insulating film with a thickness of 100 nm are used. Note that V d was set to 10 V.
- FIG. 28A shows characteristics of a transistor whose oxide semiconductor film including In, Sn, and Zn as main components was formed by a sputtering method without heating a substrate intentionally.
- the field-effect mobility of the transistor is 18.8 cm 2 /Vsec.
- FIG. 28B shows characteristics of a transistor whose oxide semiconductor film including In, Sn, and Zn as main components was formed while heating a substrate at 200° C.
- the field-effect mobility of the transistor is 32.2 cm 2 /Vsec.
- the field-effect mobility can be further improved by performing heat treatment after formation of the oxide semiconductor film including In, Sn, and Zn as main components.
- FIG. 28C shows characteristics of a transistor whose oxide semiconductor film including In, Sn, and Zn as main components was formed by sputtering at 200° C. and then subjected to heat treatment at 650° C.
- the field-effect mobility of the transistor is 34.5 cm 2 /Vsec.
- the intentional heating of the substrate is expected to have an effect of reducing moisture taken into the oxide semiconductor film during the formation by sputtering. Further, the heat treatment after film formation enables hydrogen, a hydroxyl group, or moisture to be released and removed from the oxide semiconductor film. In this manner, the field-effect mobility can be improved. Such an improvement in field-effect mobility is presumed to be achieved not only by removal of impurities by dehydration or dehydrogenation but also by a reduction in interatomic distance due to an increase in density.
- the oxide semiconductor can be crystallized by being purified by removal of impurities from the oxide semiconductor. In the case of using such a purified non-single crystal oxide semiconductor, ideally, a field-effect mobility exceeding 100 cm 2 /Vsec is expected to be realized.
- the oxide semiconductor including In, Sn, and Zn as main components may be crystallized in the following manner: oxygen ions are implanted into the oxide semiconductor, hydrogen, a hydroxyl group, or moisture included in the oxide semiconductor is released by heat treatment, and the oxide semiconductor is crystallized through the heat treatment or by another heat treatment performed later.
- crystallization treatment or recrystallization treatment a non-single-crystal oxide semiconductor having favorable crystallinity can be obtained.
- the intentional heating of the substrate during film formation and/or the heat treatment after the film formation contributes not only to improving field-effect mobility but also to making the transistor normally off.
- the threshold voltage tends to be shifted negatively.
- the oxide semiconductor film formed while heating the substrate intentionally the problem of the negative shift of the threshold voltage can be solved. That is, the threshold voltage is shifted so that the transistor becomes normally off; this tendency can be confirmed by comparison between FIGS. 28A and 28B .
- the threshold voltage can also be controlled by changing the ratio of In, Sn, and Zn; when the composition ratio of In, Sn, and Zn is 2:1:3, a normally-off transistor is expected to be formed.
- the temperature of the intentional heating of the substrate or the temperature of the heat treatment is 150° C. or higher, preferably 200° C. or higher, further preferably 400° C. or higher.
- the transistor can be normally off.
- the stability against a gate-bias stress can be increased.
- drift of the threshold voltage can be less than ⁇ 1.5 V, preferably less than ⁇ 1.0 V.
- a BT test was performed on the following two transistors: Sample 1 on which heat treatment was not performed after formation of an oxide semiconductor film, and Sample 2 on which heat treatment at 650° C. was performed after formation of an oxide semiconductor film.
- V g -I d characteristics of the transistors were measured at a substrate temperature of 25° C. and V ds of 10 V.
- V ds refers to a drain voltage (a potential difference between a drain and a source).
- the substrate temperature was set to 150° C. and V ds was set to 0.1 V.
- 20 V of V g was applied so that an electric field intensity applied to gate insulating films was 2 MV/cm, and the condition was kept for one hour.
- V g was set to 0 V.
- V g -I d characteristics of the transistors were measured at a substrate temperature of 25° C. and V ds of 10 V. This process is called a positive BT test.
- V g -I d characteristics of the transistors were measured at a substrate temperature of 25° C. and V ds of 10 V. Then, the substrate temperature was set at 150° C. and V ds was set to 0.1 V. After that, ⁇ 20 V of V g was applied so that an electric field intensity applied to the gate insulating films was ⁇ 2 MV/cm, and the condition was kept for one hour. Next, V g was set to 0 V. Then, V g -I d characteristics of the transistors were measured at a substrate temperature of 25° C. and V ds of 10 V. This process is called a negative BT test.
- FIGS. 29A and 29B show a result of the positive BT test of Sample 1 and a result of the negative BT test of Sample 1, respectively.
- FIGS. 30A and 30B show a result of the positive BT test of Sample 2 and a result of the negative BT test of Sample 2, respectively.
- the amount of shift in the threshold voltage of Sample 1 due to the positive BT test and that due to the negative BT test were 1.80 V and ⁇ 0.42 V, respectively.
- the amount of shift in the threshold voltage of Sample 2 due to the positive BT test and that due to the negative BT test were 0.79 V and 0.76 V, respectively. It is found that, in each of Sample 1 and Sample 2, the amount of shift in the threshold voltage between before and after the BT tests is small and the reliability is high.
- the heat treatment can be performed in an oxygen atmosphere; alternatively, the heat treatment may be performed first in an atmosphere of nitrogen or an inert gas or under reduced pressure, and then in an atmosphere including oxygen.
- Oxygen is supplied to the oxide semiconductor after dehydration or dehydrogenation, whereby an effect of the heat treatment can be further increased.
- a method for supplying oxygen after dehydration or dehydrogenation a method in which oxygen ions are accelerated by an electric field and implanted into the oxide semiconductor film may be employed.
- a defect due to oxygen deficiency is easily caused in the oxide semiconductor or at an interface between the oxide semiconductor and a film in contact with the oxide semiconductor; however, when excess oxygen is included in the oxide semiconductor by the heat treatment, oxygen deficiency caused constantly can be compensated for with excess oxygen.
- the excess oxygen is oxygen existing mainly between lattices. When the concentration of excess oxygen is set to higher than or equal to 1 ⁇ 10 16 /cm 3 and lower than or equal to 2 ⁇ 10 20 /cm 3 , excess oxygen can be included in the oxide semiconductor without causing crystal distortion or the like.
- a more stable oxide semiconductor film can be obtained.
- an oxide semiconductor film which is formed by sputtering using a target having a composition ratio of In:Sn:Zn 1:1:1 without heating a substrate intentionally is analyzed by X-ray diffraction (XRD), a halo pattern is observed.
- the formed oxide semiconductor film can be crystallized by being subjected to heat treatment.
- the temperature of the heat treatment can be set as appropriate; when the heat treatment is performed at 650° C., for example, a clear diffraction peak can be observed in an X-ray diffraction analysis.
- An XRD analysis of an In—Sn—Zn—O film was conducted.
- the XRD analysis was conducted using an X-ray diffractometer D8 ADVANCE manufactured by Bruker AXS, and measurement was performed by an out-of-plane method.
- Sample A and Sample B were prepared and the XRD analysis was performed thereon.
- a method for manufacturing Sample A and Sample B will be described below.
- An In—Sn—Zn—O film with a thickness of 100 nm was formed over a quartz substrate that had been subjected to dehydrogenation treatment.
- the In—Sn—Zn—O film was formed with a sputtering apparatus with a power of 100 W (DC) in an oxygen atmosphere.
- FIG. 31 shows XRD spectra of Sample A and Sample B. No peak derived from crystal was observed in Sample A, whereas peaks derived from crystal were observed when 2 ⁇ was around 35 deg. and 37 deg. to 38 deg. in Sample B.
- These substrate heating and heat treatment have an effect of preventing hydrogen and a hydroxyl group, which are unfavorable impurities for an oxide semiconductor, from being included in the film or an effect of removing hydrogen and a hydroxyl group from the film. That is, an oxide semiconductor can be purified by removing hydrogen serving as a donor impurity from the oxide semiconductor, whereby a normally-off transistor can be obtained.
- the purification of an oxide semiconductor enables the off-state current of the transistor to be 1 aA/ ⁇ m or lower.
- the unit of the off-state current is used to indicate current per micrometer of a channel width.
- FIG. 32 shows a relation between the off-state current of a transistor and the inverse of substrate temperature (absolute temperature) T at measurement.
- the horizontal axis represents a value (1000/T) obtained by multiplying an inverse of substrate temperature at measurement by 1000.
- the off-state current can be 1 aA/ ⁇ m (1 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 18 A/ ⁇ m) or lower, 100 zA/ ⁇ m (1 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 19 A/ ⁇ m) or lower, and 1 zA/ ⁇ m (1 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 21 A/ ⁇ m) or lower when the substrate temperature is 125° C., 85° C., and room temperature (27° C.), respectively.
- the off-state current can be 0.1 aA/ ⁇ m (1 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 19 A/ ⁇ m) or lower, 10 zA/ ⁇ m (1 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 20 A/ ⁇ m) or lower, and 0.1 zA/ ⁇ m (1 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 22 A/ ⁇ m) or lower at 125° C., 85° C., and room temperature, respectively.
- the above values of off-state currents are clearly much lower than that of the transistor using Si as a semiconductor film.
- a sputtering gas in order to prevent hydrogen and moisture from being included in the oxide semiconductor film during formation thereof, it is preferable to increase the purity of a sputtering gas by sufficiently suppressing leakage from the outside of a deposition chamber and degasification through an inner wall of the deposition chamber.
- a gas with a dew point of ⁇ 70° C. or lower is preferably used as the sputtering gas in order to prevent moisture from being included in the film.
- a target which is purified so as not to include impurities such as hydrogen and moisture it is preferable to use a target which is purified so as not to include impurities such as hydrogen and moisture.
- a film which does not include moisture originally is preferably formed because moisture is released from the oxide semiconductor including In, Sn, and Zn as main components at a higher temperature than from an oxide semiconductor including In, Ga, and Zn as main components.
- the transistor used for the measurement has a channel length L of 3 ⁇ m, a channel width W of 10 ⁇ m, Lov of 0 ⁇ m, and dW of 0 ⁇ m.
- V ds was set to 10 V.
- the substrate temperature was ⁇ 40° C., ⁇ 25° C., 25° C., 75° C., 125° C., and 150° C.
- Lov the width of a portion where a gate electrode overlaps with one of a pair of electrodes
- dW the width of a portion of the pair of electrodes, which does not overlap with an oxide semiconductor film
- FIG. 33 shows the V g dependence of I d (a solid line) and field-effect mobility (a dotted line).
- FIG. 34A shows a relation between the substrate temperature and the threshold voltage
- FIG. 34B shows a relation between the substrate temperature and the field-effect mobility.
- the threshold voltage gets lower as the substrate temperature increases. Note that the threshold voltage is decreased from 1.09 V to ⁇ 0.23 V in the range from ⁇ 40° C. to 150° C.
- a field-effect mobility of 30 cm 2 /Vsec or higher, preferably 40 cm 2 /Vsec or higher, further preferably 60 cm 2 /Vsec or higher can be obtained with the off-state current maintained at 1 aA/ ⁇ m or lower, which can achieve on-state current needed for an LSI.
- L/W is 33 nm/40 nm
- an on-state current of 12 ⁇ A or higher can flow when the gate voltage is 2.7 V and the drain voltage is 1.0 V.
- sufficient electrical characteristics can be ensured in a temperature range needed for operation of a transistor. With such characteristics, an integrated circuit having a novel function can be realized without decreasing the operation speed even when a transistor including an oxide semiconductor is also provided in an integrated circuit formed using a Si semiconductor.
- FIGS. 35A and 35B are a top view and a cross-sectional view of a coplanar transistor having a top-gate top-contact structure.
- FIG. 35A is the top view of the transistor.
- FIG. 35B illustrates cross section A-B along dashed-dotted line A-B in FIG. 35A .
- the transistor illustrated in FIG. 35B includes a substrate 1101 ; a base insulating layer 1102 provided over the substrate 1101 ; a protective insulating film 1104 provided in the periphery of the base insulating layer 1102 ; an oxide semiconductor film 1106 provided over the base insulating layer 1102 and the protective insulating film 1104 and including a high-resistance region 1106 a and low-resistance regions 1106 b ; a gate insulating film 1108 provided over the oxide semiconductor film 1106 ; a gate electrode 1110 provided to overlap with the oxide semiconductor film 1106 with the gate insulating film 1108 positioned therebetween; a sidewall insulating film 1112 provided in contact with a side surface of the gate electrode 1110 ; a pair of electrodes 1114 provided in contact with at least the low-resistance regions 1106 b ; an interlayer insulating film 1116 provided to cover at least the oxide semiconductor film 1106 , the gate electrode 1110 , and the pair of electrodes 1114
- a protective film may be provided to cover the interlayer insulating film 1116 and the wiring 1118 .
- a minute amount of leakage current generated by surface conduction of the interlayer insulating film 1116 can be reduced and thus the off-state current of the transistor can be reduced.
- FIGS. 36A and 36B are a top view and a cross-sectional view which illustrate a structure of a transistor manufactured in this example.
- FIG. 36A is the top view of the transistor.
- FIG. 36B is a cross-sectional view along dashed-dotted line A-B in FIG. 36A .
- the transistor illustrated in FIG. 36B includes a substrate 600 ; a base insulating layer 602 provided over the substrate 600 ; an oxide semiconductor film 606 provided over the base insulating layer 602 ; a pair of electrodes 614 in contact with the oxide semiconductor film 606 ; a gate insulating film 608 provided over the oxide semiconductor film 606 and the pair of electrodes 614 ; a gate electrode 610 provided to overlap with the oxide semiconductor film 606 with the gate insulating film 608 positioned therebetween; an interlayer insulating film 616 provided to cover the gate insulating film 608 and the gate electrode 610 ; wirings 618 electrically connected to the pair of electrodes 614 through openings formed in the gate insulating film 608 and the interlayer insulating film 616 ; and a protective film 620 provided to cover the interlayer insulating film 616 and the wirings 618 .
- a glass substrate can be used.
- a silicon oxide film can be used.
- oxide semiconductor film 606 an In—Sn—Zn—O film can be used.
- a tungsten film can be used.
- the gate insulating film 608 a silicon oxide film can be used.
- the gate electrode 610 can have a stacked structure of a tantalum nitride film and a tungsten film.
- the interlayer insulating film 616 can have a stacked structure of a silicon oxynitride film and a polyimide film.
- the wirings 618 can each have a stacked structure in which a titanium film, an aluminum film, and a titanium film are formed in this order.
- the protective film 620 a polyimide film can be used.
- the width of a portion where the gate electrode 610 overlaps with one of the pair of electrodes 614 is referred to as Lov.
- the width of a portion of the pair of electrodes 614 , which does not overlap with the oxide semiconductor film 606 is referred to as dW.
Landscapes
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Microelectronics & Electronic Packaging (AREA)
- Computer Hardware Design (AREA)
- Manufacturing & Machinery (AREA)
- Thin Film Transistor (AREA)
- Semiconductor Memories (AREA)
- Dram (AREA)
- Metal-Oxide And Bipolar Metal-Oxide Semiconductor Integrated Circuits (AREA)
- Recrystallisation Techniques (AREA)
- Electrodes Of Semiconductors (AREA)
Abstract
In a memory device, memory capacity per unit area is increased while a period in which data is held is ensured. The memory device includes a driver circuit provided over a substrate, and a plurality of memory cell arrays which are provided over the driver circuit and driven by the driver circuit. Each of the plurality of memory cell arrays includes a plurality of memory cells. Each of the plurality of memory cells includes a first transistor including a first gate electrode overlapping with an oxide semiconductor layer, and a capacitor including a source electrode or a drain electrode, a first gate insulating layer, and a conductive layer. The plurality of memory cell arrays is stacked to overlap. Thus, in the memory device, memory capacity per unit area is increased while a period in which data is held is ensured.
Description
- This application is a continuation of U.S. application Ser. No. 14/717,071, filed May 20, 2015, now allowed, which is a continuation of U.S. application Ser. No. 13/230,184, filed Sep. 12, 2011, now U.S. Pat. No. 9,042,161, which claims the benefit of foreign priority applications filed in Japan as Serial No. 2010-204090 on Sep. 13, 2010 and Serial No. 2011-108899 on May 14, 2011, all of which are incorporated by reference.
- The present invention relates to a memory device and a semiconductor device including the memory device.
- In recent years, a metal oxide having semiconductor characteristics, which is called an oxide semiconductor, has attracted attention as a novel semiconductor material having high mobility as in the case of polysilicon or microcrystalline silicon and having uniform element characteristics as in the case of amorphous silicon. The metal oxide is used for various applications; for example, indium oxide is a well-known metal oxide and used as a material of a pixel electrode in a liquid crystal display device. Examples of such metal oxides having semiconductor characteristics include tungsten oxide, tin oxide, indium oxide, and zinc oxide. Transistors in each of which a channel formation region is formed using such a metal oxide having semiconductor characteristics have been known (
Patent Documents 1 and 2). - [Patent Document 1] Japanese Published Patent Application No. 2007-123861
- [Patent Document 2] Japanese Published Patent Application No. 2007-096055
- Examples of a semiconductor memory device (hereinafter, simply referred to as a memory device) include a DRAM and an SRAM which are categorized as a volatile memory; a mask ROM, an EPROM, an EEPROM, a flash memory, and a ferroelectric memory which are categorized as a nonvolatile memory; and the like. Most of these memories including single crystal semiconductor substrates are already put into practical use. Among the above memory devices, a DRAM has a simple structure in which a memory cell includes a transistor and a capacitor and needs fewer semiconductor elements for forming a memory cell than other memory devices such as an SRAM. Therefore, memory capacity per unit area can be increased as compared to other memory devices, and thus, a DRAM is advantageous in cost reduction.
- As described above, a DRAM is suitable for large storage capacity, but memory capacity per unit area needs to be further increased as in other memory devices in order that an integrated circuit having higher degree of integration is realized while an increase in a chip size is suppressed. For that purpose, the area of a capacitor for holding charge provided in each memory cell has to be reduced and the area of each memory cell has to be reduced.
- However, as the capacitance value is decreased due to reduction in the area of a capacitor, difference between the amounts of charge of digital values (e.g., difference between the amount of charge corresponding to “1” and the amount of charge corresponding to “0”) becomes smaller. Thus, if a slight amount of off-state current exists in the transistor, it is difficult to maintain the accuracy of data, and a holding period tends to be short. Accordingly, frequency of refresh operation is increased and power consumption is increased.
- In view of the above problem, an object of the present invention is to propose a memory device in which a period in which data is held is ensured and memory capacity per unit area can be increased. Further, an object of the present invention is to propose a semiconductor device including the memory device.
- In the disclosed invention, a memory device is formed using a material capable of sufficiently reducing the off-state current of a transistor, such as an oxide semiconductor material that is a wide gap semiconductor. The oxide semiconductor material preferably contains In, Ga, and Zn. The off-state current of a transistor in which an oxide semiconductor is used for a channel formation region is extremely small. Therefore, by forming a memory cell using the transistor, data can be held for a long time.
- With the use of multilevel interconnection, a plurality of memory cells included in a memory device are stacked to overlap, and further, the memory cells and a driver circuit for driving the memory cells are stacked to overlap.
- An embodiment of the present invention is a memory device including a driver circuit provided over a substrate and a plurality of memory cell arrays which are provided over the driver circuit and driven by the driver circuit. Each of the plurality of memory cell arrays includes a plurality of memory cells arranged in matrix. Each of the plurality of memory cells includes a first transistor including an oxide semiconductor layer, a source electrode, a drain electrode, a first gate insulating layer, and a first gate electrode overlapping with the oxide semiconductor layer with the first gate insulating layer provided therebetween, and a capacitor including one of the source electrode and the drain electrode, the first gate insulating layer, and a conductive layer overlapping with the one of the source electrode and the drain electrode with the first gate insulating layer provided therebetween. The plurality of memory cell arrays is stacked to overlap.
- Each of the plurality of memory cell arrays may include a bit line which is electrically connected to the other of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the first transistor, a word line which is electrically connected to the first gate electrode of the first transistor, and a capacitor line which is electrically connected to the conductive layer of the capacitor.
- The bit lines of the plurality of memory cell arrays may be electrically connected to each other.
- The word lines of the plurality of memory cell arrays may be electrically connected to each other.
- The capacitor lines of the plurality of memory cell arrays may be electrically connected to each other.
- The bit lines of the two adjacent memory cell arrays of the plurality of memory cell arrays may be arranged so as not to overlap with each other.
- The word lines of the two adjacent memory cell arrays of the plurality of memory cell arrays may be arranged so as not to overlap with each other.
- The driver circuit can be formed using a second transistor. The second transistor includes a channel formation region that is provided in a substrate including a semiconductor material other than an oxide semiconductor, a pair of impurity regions that are provided so that the channel formation region is sandwiched between the pair of impurity regions, a second gate insulating layer that is provided over the channel formation region, and a second gate electrode that overlaps with the channel formation region and is provided over the second gate insulating layer. Here, one of the pair of impurity regions is a source and the other is a drain.
- As another example, the second transistor is provided over an insulating surface and includes a channel formation region that is provided in a semiconductor layer including a semiconductor material other than an oxide semiconductor, a pair of impurity regions that are provided so that the channel formation region is sandwiched between the pair of impurity regions, a second gate insulating layer that overlaps with the channel formation region, and a second gate electrode that is provided to overlap with the channel formation region with the second gate insulating layer provided therebetween. Here, one of the pair of impurity regions is a source and the other is a drain.
- Note that the substrate including a semiconductor material is preferably a single crystal semiconductor substrate or an SOI substrate. It is also preferable to use silicon as the semiconductor material other than an oxide semiconductor.
- In the above structure, it is preferable that the driver circuit include a bit line driver circuit for driving a bit line and a word line driver circuit for driving a word line; the bit line driver circuit include a first driver circuit and a second driver circuit; each of the first driver circuit and the second driver circuit include a column decoder and a sense amplifier portion; the word line driver circuit include a third driver circuit and a fourth driver circuit; each of the third driver circuit and the fourth driver circuit include a row decoder; and the first to fourth driver circuits be arranged below the plurality of memory cell arrays.
- In the above-described structures, the first transistor is formed using an oxide semiconductor; however, the disclosed invention is not limited thereto. A material which can realize the off-state current characteristics equivalent to those of the oxide semiconductor, such as a wide gap material like silicon carbide (specifically, a semiconductor material whose energy gap Eg is larger than 3 eV) may be used.
- Since a transistor (first transistor) in which an oxide semiconductor is used for a channel formation region has extremely small off-state current, stored data can be held for an extremely long time by using the transistor. In other words, power consumption can be sufficiently reduced because refresh operation becomes unnecessary or the frequency of refresh operation can be extremely low. Moreover, stored data can be held for a long time even when power is not supplied.
- Further, a memory device according to the disclosed invention does not require high voltage for writing data and does not have a problem of deterioration of elements. For example, unlike a conventional nonvolatile memory, it is not necessary to inject and extract electrons into and from a floating gate, and thus a problem such as deterioration of a gate insulating layer does not arise at all. In other words, the semiconductor device according to the disclosed invention does not have a limitation on the number of times data can be rewritten, which is a problem of a conventional nonvolatile memory, and the reliability thereof is drastically improved. Furthermore, since data is written by turning on or off the transistor, high-speed operation can be easily realized.
- Further, with the use of multilevel interconnection, a plurality of memory cells included in a memory device is stacked to overlap, and furthermore, the memory cells and a driver circuit for driving the memory cells are stacked to overlap. Thus, memory capacity per unit area can be increased.
- For example, in the case where a memory device is formed using only one memory cell array without using multilevel interconnection, the area of a memory cell is 8 F2 to 10 F2 (F is a half pitch determined by a design rule). On the other hand, the area of a memory cell can be reduced to 1 F2 by stacking 8 to 10 memory cell arrays so as to overlap.
- Bit lines of the two adjacent memory cell arrays of the plurality of memory cell arrays may be arranged so as not to overlap with each other, so that parasitic capacitance of the bit lines can be reduced and accuracy of reading data can be improved. Further, speed of writing and reading data can be improved. Furthermore, a load on a driver circuit for driving the bit line can be reduced.
- Word lines of the two adjacent memory cell arrays of the plurality of memory cell arrays can be arranged so as not to overlap with each other. Thus, parasitic capacitance of the word lines can be reduced and speed of writing and reading data can be improved. Further, a load on a driver circuit for driving the word line can be reduced.
- Since a transistor (second transistor) in which a material other than an oxide semiconductor is used for a channel formation region can operate at sufficiently high speed, when it is combined with the transistor (first transistor) in which an oxide semiconductor is used for a channel formation region, a memory device can perform operation (e.g., reading data) at sufficiently high speed. Further, the transistor (second transistor) in which a material other than an oxide semiconductor is used for a channel formation region can favorably realize a variety of driver circuits which are required to operate at high speed.
- Furthermore, the area par memory cell array becomes small due to multilevel interconnection by dividing a bit line driver circuit into a first driver circuit and a second driver circuit and dividing a word line driver circuit into a third driver circuit and a fourth driver circuit, so that all the driver circuits can be arranged in a region overlapping with the memory cell array. Thus, a memory device can be downsized.
- In the accompanying drawings:
-
FIG. 1 illustrates a structure of a memory device; -
FIGS. 2A and 2B illustrate arrangement of a driver circuit and the like of a memory device; -
FIGS. 3A to 3H are schematic diagrams each illustrating a method for dividing a memory cell array of a memory device; -
FIGS. 4A to 4C each illustrate arrangement of a driver circuit and the like of a memory device; -
FIG. 5 is a circuit diagram illustrating a configuration of a memory cell of a memory device; -
FIG. 6 is a circuit diagram illustrating a configuration of a memory cell array and a driver circuit of a memory device; -
FIG. 7 is a circuit diagram illustrating a configuration of a driver circuit of a memory device; -
FIG. 8 shows a method for driving a memory device; -
FIGS. 9A and 9B are cross-sectional views illustrating a structure of a memory device; -
FIGS. 10A and 10B are respectively a cross-sectional view and a top view illustrating a structure of a memory cell; -
FIGS. 11A and 11B are cross-sectional views each illustrating a structure of a memory cell; -
FIGS. 12A to 12D are cross-sectional views each illustrating a structure of a memory cell; -
FIGS. 13A to 13E illustrate a method for manufacturing a memory cell; -
FIGS. 14A to 14D illustrate a method for manufacturing a memory cell; -
FIGS. 15A to 15F each illustrate a semiconductor device; -
FIGS. 16A and 16B are cross-sectional views illustrating a structure of a memory device; -
FIGS. 17A to 17D are cross-sectional views each illustrating a structure of a memory cell; -
FIGS. 18A to 18D are cross-sectional views each illustrating a structure of a memory cell; -
FIGS. 19A and 19B are cross-sectional views illustrating a structure of a memory device; -
FIGS. 20A to 20E illustrate structures of oxide materials; -
FIGS. 21A to 21C illustrate a structure of an oxide material; -
FIGS. 22A to 22C illustrate a structure of an oxide material; -
FIG. 23 shows the gate voltage dependence of mobility obtained by calculation; -
FIGS. 24A to 24C show the gate voltage dependence of drain current and mobility obtained by calculation; -
FIGS. 25A to 25C show the gate voltage dependence of drain current and mobility obtained by calculation; -
FIGS. 26A to 26C show the gate voltage dependence of drain current and mobility obtained by calculation; -
FIGS. 27A and 27B illustrate cross-sectional structures of transistors which are used in calculation; -
FIGS. 28A to 28C are graphs each showing characteristics of a transistor including an oxide semiconductor film; -
FIGS. 29A and 29B show Vg-Id characteristics after a BT test of a transistor ofSample 1; -
FIGS. 30A and 30B show Vg-Id characteristics after a BT test of a transistor ofSample 2; -
FIG. 31 shows XRD spectra of Sample A and Sample B; -
FIG. 32 is a graph showing relation between off-state current and substrate temperature in measurement of a transistor; -
FIG. 33 is a graph showing Vg dependence of Id and field-effect mobility; -
FIG. 34A is a graph showing relation between substrate temperature and threshold voltage, andFIG. 34B is a graph showing relation between substrate temperature and field-effect mobility; -
FIGS. 35A and 35B are a top view and a cross-sectional view of a semiconductor device; -
FIGS. 36A and 36B are a top view and a cross-sectional view of a semiconductor device; and -
FIGS. 37A and 37B are cross-sectional views each illustrating a structure of a memory device. - Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the accompanying drawings. However, the present invention is not limited to the following description and it is easily understood by those skilled in the art that the mode and details can be variously changed without departing from the scope and spirit of the present invention. Accordingly, the present invention should not be construed as being limited to the description of the embodiments described below. In describing configurations of the present invention with reference to the drawings, the same reference numerals are used in common for the same portions in different drawings. The same hatching pattern is applied to similar parts, and the similar parts are not especially denoted by reference numerals in some cases. In addition, an insulating layer is not illustrated in a top view in some cases.
- Note that the position, the size, the range, or the like of each structure illustrated in drawings and the like is not accurately represented in some cases for easy understanding. Therefore, the disclosed invention is not necessarily limited to the position, size, range, or the like as disclosed in the drawings and the like.
- In this specification and the like, ordinal numbers such as “first”, “second”, and “third” are used in order to avoid confusion among components, and the terms do not mean limitation of the number of components.
- Note that the term “over” or “under” in this specification and the like does not necessarily mean that a component is placed “directly on” or “directly under” another component. For example, the expression “a gate electrode over a gate insulating layer” does not exclude a structure where a component is placed between the gate insulating layer and the gate electrode.
- In addition, in this specification and the like, the term such as “electrode” or “wiring” does not limit a function of a component. For example, an “electrode” is sometimes used as part of a “wiring”, and vice versa. Further, the term “electrode” or “wiring” can include the case where a plurality of “electrodes” or “wirings” is formed in an integrated manner.
- For example, part of a word line may be used as a first gate electrode of a first transistor and part of a capacitor line may be used as an electrode layer of a capacitor.
- Functions of a “source” and a “drain” are sometimes replaced with each other when a transistor of opposite polarity is used or when the direction of current flowing is changed in circuit operation, for example Therefore, the terms “source” and “drain” can be replaced with each other in this specification and the like.
- Note that in this specification and the like, the term “electrically connected” includes the case where components are connected through an object having any electric function. There is no particular limitation on an object having any electric function as long as electric signals can be transmitted and received between components that are connected through the object.
- Examples of an “object having any electric function” are a switching element such as a transistor, a resistor, an inductor, a capacitor, and an element with a variety of functions as well as an electrode and a wiring.
- A structure of a memory device according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to
FIG. 1 ,FIGS. 2A and 2B ,FIGS. 3A to 3H ,FIGS. 4A to 4C ,FIG. 5 ,FIG. 6 ,FIG. 7 , andFIG. 8 . -
FIG. 1 is a schematic view illustrating an example of a structure of a memory device. The memory device according to an embodiment of the present invention has a stacked structure which includes a plurality of memory cell arrays (inFIG. 1 , two memory cell arrays are typically illustrated) in the upper portion and a peripheral circuit including as a control circuit or a driver circuit which is required to operate at high speed for driving the plurality of memory cell arrays in the lower portion. Note that the driver circuit or the control circuit may include a logic circuit, an analog circuit, and/or an arithmetic circuit. - The memory device illustrated in
FIG. 1 includes amemory cell array 201 a including a plurality of memory cells and amemory cell array 201 b including a plurality of memory cells in the upper portion, and aperipheral circuit 210 including afirst driver circuit 211, asecond driver circuit 212, athird driver circuit 213, afourth driver circuit 214, afifth driver circuit 215, acontroller 218, anaddress buffer 221, an I/O buffer 220, and the like, which is necessary for operating thememory cell array 201 a and thememory cell array 201 b, in the lower portion. Thefirst driver circuit 211 includes acolumn decoder 217 a and asense amplifier group 216 a, and thesecond driver circuit 212 includes acolumn decoder 217 b and asense amplifier group 216 b. - The
memory cell array 201 a and thememory cell array 201 b are stacked to overlap. Accordingly, memory capacity per unit area can be increased. Although an example in which two memory cell arrays (thememory cell array 201 a and thememory cell array 201 b) are stacked to overlap is illustrated inFIG. 1 , the number of memory cell arrays stacked to overlap is not limited to two in an embodiment of the present invention. - According to an embodiment of the present invention, a plurality of memory cell arrays is stacked to overlap with the use of multilevel interconnection. Here, as compared to the case where a memory cell array is one layer (the case where multilevel interconnection is not used), a method in which the memory cell array is divided and stacked to overlap will be described with reference to schematic views.
-
FIGS. 3A to 3H each schematically illustrate a method for dividing and stacking a memory cell array to overlap. - As illustrated in
FIG. 3A , amemory cell array 601 is driven by a bitline driver circuit 611 and a wordline driver circuit 612. Thememory cell array 601 includes a plurality of memory cells arranged in matrix and each memory cell is electrically connected to a bit line and a word line. Here, the bit line is arranged in a row direction (the horizontal direction in the figure). The word line is arranged in a column direction (the vertical direction in the figure). The bit line is driven by the bitline driver circuit 611 and the word line is driven by the wordline driver circuit 612.FIG. 3A illustrates a structure in the case where a memory cell array is one layer (the case where multilevel interconnection is not used). - According to an embodiment of the present invention, the
memory cell array 601 is divided and the divided memory cell arrays are stacked to overlap in order to increase memory capacity per unit area. - As examples of a method for dividing the
memory cell array 601 into two parts, methods illustrated inFIG. 3B andFIG. 3C can be given. According to the method illustrated inFIG. 3B , thememory cell array 601 is divided laterally into two parts. According to the method illustrated inFIG. 3C , thememory cell array 601 is divided longitudinally into two parts. Then, amemory cell array 601A and amemory cell array 601B are stacked to overlap. Further, the bitline driver circuit 611 and the wordline driver circuit 612 are also stacked to overlap with thememory cell array 601A and thememory cell array 601B. - In the dividing method illustrated in
FIG. 3B , the word lines of thememory cell array 601A and thememory cell array 601B which are stacked to overlap can be electrically connected to each other. In the dividing method illustrated inFIG. 3C , the bit lines of thememory cell array 601A and thememory cell array 601B which are stacked to overlap can be electrically connected to each other. In those cases, the word line of thememory cell array 601A and the word line of thememory cell array 601B are preferably arranged so as not to overlap with each other. Further, the bit line of thememory cell array 601A and the bit line of thememory cell array 601B are preferably arranged so as not to overlap with each other. Thus, parasitic capacitance of the word lines and the bit lines can be reduced. - Note that the method for dividing a memory cell array into two parts is not limited to the methods illustrated in
FIGS. 3B and 3C . For example, a memory cell array in an odd-numbered row may be thememory cell array 601A and a memory cell array in an even-numbered row may be thememory cell array 601B. Alternatively, a memory cell in an odd-numbered column may be thememory cell array 601A and a memory cell array in an even-numbered column may be thememory cell array 601B. - As examples of a method for dividing the
memory cell array 601 into three parts, methods illustrated inFIGS. 3D and 3E can be given. According to the method illustrated inFIG. 3D , thememory cell array 601 is divided laterally into three parts. According to the method illustrated inFIG. 3E , thememory cell array 601 is divided longitudinally into three parts. Then, amemory cell array 601A, amemory cell array 601B, and amemory cell array 601C are stacked to overlap. Further, the bitline driver circuit 611 and the wordline driver circuit 612 are also stacked to overlap with thememory cell array 601A, thememory cell array 601B, and thememory cell array 601C. - In the dividing method illustrated in
FIG. 3D , the word lines of thememory cell array 601A, thememory cell array 601B, and thememory cell array 601C which are stacked to overlap can be connected to one another. In the dividing method illustrated inFIG. 3E , the bit lines of thememory cell array 601A, thememory cell array 601B, and thememory cell array 601C which are stacked to overlap can be electrically connected to one another. In those cases, the word line of thememory cell array 601A and the word line of thememory cell array 601B are preferably arranged so as not to overlap with each other, and the word line of thememory cell array 601B and the word line of thememory cell array 601C are preferably arranged so as not to overlap with each other. Further, the bit line of thememory cell array 601A and the bit line of thememory cell array 601B are arranged so as not to overlap with each other, and the bit line of thememory cell array 601B and the bit line of thememory cell array 601C are preferably arranged so as not to overlap with each other. Thus, parasitic capacitance of the word lines and the bit lines can be reduced. - As examples of a method for dividing the
memory cell array 601 into four parts, methods illustrated inFIGS. 3F to 3H can be given. According to the method illustrated inFIG. 3F , thememory cell array 601 is divided laterally into two parts and is further divided longitudinally into two parts. According to the method illustrated inFIG. 3G , thememory cell array 601 is divided laterally into four parts. According to the method illustrated inFIG. 3H , thememory cell array 601 is divided longitudinally into four parts. Then, amemory cell array 601A, amemory cell array 601B, amemory cell array 601C, and amemory cell array 601D are stacked to overlap with one another. Further, the bitline driver circuit 611 and the wordline driver circuit 612 are also stacked to overlap with thememory cell array 601A, thememory cell array 601B, thememory cell array 601C, and thememory cell array 601D. - In the dividing method illustrated in
FIG. 3F , the bit lines of thememory cell array 601A and thememory cell array 601B which are stacked to overlap can be electrically connected to each other; the bit lines of thememory cell array 601C and thememory cell array 601D which are stacked to overlap can be electrically connected to each other; the word lines of thememory cell array 601A and thememory cell array 601C which are stacked to overlap can be electrically connected to each other; and the word lines of thememory cell array 601B and thememory cell array 601D which are stacked to overlap can be electrically connected to each other. In the dividing method illustrated inFIG. 3G ; the word lines of thememory cell array 601A, thememory cell array 601B, thememory cell array 601C, and thememory cell array 601D which are stacked to overlap can be electrically connected to one another. In the dividing method illustrated inFIG. 3H , the bit lines of thememory cell array 601A, thememory cell array 601B, thememory cell array 601C, and thememory cell array 601D which are stacked to overlap can be electrically connected to one another. In those cases, the word line of thememory cell array 601A and the word line of thememory cell array 601B, the word line of thememory cell array 601B and the word line of thememory cell array 601C, and the word line of thememory cell array 601C and the word line of thememory cell array 601D are preferably arranged so as not to overlap with each other. Further, the bit line of thememory cell array 601A and the bit line of thememory cell array 601B, the bit line of thememory cell array 601B and the bit line of thememory cell array 601C, and the bit line of thememory cell array 601C and the bit line of thememory cell array 601D are preferably arranged so as not to overlap with each other. Thus, parasitic capacitance of the word lines and the bit lines can be reduced. - Note that the method for dividing a memory cell array is not limited to the methods illustrated in
FIGS. 3B to 3H . A memory cell array may be divided into five or more. - It is preferable that the
memory cell array 601 be divided so that each of the divided memory cell arrays has a horizontal-to-vertical ratio as close to as 1:1. In addition, it is also preferable that thememory cell array 601 be divided so that each of the divided memory cell arrays includes the same number of memory cells. Thus, memory capacity per unit area can be further increased. - For example, in the case where a memory device is formed using only one memory cell array without using multilevel interconnection (corresponding to the case illustrated in
FIG. 3A ), the area of a memory cell is 8 F2 to 10 F2 (F is a half pitch determined by a design rule). On the other hand, the area of a memory cell can be reduced to 1 F2 by stacking 8 to 10 memory cell arrays so as to overlap. - Next, a configuration of each memory cell will be described.
-
FIG. 5 illustrates an example of a circuit configuration of a memory cell which can be applied to the memory cell array (thememory cell array 201 a and thememory cell array 201 b inFIG. 1 , thememory cell array 601 and thememory cell arrays 601A to 601D inFIG. 3A to 3H , or the like). Amemory cell 170 includes atransistor 162 in which an oxide semiconductor is used for a channel formation region and acapacitor 164. - In the
memory cell 170 illustrated inFIG. 5 , a bit line BL is electrically connected to a source or drain electrode of thetransistor 162, a word line WL is electrically connected to a gate electrode of thetransistor 162, and a source or drain electrode of thetransistor 162 is electrically connected to a first terminal of thecapacitor 164. - The
transistor 162 in which an oxide semiconductor is used for a channel formation region has a characteristic of a significantly small off-state current. For that reason, when thetransistor 162 is in an off state, a potential of the first terminal of the capacitor 164 (or charge accumulated in the capacitor 164) can be held for an extremely long period. Further, in thetransistor 162 in which an oxide semiconductor is used for a channel formation region, a short channel effect is not likely to be caused, which is advantageous. - Next, writing and holding data in the
memory cell 170 illustrated inFIG. 5 will be described. - First, the potential of the word line WL is set to a potential at which the
transistor 162 is turned on, and thetransistor 162 is turned on. Accordingly, the potential of the bit line BL is supplied to the first terminal of the capacitor 164 (writing). After that, the potential of the word line WL is set to a potential at which thetransistor 162 is turned off, so that thetransistor 162 is turned off. Thus, the potential of the first terminal of thecapacitor 164 is held (holding). - Because the off-state current of the
transistor 162 is extremely small, the potential of the first terminal of the capacitor 164 (or charge accumulated in the capacitor 164) can be held for a long time. - Next, reading data will be described. When the
transistor 162 is turned on, the bit line BL and thecapacitor 164 which are in a floating state are electrically connected to each other, and the charge is redistributed between the bit line BL and thecapacitor 164. As a result, the potential of the bit line BL is changed. The amount of change in potential of the bit line BL varies depending on the potential of the first terminal of the capacitor 164 (or charge accumulated in the capacitor 164). - For example, the potential of the bit line BL after charge redistribution is (CB*VB0+C*V)/(CB+C), where V is the potential of the first terminal of the
capacitor 164, C is the capacitance of thecapacitor 164, CB is the capacitance of the bit line BL (hereinafter also referred to as a bit line capacitance), and VB0 is the potential of the bit line BL before the charge redistribution. Therefore, it can be found that assuming that thememory cell 170 is in either of two states in which the potentials of the first terminal of thecapacitor 164 are V1 and V0 (V1>V0), the potential of the bit line BL in the case of holding the potential V1 (=(CB*VB0+C*V1)/(CB+C)) is higher than the potential of the bit line BL in the case of holding the potential V0 (=(CB*VB0+C*V0)/(CB+C)). - Then, by comparing the potential of the bit line BL with a predetermined potential, data can be read.
- Thus, the memory cell illustrated in
FIG. 5 can hold charge accumulated in thecapacitor 164 for a long time, since the off-state current of thetransistor 162 is extremely small. In other words, power consumption can be sufficiently reduced because refresh operation becomes unnecessary or the frequency of refresh operation can be extremely low. Further, when a normally-off (enhancement) transistor is used as thetransistor 162, and power is not supplied, a ground potential may be input to the gate of thetransistor 162. With that structure, thetransistor 162 can remain off even when power is not supplied, and charge accumulated in thecapacitor 164 can be kept held. Accordingly, stored data can be held for a long time even when power is not supplied. - Next, a circuit diagram of the
memory cell array 201 and part of the peripheral circuit is illustrated inFIG. 6 . Note that in the circuit diagram inFIG. 6 , thememory cell array 201 and part of the peripheral circuit are illustrated as if provided in the same plane. However, in the actual memory device, part of the peripheral circuit other than thememory cell array 201 is provided under thememory cell array 201. In addition, thememory cell array 201 is divided into a plurality of memory cell arrays, and the plurality of memory cell arrays is provided so as to overlap. Thememory cells 170 illustrated inFIG. 5 are applied to thememory cell array 201 illustrated inFIG. 6 . - The
memory cell array 201 illustrated inFIG. 6 includes m word lines WL, n bit lines BLa, n bit lines BLb, and a plurality ofmemory cells 170 arranged in a matrix of m (rows) (in the vertical direction) and n (columns) (in the horizontal direction). The word lines WL(1) to WL(i) are electrically connected to thefourth driver circuit 214, and the word lines WL(i+1) to WL(m) are electrically connected to thethird driver circuit 213. The bit lines BLa(1) to BLa(j) and the bit lines BLb(1) to BLb(j) are electrically connected to thesecond driver circuit 212, and the bit lines BLa(j+1) to BLa(n) and the bit lines BLb(j+1) to BLb(n) are electrically connected to thefirst driver circuit 211. Thefirst driver circuit 211 and thesecond driver circuit 212 are each electrically connected to thefifth driver circuit 215. - The
first driver circuit 211 includes thecolumn decoder 217 a and thesense amplifier group 216 a, and thesense amplifier group 216 a includes sense amplifiers 222(j+1) to 222(n). Thecolumn decoder 217 a is electrically connected to the sense amplifiers 222(j+1) to 222(n) through column address lines CA(j+1) to CA(n), and the sense amplifiers 222(j+1) to 222(n) are electrically connected to thememory cell array 201 through the bit lines BLa(j+1) to BLa(n) and the bit lines BLb(j+1) to BLb(n). Similarly, thesecond driver circuit 212 includes thecolumn decoder 217 b and thesense amplifier group 216 b, and thesense amplifier group 216 b includes sense amplifiers 222(1) to 222(j). Thecolumn decoder 217 b is electrically connected to the sense amplifiers 222(1) to 222(j) through column address lines CA(1) to CA(j), and the sense amplifiers 222(1) to 222(j) are electrically connected to thememory cell array 201 through the bit lines BLa(1) to BLa(j) and the bit lines BLb(1) to BLb(j). -
FIG. 7 illustrates a circuit configuration of a sense amplifier which can be applied to thesense amplifier groups - In the sense amplifier illustrated in
FIG. 7 , a gate electrode of atransistor 401, a gate electrode of atransistor 402, and a gate electrode of atransistor 403 are electrically connected to a signal line φpc. One of a source electrode and a drain electrode of thetransistor 402 and one of a source electrode and a drain electrode of thetransistor 403 are electrically connected to a signal line Vpc. The other of the source electrode and the drain electrode of thetransistor 402 is electrically connected to the signal line BLa. The other of the source electrode and the drain electrode of thetransistor 403 is electrically connected to the signal line BLb. One of a source electrode and a drain electrode of thetransistor 401 is electrically connected to the signal line BLa and the other of the source electrode and the drain electrode of thetransistor 401 is electrically connected to the signal line BLb. A gate electrode of atransistor 404, a gate electrode of atransistor 405, one of a source electrode and a drain electrode of atransistor 406, and one of a source electrode and a drain electrode of atransistor 407 are electrically connected to the signal line BLa, and a gate electrode of thetransistor 406, a gate electrode of thetransistor 407, one of a source electrode and a drain electrode of thetransistor 404, and one of a source electrode and a drain electrode of thetransistor 405 are electrically connected to the signal line BLb. The other of the source electrode and the drain electrode of thetransistor 404 and the other of the source electrode and the drain electrode of thetransistor 406 are electrically connected to one of a source electrode and a drain electrode of atransistor 408, and the other of the source electrode and the drain electrode of thetransistor 405 and the other of the source electrode and the drain electrode of thetransistor 407 are electrically connected to one of a source electrode and a drain electrode of atransistor 409. One of a source electrode and a drain electrode of atransistor 410 is electrically connected to the signal line BLa, and the other of the source electrode and the drain electrode of thetransistor 410 is electrically connected to a signal line IOa. One of a source electrode and a drain electrode of atransistor 411 is electrically connected to the signal line BLb, and the other of the source electrode and the drain electrode of thetransistor 411 is electrically connected to a signal line IOb. A gate electrode of thetransistor 410 and a gate electrode of thetransistor 411 are electrically connected to a signal line CAi. A potential VH is supplied to the other of the source electrode and the drain electrode of thetransistor 409, and a potential VL is supplied to the other of the source electrode and the drain electrode of thetransistor 408. - In the sense amplifier illustrated in
FIG. 7 , thetransistor 405, thetransistor 407, and thetransistor 409 are p-channel transistors, and thetransistors 401 to 404, thetransistor 406, thetransistor 408, thetransistor 410, and thetransistor 411 are n-channel transistors. - Next, the case where writing, holding, and reading data is performed on the
memory cell array 201 is described with reference toFIG. 6 ,FIG. 7 , andFIG. 8 . Note that in thememory cell 170, two states of a potential VDD and a potential VSS are held in the first terminal of thecapacitor 164, and a state in which the potential VDD is held is referred to as data “1”, and a state in which the potential VSS is held is referred to as data “0”. Here, the case where data “1” is written to the memory cell 170(1,1) of thememory cell array 201 illustrated inFIG. 6 and the case where data “1” is read from the memory cell 170(1,1) are described. In other words, the case where the memory cell 170(1,1) in the first row and the first column of the memory cells in thememory cell array 201 is selected and writing and reading data is performed thereon is described. Here, a row on which writing or reading data is performed is also referred to as a selected row, and a column on which writing or reading data is performed is also referred to as a selected column. Therefore, hereinafter, the case where the first row is the selected row and the first column is the selected column is described. - In the case where data is written to the memory cell 170(1,1) illustrated in
FIG. 6 , the potential VDD is supplied to the signal line CA(1) in the first column (also referred to as “the signal line CA(1) is activated”). As a result, the bit line BLa(1) and the bit line BLb(1) are electrically connected the signal line IOa the and the signal line IOb, respectively. In the sense amplifier illustrated inFIG. 7 , the potential VDD is supplied to a signal line φn and the potential VSS is supplied to a signal line φp. Thus, a predetermined power supply voltage (a potential difference between the potential VL and the potential VH) is input to the sense amplifier (also referred to as “the sense amplifier is activated”). At this time, the potential VSS is supplied to the signal line φpc. Here, the potential VH can be VDD and the potential VL can be VSS. - Then, a read circuit, a write circuit, and a latch circuit group included in the
fifth driver circuit 215 illustrated inFIG. 6 are supplied with potentials corresponding to data to be written to the signal line IOa and the signal line IOb. For example, when data “1” is written to the memory cell 170(1,1), the signal line IOa is supplied with VDD and the signal line IOb is supplied with VSS. As a result, the bit line BLa(1) is supplied with VDD and the bit line BLb(1) is supplied with VSS. Note that the potentials of the bit line BLa(1) and the bit line BLb(1) is held at VDD or VSS even when the signal line CA(1) is deactivated (here, supplied with the potential VSS) as long as the sense amplifier is activated. - Next, the word line WL(1) in the first row which is a selected row is activated, so that the
transistor 162 of the memory cell 170(1,1) is turned on. Here, the word line WL(1) is supplied with a potential VDDH which is higher than the potential VDD. As a result, the first terminal of thecapacitor 164 of the memory cell 170(1,1) is supplied with VDD. After that, the word line WL(1) is deactivated (here, supplied with the potential VSS), so that thetransistor 162 of the memory cell 170(1,1) is turned off. In this manner, data “1” can be written to the memory cell 170(1,1). Furthermore, by turning off thetransistor 162 of the memory cell 170(1,1), the potential of the first terminal of the capacitor 164 (or charge accumulated in the capacitor 164) is held. - Note that although the case of writing data “1” is described here, the case of writing data “0” is also similar.
- Next, the case where data is read from the memory cell 170(1,1) is described with reference to a timing chart in
FIG. 8 . - In order to read data from the memory cell 170(1,1), the potential VDD is applied to the signal line φpc, the bit line BLa(1) and the bit line BLb(1) are precharged, and the potential Vpc is applied to the bit line BLa(1) and the bit line BLb(1). Here, the potential Vpc is VDD/2. Then, the potential VSS is applied to the signal line φpc, and thus, precharge is completed.
- Next, the word line WL(1) in the first row which is a selected row is activated, so that the
transistor 162 of the memory cell 170(1,1) is turned on. Here, the word line WL(1) is supplied with the potential VDDH which is higher than the potential VDD. As a result, charge is redistributed between the bit line BLa(1) and thecapacitor 164 of the memory cell 170(1,1), and the potential of the bit line BLa(1) is slightly increased. - Next, the sense amplifier is activated. Here, by changing the potential applied to the signal line φn from VSS to VDD, the potential VL is applied to the n-
channel transistor 408 included in the sense amplifier. As a result, the potential of the bit line BLa(1) is slightly higher than that of the bit line BLb(1), and therefore, the sense amplifier amplifies the difference and decreases the potential of the bit line BLb(1) to the potential VL. Subsequently, by changing the potential applied to the signal line φp from VDD to VSS, the potential VH is applied to the p-channel transistor 409 included in the sense amplifier. As a result, the potential of the bit line BLb(1) is equal to the potential VL which is lower than that of the bit line BLa(1), and therefore, the sense amplifier amplifies the difference and increases the potential of the bit line BLa(1) to the potential VH. As a result, the bit line BLa(1) is supplied with the potential VH and the bit line BLb(1) is supplied with the potential VL. InFIG. 8 , the potential VH is VDD, and the potential VL is VSS. - Next, the signal line CA(1) in the first column which is a selected column is activated. Here, the signal line CA(1) is supplied with the potential VDD. As a result, the bit line BLa(1) and the bit line BLb(1) are electrically connected to the signal line IOa and the signal line IOb, respectively, which are electrically connected to the read circuit, the write circuit, and the latch circuit group of the
fifth driver circuit 215. Thus, the potentials of the bit line BLa(1) and the bit line BLb(1) are read. - In this manner, data is read from the memory cell 170(1,1).
- After the data stored in the memory cell 170(1,1) is read out to the read circuit, the write circuit, and the latch circuit group, the signal line CA(1) is deactivated (here, supplied with the potential VSS), so that the bit line BLa(1) and the bit line BLb(1) are electrically disconnected from the signal line IOa and the signal line IOb. Then, the word line WL(1) is deactivated (here, supplied with the potential VSS), so that the
transistor 162 of the memory cell 170(1,1) is turned off. At this time, data “1” is stored again in the memory cell 170(1,1). After that, the sense amplifier may be deactivated by changing the potential applied to the signal line φn from VDD to VSS and changing the potential applied to the signal line φp from VSS to VDD. The bit line BLa(1) and the bit line BLb(1) may be precharged by applying the potential VDD to the signal line φpc. - In the above manner, data “1” can be read from the memory cell 170(1,1).
- Note that although the case of reading data “1” from the memory cell 170(1,1) is described here, a read operation in the case of reading data “0” is also similar. In that case, charge is redistributed between the bit line BLa(1) and the
capacitor 164 of the memory cell 170(1,1), and the potential of the bit line BLa(1) is slightly decreased. The sense amplifier amplifies the difference, decreases the potential of the bit line BLa(1) to the potential VL, and increases the potential of the bit line BLb(1) to the potential VH. - What is described above is the circuit configuration of the memory cell array and the driving method thereof.
- According to one embodiment of the present invention, a plurality of
memory cell arrays 201 is stacked with the use of multilevel interconnection. For example, in the circuit diagram illustrated inFIG. 6 , thememory cell arrays 201 may be divided into a region driven by thefirst driver circuit 211 and the third driver circuit 213 (a first memory cell array), a region driven by thefirst driver circuit 211 and the fourth driver circuit 214 (a second memory cell array), a region driven by thesecond driver circuit 212 and the third driver circuit 213 (a third memory cell array), and a region driven by thesecond driver circuit 212 and the fourth drive circuit 214 (a fourth memory cell array), and the first to fourth memory cell arrays may be stacked to overlap. Such a dividing structure of thememory cell array 201 corresponds to the structure illustrated in the schematic view inFIG. 3F . An example in which regions driven by the same combination of driver circuits of the first tofourth driver circuits 211 to 214 are formed in the same layer is described, but it is not limited thereto. Memory cells driven by the same combination of driver circuits can be formed in different layers. - Next, an example of a method for arranging peripheral circuit stacked to overlap with a memory cell array will be described.
-
FIG. 2A is a block diagram of theperipheral circuit 210 in the lower portion of the memory device illustrated inFIG. 1 , andFIG. 2B illustrates the symmetry with respect to acenter point 250 of thememory cell array 201 a.FIG. 2A illustrates the case where theperipheral circuit 210 is provided under thememory cell array 201 a. - The
peripheral circuit 210 illustrated inFIG. 2A includes thefirst driver circuit 211, thesecond driver circuit 212, thethird driver circuit 213, thefourth driver circuit 214, thefifth driver circuit 215, thecontroller 218, theaddress buffer 221, and the I/O buffer 220. Thefirst driver circuit 211 includes thecolumn decoder 217 a and thesense amplifier group 216 a, and thesecond driver circuit 212 includes thecolumn decoder 217 b and thesense amplifier group 216 b. Thethird driver circuit 213 and thefourth driver circuit 214 include arow decoder 223 a and arow decoder 223 b, respectively. Thefifth driver circuit 215 includes a write circuit, a read circuit, and a latch circuit group. Thecontroller 218 includes amode register 219. - As a substrate where the
peripheral circuit 210 illustrated inFIG. 2A is provided, a semiconductor substrate including a Group 14 element, such as silicon, germanium, silicon germanium, or silicon carbide, a compound semiconductor substrate, such as gallium arsenide or indium phosphide, an SOI substrate, or the like can be used, for example Note that the term “SOI substrate” generally means a substrate where a silicon layer is provided over an insulating surface. In this specification and the like, the term “SOI substrate” also means a substrate where a semiconductor layer containing a material other than silicon is provided over an insulating surface. Moreover, the SOI substrate can be a substrate having a structure in which a semiconductor layer is provided over an insulating substrate such as a glass substrate, with an insulating layer provided therebetween. It is preferable to form theperipheral circuit 210 using any of the above-described substrates because theperipheral circuit 210 can be made to operate at high speed. - The
address buffer 221 outputs a row address signal to therow decoder 223 a and therow decoder 223 b, or a column address signal to thecolumn decoder 217 a and thecolumn decoder 217 b, according to a variety of control signals on an input of an address signal ADR from the outside. Therow decoder 223 a and therow decoder 223 b select a row specified by a row address according to the input row address signal. Thecolumn decoder 217 a and thecolumn decoder 217 b select a column specified by a column address according to the input column address signal. - The
sense amplifier groups - The
fifth driver circuit 215 includes the read circuit, the write circuit, and the latch circuit group, and is electrically connected to thesense amplifier groups - The I/
O buffer 220 receives data which is input from the outside through a data signal line, and outputs data to the write circuit and the latch circuit group of thefifth driver circuit 215. In addition, the I/O buffer 220 receives data which is stored in the read circuit and the latch circuit group, and outputs data to the outside. - The
controller 218 includes a command decoder, themode register 219, and the like and receives a variety of control signals (e.g., /CS, /RAS, /CAS, and /WE). The command decoder decodes a command that is input by means of the variety of control signals. Themode register 219 is a register for setting an operation mode of a semiconductor device. Data is written to themode register 219 according to a command and supplied with data to be written thereto by means of an address signal. Thecontroller 218 generates a variety of control signals based on an output of the command decoder, and outputs the control signals to a variety of circuits. - Here, the
first driver circuit 211 and thesecond driver circuit 212 are arranged so as to be symmetrical with respect to thecenter point 250 of thememory cell array 201 a. Thethird driver circuit 213 and thefourth driver circuit 214 are arranged so as to be symmetrical with respect to thecenter point 250 of thememory cell array 201 a. At this time, the first tofourth circuits 211 to 214 are arranged so that a direction in which circuit elements for different rows are disposed in thethird driver circuit 213 and the fourth driver circuit 214 (the horizontal direction inFIG. 2A ) and a direction in which circuit elements for different columns are disposed in thefirst driver circuit 211 and the second driver circuit 212 (the vertical direction inFIG. 2A ) cross each other, for example, are perpendicular to each other. In an embodiment of the present invention, “being symmetrical with respect to a point” means being in a positional relation as in the arrangement of thefirst driver circuit 211 and thesecond driver circuit 212 illustrated inFIG. 1 andFIG. 2A , where thefirst driver circuit 211 overlaps with thesecond driver circuit 212 by rotating 180 degrees with respect to thecenter point 250. Note that “being symmetrical with respect to a point” does not necessarily mean “being completely symmetrical with respect to a point” but “being substantially symmetrical with respect to a point”. - As illustrated in
FIG. 1 andFIG. 2A , a column decoder and a row decoder are divided and arranged in theperipheral circuit 210, so that an area of theperipheral circuit 210 can be reduced. Further, the column decoder and the row decoder are divided and arranged in theperipheral circuit 210, so that theperipheral circuit 210 can be provided under thememory cell array 201 a, leading to downsizing of a memory device. In particular, when the area of thememory cell array 201 a is substantially equal to the area of theperipheral circuit 210, a wasted region can be eliminated, so that the area and size of a memory device can be decreased. Further, when the area of theperipheral circuit 210 is smaller than or equal to the area of thememory cell array 201 a, an increase in the circuit area due to theperipheral circuit 210 can be suppressed, so that the area and size of a memory device can be decreased. In the case where the area of theperipheral circuit 210 is much smaller than the area of thememory cell array 201 a, the scale of theperipheral circuit 210 may be increased to improve its function as for kinds of interfaces or commands of a memory device. Although description is made using the column decoder and the row decoder, it is not limited to the column decoder and the row decoder. When a circuit which is required to be provided from one end to the other end along with a memory cell array, that is, a circuit which is required to be provided to each row of a memory cell array or a circuit which is required to be provided to each column of a memory cell array, has a configuration similar to the configuration of the above column decoder or row decoder, the above effect can be obtained. - Note that although
FIG. 2A illustrates the case where theperipheral circuit 210 is provided directly under thememory cell array 201 a, theperipheral circuit 210 does not need to be provided directly under thememory cell array 201 a. However, in order to decrease the area and size of the memory device, it is preferable that theperipheral circuit 210 including the first tofourth driver circuits 211 to 214 and the like be provided directly under thememory cell array 201 a. -
FIGS. 4A to 4C illustrate arrangements of the first tofourth driver circuits 211 to 214. Note that for easy understanding, circuits other than the first tofourth driver circuits 211 to 214 are not illustrated inFIGS. 4A to 4C . - The number of wirings which electrically connect the
first driver circuit 211 and the memory cell array (thememory cell array 201 a or thememory cell array 201 b inFIG. 1 ) may be different from the number of wirings which electrically connect thesecond driver circuit 212 and the memory cell array (thememory cell array 201 a or thememory cell array 201 b inFIG. 1 ) (seeFIGS. 4A and 4B ). In other words, the area of thefirst driver circuit 211 may be different from the area of thesecond driver circuit 212. - However, it is preferable that the number of wirings which electrically connect the
first drive circuit 211 and the memory cell array (thememory cell array 201 a or thememory cell array 201 b inFIG. 1 ) be equal to the number of wirings which electrically connect thesecond driver circuit 212 and the memory cell array (thememory cell array 201 a or thememory cell array 201 b inFIG. 1 ). Accordingly, the number of address signal lines connected to thefirst driver circuit 211 or thesecond driver circuit 212 can be reduced. As a result, the scale of the circuit can be reduced, leading to a decrease in the area and size of a memory device. - Further, when the number of wirings which electrically connect the
first driver circuit 211 and the memory cell array (thememory cell array 201 a or thememory cell array 201 b inFIG. 1 ) is equal to the number of wirings which electrically connect thesecond driver circuit 212 and the memory cell array (thememory cell array 201 a or thememory cell array 201 b inFIG. 1 ) and thefirst driver circuit 211 and thesecond driver circuit 212 are arranged so as to be substantially symmetrical with respect to the center point of thememory cell array 201 a, variation in parasitic resistance or parasitic capacitance of a wiring such as a bit line or a word line can be reduced, leading to stable operation. - Although the
first driver circuit 211 and thesecond driver circuit 212 are described here, a similar effect can be obtained with thethird driver circuit 213 and thefourth driver circuit 214. -
FIG. 1 andFIG. 2A illustrate the case where the number of each of the first tofourth driver circuits 211 to 214 is one;FIG. 4C illustrates the case where each of the first tofourth driver circuits 211 to 214 is divided into two. - As illustrated in
FIG. 4C , afirst driver circuit 211 a and asecond driver circuit 212 a are arranged so as to be symmetrical with respect to thecenter point 250 of thememory cell array 201 a, and afirst driver circuit 211 b and asecond driver circuit 212 b are arranged so as to be symmetrical with respect to thecenter point 250 of thememory cell array 201 a. Similarly, athird driver circuit 213 a and afourth driver circuit 214 a are arranged so as to be symmetrical with respect to thecenter point 250 of thememory cell array 201 a, and athird driver circuit 213 b and afourth driver circuit 214 b are arranged so as to be symmetrical with respect to thecenter point 250 of thememory cell array 201 a. - The
first driver circuit 211 and thesecond driver circuit 212 are each divided and the dividedfirst driver circuits 211 are arranged so as to be symmetrical to the dividedsecond driver circuits 212 with respect to the center point of thememory cell array 201 a. Thethird driver circuit 213 and thefourth driver circuit 214 are each divided and the dividedthird driver circuits 213 are arranged so as to be symmetrical to the dividedfourth driver circuits 214 with respect to the center point of thememory cell array 201 a. Accordingly, a wasted region can be eliminated, and therefore, the area of theperipheral circuit 210 can be decreased. Furthermore, theperipheral circuit 210 can be provided under thememory cell array 201 a. Thus, the size of the memory device can be reduced. Moreover, by making the area of thememory cell array 201 a substantially equal to the area of theperipheral circuit 210, a wasted region can be eliminated. Thus, the area and size of the memory device can be reduced. - Note that although
FIG. 4C illustrates the case where each of the first tofourth driver circuits 211 to 214 is divided into two, an embodiment of the present invention is not limited to this example Each of the first tofourth driver circuits 211 to 214 may be divided into three or more. In any case, with the arrangement in which the first tofourth driver circuits 211 to 214 are arranged so as to be symmetrical with respect to thecenter point 250 of thememory cell array 201 a, the above-described effect can be obtained. - This embodiment can be implemented in appropriate combination with the configurations described in the other embodiments.
- In this embodiment, a structure and a manufacturing method of a memory device according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to
FIGS. 9A and 9B ,FIGS. 10A and 10B ,FIGS. 11A and 11B ,FIGS. 12A to 12D ,FIGS. 13A to 13E ,FIGS. 14A to 14D , andFIGS. 16A and 16B . -
FIG. 9A andFIG. 16A are cross-sectional views of a memory device. InFIG. 9A , a cross section B1-B2 is parallel to the channel length direction of a transistor. InFIG. 16A , a cross section C1-C2 is parallel to the channel width direction of a transistor. The memory device illustrated inFIG. 9A andFIG. 16A includes thememory cell array 201 a and thememory cell array 201 b in the upper portion and theperipheral circuit 210 in the lower portion. Amemory cell 170 a included in thememory cell array 201 a and amemory cell 170 b included in thememory cell array 201 b are illustrated as an example of the plurality of memory cells included in thememory cell array 201 a and thememory cell array 201 b.FIG. 9B andFIG. 16B illustrate structures of thememory cell 170 a and thememory cell 170 b inFIG. 9A andFIG. 16A (referred to as a structure of the memory cell 170) in detail, respectively. Thememory cell 170 a and thememory cell 170 b can have a similar structure. Thememory cell array 201 a and thememory cell array 201 b in the upper portion each include thetransistor 162 in which an oxide semiconductor is used for a channel formation region, and theperipheral circuit 210 in the lower portion includes atransistor 160 in which a semiconductor material other than an oxide semiconductor is used for a channel formation region. Note thatEmbodiment 1 can be referred to for the details of thememory cell array 201 a and thememory cell array 201 b which are provided in the upper portion of the memory device and theperipheral circuit 210. Although a structure in which two memory cell arrays (thememory cell array 201 a and thememory cell array 201 b) are stacked is illustrated as an example inFIG. 9A andFIG. 16A , the number of memory cell arrays to be stacked is not limited to this. - Either an n-channel transistor or a p-channel transistor can be used as the
transistor 160 and thetransistor 162. Here, both thetransistor 160 and thetransistor 162 are n-channel transistors in the following description. The technical feature of an embodiment of the present invention is to use a semiconductor material with which off-state current can be sufficiently decreased, such as an oxide semiconductor, for a channel formation region of thetransistor 162 so that data can be held. Therefore, it is not necessary to limit a specific structure of the memory device, such as a material of the memory device or a structure of the memory device, to the structure described here. - The
transistor 160 includes achannel formation region 116 provided in asubstrate 100 including a semiconductor material (such as silicon);impurity regions 120 provided such that thechannel formation region 116 is sandwiched therebetween;metal compound regions 124 in contact with theimpurity regions 120; agate insulating layer 108 provided over thechannel formation region 116; agate electrode 110 provided over thegate insulating layer 108; and a source ordrain electrode 130 a and a source ordrain electrode 130 b electrically connected to themetal compound regions 124. In addition, an insulatinglayer 128 is provided so as to cover thetransistor 160. The source ordrain electrode 130 a and the source ordrain electrode 130 b are electrically connected to themetal compound regions 124 through openings formed in the insulatinglayer 128. Over the insulatinglayer 128, anelectrode 136 a is formed in contact with the source ordrain electrode 130 a, and anelectrode 136 b is formed in contact with the source ordrain electrode 130 b. - Further, an element
isolation insulating layer 106 is formed over thesubstrate 100 so as to surround thetransistor 160, and the insulatinglayer 128 is formed over thetransistor 160. Note that in order to realize higher integration, thetransistor 160 preferably has a structure without a sidewall insulating layer as illustrated inFIG. 9A . On the other hand, in the case where characteristics of thetransistor 160 have priority, a sidewall insulating layer may be provided on a side surface of thegate electrode 110, and theimpurity regions 120 may include a region having a different impurity concentration in a region overlapping with the sidewall insulating layer. - The
transistor 162 includes anoxide semiconductor layer 144 provided over the insulatinglayer 128 and the like; anelectrode 142 a and anelectrode 142 b which are electrically connected to theoxide semiconductor layer 144; agate insulating layer 146 covering theoxide semiconductor layer 144, theelectrode 142 a, and theelectrode 142 b; and anelectrode 148 a provided over thegate insulating layer 146 so as to overlap with theoxide semiconductor layer 144. Theelectrode 148 a serves as a gate electrode of thetransistor 162. One of theelectrode 142 a and theelectrode 142 b serves as a drain electrode of thetransistor 162 and the other serves as a source electrode. - Here, an oxide semiconductor layer used for a transistor, such as the
oxide semiconductor layer 144, is preferably an oxide semiconductor layer which is purified by sufficiently removing an impurity such as hydrogen therefrom and then sufficiently supplying oxygen thereto. Specifically, the hydrogen concentration in the oxide semiconductor layer is 5×1019 atoms/cm3 or less, preferably 5×1018 atoms/cm3 or less, more preferably 5×1017 atoms/cm3 or less, for example. Note that the above hydrogen concentration in the oxide semiconductor layer is measured by secondary ion mass spectrometry (SIMS). The concentration of carriers in the oxide semiconductor layer, in which hydrogen is reduced to a sufficiently low concentration and defect states in an energy gap due to oxygen deficiency are reduced by sufficiently supplying oxygen as described above, is less than 1×1012/cm3, preferably less than 1×1011/cm3, more preferably less than 1.45×1010/cm3. For example, the off-state current (per unit channel width (1 μm), here) at room temperature (25° C.) is 100 zA (1 zA (zeptoampere) is 1×10−21 A) or less, preferably 10 zA or less. In this manner, by using an i-type (intrinsic) or substantially i-type oxide semiconductor, a transistor (the transistor 162) which has extremely favorable off-state current characteristics can be obtained. - Further, it is preferable that the concentration of an alkali metal and an alkaline earth metal in the
oxide semiconductor layer 144 be sufficiently reduced. As for the concentration of an alkali metal or an alkaline earth metal measured by SIMS, for example, the concentration of Na is 5×1016 cm−3 or lower, preferably 1×1016 cm−3 or lower, more preferably 1×1015 cm−3 or lower; the concentration of Li is 5×1015 cm−3 or lower, preferably 1×1015 cm−3 or lower; or the concentration of K is 5×1015 cm−3 or lower, preferably 1×1015 cm−3 or lower. - Note that it has been pointed out that an oxide semiconductor is insensitive to impurities, there is no problem when a considerable amount of metal impurities is contained in the film, and therefore, soda-lime glass which contains a large amount of alkali metal such as sodium and is inexpensive can also be used (Kamiya, Nomura, and Hosono, “Carrier Transport Properties and Electronic Structures of Amorphous Oxide Semiconductors: The present status”, KOTAI BUTSURI (SOLID STATE PHYSICS), 2009, Vol. 44, pp. 621-633). But such consideration is not appropriate. An alkali metal and an alkaline earth metal are adverse impurities for the oxide semiconductor and are preferably contained as little as possible. An alkali metal, in particular, Na diffuses into an oxide and becomes Na when an insulating film in contact with the oxide semiconductor is an oxide. In addition, Na cuts a bond between metal and oxygen or enters the bond in the oxide semiconductor. As a result, deterioration of transistor characteristics (e.g., the shift of a threshold value to the negative side (causing the transistor to be normally on) or a decrease in mobility) is caused. In addition, this also causes variation in the characteristics. Such a problem is significant especially in the case where the hydrogen concentration in the oxide semiconductor is extremely low. Therefore, the concentration of an alkali metal is strongly required to set to the above value in the case where the hydrogen concentration in the oxide semiconductor is lower than or equal to 5×1019 cm−3, particularly lower than or equal to 5×1018 cm−3.
- Note that the
oxide semiconductor layer 144 may exhibit slight (weak) p-type conductivity by adding an impurity imparting p-type conductivity such as tin (Sn) to theoxide semiconductor layer 144. The oxide semiconductor layer which is purified as described above becomes i-type (intrinsic) or substantially i-type, so that theoxide semiconductor layer 144 which exhibits weak p-type conductivity can be obtained by adding a small amount of an impurity for controlling valence electrons. Thus, the threshold voltage of thetransistor 162 can be slightly shifted toward the positive side. Accordingly, thetransistor 162 is prevented from becoming normally on and off-state current can be further reduced. Alternatively, in order to prevent thetransistor 162 from becoming normally on, a second gate electrode may be provided on a surface of theoxide semiconductor layer 144 of thetransistor 162, which is opposite to the surface provided with the gate electrode (theelectrode 148 a), with an insulating layer provided therebetween so that the threshold voltage is controlled by the second gate electrode. - Although the oxide semiconductor layer processed in an island shape is used for the
transistor 162 in order to suppress leakage among elements due to miniaturization, an oxide semiconductor layer not processed in an island shape may be used. When an oxide semiconductor layer is not processed in an island shape, the oxide semiconductor layer can be prevented from being contaminated by etching during processing. - A
capacitor 164 includes theelectrode 142 b, thegate insulating layer 146, and aconductive layer 148 b. That is, theelectrode 142 b functions as one electrode of thecapacitor 164, and theconductive layer 148 b functions as the other electrode of thecapacitor 164. With such a structure, capacitance can be sufficiently secured. When theoxide semiconductor layer 144 and thegate insulating layer 146 are stacked, insulation between theelectrode 142 b and theconductive layer 148 b can be sufficiently secured. Furthermore, in the case where no capacitor is needed, a structure in which thecapacitor 164 is not provided is also possible. - Note that in the
transistor 162 and thecapacitor 164, theelectrode 142 a and theelectrode 142 b preferably have tapered end portions. When theelectrode 142 a and theelectrode 142 b have tapered end portions, coverage of theelectrode 142 a and theelectrode 142 b with thegate insulating layer 146 can be improved and disconnection of thegate insulating layer 146 can be prevented. Here, the taper angle is in the range of 30° to 60°, for example Note that the “taper angle” means an angle formed by the side surface and the bottom surface of a layer having a tapered shape (for example, theelectrode 142 a) when observed from a cross section thereof (a plane perpendicular to the substrate surface). - An insulating
layer 150 and an insulatinglayer 152 are provided over thetransistor 162 and thecapacitor 164. Anelectrode 154 a is provided in an opening formed in thegate insulating layer 146, the insulatinglayer 150, the insulatinglayer 152, and the like, and awiring 156 which is electrically connected to theelectrode 154 a is formed over the insulatinglayer 152. Thewiring 156 is a wiring for electrically connecting one memory cell to another memory cell in each memory cell array (memory cell arrays arranged in the same layer), and can be a bit line, for example. Further, theelectrode 148 a is a wiring which extends in a direction of C1-C2 and electrically connects one memory cell to another memory cell in each memory cell array (memory cell arrays arranged in the same layer), and can be a word line, for example (seeFIG. 16A ). Although not illustrated, theconductive layer 148 b is a wiring which extends in a direction of C1-C2 and electrically connects one memory cell to another memory cell in each memory cell array (memory cell arrays arranged in the same layer), and can be a capacitor line, for example. - The
wiring 156 included in thememory cell array 201 a is electrically connected to anelectrode 136 c through anelectrode 502 a, anelectrode 501 a, and anelectrode 126. Thus, theperipheral circuit 210 in the lower layer and a bit line of thememory cell array 201 a in the upper layer can be electrically connected to each other. Although the case where theelectrode 501 a is electrically connected to theelectrode 136 c through theelectrode 126 is illustrated inFIG. 9A , it is not limited thereto. After an opening reaching theelectrode 136 c is provided in the insulatinglayer 140 under thememory cell array 201 a, theelectrode 501 a is formed, whereby theelectrode 501 a and theelectrode 136 c may be in direct contact with each other. - The
electrode 148 a is electrically connected to anelectrode 556 through anelectrode 557. Thus, theperipheral circuit 210 in the lower layer and a word line of thememory cell array 201 a in the upper layer can be electrically connected to each other. Although the case where theelectrode 148 a is electrically connected to theelectrode 556 through theelectrode 557 is illustrated inFIG. 16A , it is not limited thereto. After an opening reaching theelectrode 556 is provided in the insulatinglayer 140 under thememory cell array 201 a, theelectrode 148 a is formed, whereby theelectrode 148 a and theelectrode 556 may be in direct contact with each other. - Although not illustrated, like the word line of the
memory cell array 201 a, theconductive layer 148 b serving as a capacitor line can also be electrically connected to theperipheral circuit 210 in the lower layer. - Next, a method for electrically connecting wirings of a plurality of memory cell arrays is described.
- The case where the bit line included in the
memory cell array 201 a is electrically connected to the bit line included in thememory cell array 201 b is described with reference toFIG. 9A . - The
wiring 156 serving as the bit line included in thememory cell array 201 a and thewiring 156 serving as the bit line included in thememory cell array 201 b are electrically connected to each other through anelectrode 500, anelectrode 501 b, and anelectrode 502 b. InFIG. 9A , after an opening reaching thewiring 156 of thememory cell array 201 a is formed in the insulatinglayer 140 under thememory cell array 201 b, theelectrode 501 b may be formed, whereby theelectrode 501 b and thewiring 156 of thememory cell array 201 a may be in direct contact with each other. - Although an example in which the position where an electrode for electrically connecting the bit line of the
memory cell array 201 a to theperipheral circuit 210 is formed and the position where an electrode for electrically connecting the bit line of thememory cell array 201 a to the bit line of thememory cell array 201 b are greatly different in the plane layout is illustrated inFIG. 9A , it is not limited thereto. Bit lines of a plurality of memory cell arrays can be connected at various positions. For example, an electrode for electrically connecting the bit line of thememory cell array 201 a to the bit line of thememory cell array 201 b may be formed to overlap with an electrode for electrically connecting the bit line of thememory cell array 201 a to theperipheral circuit 210. In the case where three or more memory cell arrays are stacked to overlap, connection positions of bit lines of the plurality of memory cell arrays may overlap with one another, for example With a planar layout in which connection positions overlap with one another, an increase in the element area due to a contact region can be prevented. In other words, the degree of integration of the memory device can be increased. - The case where the word line included in the
memory cell array 201 a is electrically connected to the word line included in thememory cell array 201 b is described with reference toFIG. 16A . - The
electrode 148 a serving as the word line included in thememory cell array 201 a and theelectrode 148 a serving as the word line included in thememory cell array 201 b are electrically connected to each other through anelectrode 551, anelectrode 552, and anelectrode 553. InFIG. 16A , after an opening reaching theelectrode 552 of thememory cell array 201 a is formed in the insulatinglayer 140 under thememory cell array 201 b, theelectrode 148 a of thememory cell array 201 b may be formed, whereby theelectrode 148 a of thememory cell array 201 b and theelectrode 552 of thememory cell array 201 a may be in direct contact with each other. - Although an example in which the position where an electrode for electrically connecting the word line of the
memory cell array 201 a to theperipheral circuit 210 is formed and the position where an electrode for electrically connecting the word line of thememory cell array 201 a to the word line of thememory cell array 201 b are greatly different in the plane layout is illustrated inFIG. 16A , it is not limited thereto. Word lines of a plurality of memory cell arrays can be connected at various positions. For example, an electrode for electrically connecting the word line of thememory cell array 201 a to the word line of thememory cell array 201 b may be formed to overlap with an electrode for electrically connecting the word line of thememory cell array 201 a to theperipheral circuit 210. In the case where three or more memory cell arrays are stacked to overlap, connection positions of word lines of the plurality of memory cell arrays may overlap with one another, for example With a planar layout in which connection positions overlap with one another, an increase in the element area due to a contact region can be prevented. In other words, the degree of integration of the memory device can be increased. - Although not illustrated, capacitor lines of the plurality of memory cell arrays can be electrically connected to each other in a manner similar to that of the word lines.
- In the memory device illustrated in
FIG. 9A andFIG. 16A , the insulatinglayer 140 is provided between thememory cell array 201 a in the upper portion and theperipheral circuit 210 in the lower portion. The feature of an embodiment of the present invention is that a plurality of memory cell array is stacked. Therefore, it is desirable that the surface of the insulatinglayer 140 and the surface of the insulatinglayer 152 be planarized by CMP or the like. - The
transistor 160 includes a semiconductor material other than an oxide semiconductor in a channel formation region. The semiconductor material other than an oxide semiconductor may be, for example, silicon, germanium, silicon germanium, silicon carbide, gallium arsenide, or the like and is preferably a single crystal semiconductor. Alternatively, an organic semiconductor material or the like may be used. A transistor including such a semiconductor material can operate at sufficiently high speed. Therefore, a transistor including a material other than an oxide semiconductor can favorably realize a variety of circuits (e.g., a logic circuit or a driver circuit) which needs to operate at high speed. - On the other hand, the
transistor 162 includes an oxide semiconductor material in a channel formation region. A transistor including an oxide semiconductor material disclosed in this specification and the like can realize an extremely small off-state current. Owing to this feature, thememory cell 170 can hold stored data for an extremely long time. In other words, refresh operation becomes unnecessary or the frequency of the refresh operation can be extremely lowered, which leads to a sufficient reduction in power consumption. Moreover, stored data can be held for a long period even when power is not supplied. Further, when a normally-off (enhancement) transistor is used as thetransistor 162, and power is not supplied, a ground potential may be input to the gate of thetransistor 162. With that structure, thetransistor 162 can remain off and stored data can be kept held even when power is not supplied. - Further, the
memory cell 170 does not require high voltage for writing data and does not have the problem of deterioration of elements. For example, unlike a conventional nonvolatile memory, it is not necessary to inject and extract electrons into and from a floating gate, and thus a problem such as deterioration of a gate insulating layer does not arise at all. That is, thememory cell 170 does not have a limitation on the number of times data can be rewritten, which is a problem of a conventional nonvolatile memory, and the reliability thereof is drastically improved. Furthermore, since data is written by turning on or off thetransistor 162, high-speed operation can be easily realized. Additionally, there is an advantage in that operation for erasing data is not needed. - A memory device having a novel feature can be realized by being provided with both a peripheral circuit such as a driver circuit including a transistor including a material other than an oxide semiconductor (in other words, a transistor capable of operating at sufficiently high speed) and a memory circuit including a transistor including an oxide semiconductor (in a broader sense, a transistor whose off-state current is sufficiently small).
- A driver circuit and a control circuit included in the
peripheral circuit 210 illustrated inFIG. 9 are arranged as illustrated inFIG. 1 andFIGS. 2A and 2B . Accordingly, the area and size of the memory device can be decreased. -
FIGS. 10A and 10B illustrate an example of a structure of the memory cell.FIG. 10A is a cross-sectional view of the memory cell, andFIG. 10B is a plan view of the memory cell. Here,FIG. 10A corresponds to a cross section along line A1-A2 inFIG. 10B . The memory cell illustrated inFIGS. 10A and 10B includes thetransistor 162 including an oxide semiconductor. Thetransistor 162 including an oxide semiconductor can hold charge for a long time owing to its characteristics. Note that the memory cell illustrated inFIGS. 10A and 10B corresponds to the circuit diagram of the memory cell illustrated inFIG. 5 . - Since the structure of the memory cell illustrated in
FIGS. 10A and 10B is similar to the structure illustrated inFIG. 9B orFIG. 16B , the same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals and description is omitted. -
FIGS. 11A and 11B ,FIGS. 12A to 12D ,FIGS. 17A to 17D , andFIGS. 18A to 18D each illustrate an example of a structure of a memory cell which is different from that inFIGS. 10A and 10B . - In a
transistor 162 illustrated inFIG. 11A , oxideconductive layers oxide semiconductor layer 144 and theelectrodes conductive layers oxide semiconductor layer 144 and theelectrodes transistor 162 can be made to operate at high speed. By stacking theoxide semiconductor layer 144, the oxide conductive layers, and the source or drain electrodes, the withstand voltage of thetransistor 162 can be increased. Acapacitor 164 includes the oxideconductive layer 143 b, theelectrode 142 b, thegate insulating layer 146, and theconductive layer 148 b. - A
transistor 162 illustrated inFIG. 11B is similar to thetransistor 162 inFIG. 11A in that the oxideconductive layers oxide semiconductor layer 144 and theelectrodes transistor 162 illustrated inFIG. 11A , the oxideconductive layers oxide semiconductor layer 144. On the other hand, in thetransistor 162 illustrated inFIG. 11B , the oxideconductive layers oxide semiconductor layer 144. Even in the case of such a structure, the resistance of the source or drain regions can be decreased and thetransistor 162 can be operated at high speed. By stacking theoxide semiconductor layer 144, the oxide conductive layers, and the source or drain electrodes, the withstand voltage of thetransistor 162 can be increased. The description ofFIGS. 10A and 10B or the like can be referred to for the structure of acapacitor 164. - A
transistor 162 illustrated inFIG. 12A is similar to thetransistor 162 illustrated inFIGS. 10A and 10B in that theelectrodes oxide semiconductor layer 144, thegate insulating layer 146, and theelectrode 148 a are provided over the insulatinglayer 140. A difference between thetransistor 162 illustrated inFIG. 12A and thetransistor 162 illustratedFIGS. 10A and 10B is the position where theoxide semiconductor layer 144 and theelectrodes transistor 162 illustrated inFIGS. 10A and 10B , at least part of the upper surface of theoxide semiconductor layer 144 is in contact with theelectrodes electrodes oxide semiconductor layer 144. On the other hand, in thetransistor 162 illustrated inFIG. 12A , part of the upper surfaces of theelectrodes oxide semiconductor layer 144. The description ofFIGS. 10A and 10B or the like can be referred to for the structure of acapacitor 164. - Although
FIGS. 10A and 10B ,FIGS. 11A and 11B , andFIG. 12A illustrate top-gate transistors, bottom-gate transistors may be used.FIGS. 12B and 12C illustrate bottom-gate transistors. - In a
transistor 162 illustrated inFIG. 12B , theelectrode 148 a is provided over the insulatinglayer 140; thegate insulating layer 146 is provided over theelectrode 148 a; theelectrodes gate insulating layer 146; and theoxide semiconductor layer 144 is provided over thegate insulating layer 146 and theelectrodes gate electrode 148 a. Acapacitor 164 includes theconductive layer 148 b, thegate insulating layer 146, and theelectrode 142 b which are provided over the insulatinglayer 140. - An insulating
layer 150 and an insulatinglayer 151 are provided over thetransistor 162 and thecapacitor 164. The insulatinglayer 152 inFIG. 10A is provided over the insulatinglayer 151. - A
transistor 162 illustrated inFIG. 12C is similar to thetransistor 162 illustrated inFIG. 12B in that theelectrode 148 a, thegate insulating layer 146, theelectrodes oxide semiconductor layer 144 are provided over the insulatinglayer 140. A difference between thetransistor 162 illustrated inFIG. 12C and thetransistor 162 illustratedFIG. 12B is the position of contact between theoxide semiconductor layer 144 and theelectrodes transistor 162 illustrated inFIG. 12B , at least part of the lower surface of theoxide semiconductor layer 144 is in contact with theelectrodes oxide semiconductor layer 144 after forming theelectrodes transistor 162 illustrated inFIG. 12C , part of the lower surfaces of theelectrodes oxide semiconductor layer 144. The description ofFIG. 12B can be referred to for the structure of acapacitor 164 or the like. - Moreover, the
transistor 162 may have a dual-gate structure including two gate electrodes positioned above and below a channel formation region with gate insulating layers provided therebetween.FIG. 12D illustrates a dual-gate transistor. - The
transistor 162 illustrated inFIG. 12D is similar to thetransistor 162 illustrated inFIG. 12B in that theelectrode 148 a, thegate insulating layer 146, theelectrodes oxide semiconductor layer 144 are provided over the insulatinglayer 140. InFIG. 12D , additionally, the insulatinglayer 150 is provided so as to cover theelectrodes oxide semiconductor layer 144, and aconductive layer 159 is provided over the insulatinglayer 150 so as to overlap with theoxide semiconductor layer 144. The insulatinglayer 150 functions as a second gate insulating layer of thetransistor 162, and theconductive layer 159 functions as a second gate electrode of thetransistor 162. With such a structure, in a bias-temperature stress test (hereinafter referred to as a BT test) for examining reliability of thetransistor 162, the amount of change in threshold voltage of thetransistor 162 through the BT test can be reduced. The potential of theconductive layer 159 may be the same as or different from that of theelectrode 148 a. The potential of theconductive layer 159 may be GND or 0 V, or theconductive layer 159 may be in a floating state. - Although the structure in which the
capacitor 164 includes theelectrode 148 b, thegate insulating layer 146, and theelectrode 142 b is illustrated inFIGS. 11A and 11B andFIGS. 12A to 12D , it is not limited thereto. Thecapacitor 164 is provided so as to overlap with thetransistor 162, whereby the area of a memory cell can be reduced. Thus, memory capacity per unit area of the memory device can be increased. Further, in the case where parasitic capacitance is generated in capacitance between wirings, it can be used instead of thecapacitor 164. - For example, as illustrated in
FIG. 17A , thecapacitor 164 can include theelectrode 142 b, an insulatinglayer 842, and anelectrode 840 which overlaps with theelectrode 142 b with the insulatinglayer 842 provided therebetween. Note that inFIG. 17A , other structures are similar to those inFIG. 12A . - For example, as illustrated in
FIG. 17B , thecapacitor 164 can include theelectrode 142 b, the insulatinglayer 150, thegate insulating layer 146, and anelectrode 841 which overlaps with theelectrode 142 b with the insulatinglayer 150 and thegate insulating layer 146 provided therebetween. Note that inFIG. 17B , other structures are similar to those inFIG. 12A . Note that inFIG. 17B , it is preferable that theelectrode 841 and theelectrode 148 a be provided so as not to overlap with each other. - For example, as illustrated in
FIG. 17C , thecapacitor 164 can include theelectrode 142 b, the insulatinglayer 842, thegate insulating layer 146, and theelectrode 840 which overlaps with theelectrode 142 b with the insulatinglayer 842 and thegate insulating layer 146 provided therebetween. Note that inFIG. 17C , other structures are similar to those inFIG. 12B . Note that inFIG. 17C , it is preferable that theelectrode 840 and theelectrode 148 a be provided so as not to overlap with each other. - For example, as illustrated in
FIG. 17D , thecapacitor 164 can include theelectrode 142 b, the insulatinglayer 150, the insulatinglayer 151, and theelectrode 841 which overlaps with theelectrode 142 b with the insulatinglayer 150 and the insulatinglayer 151 provided therebetween. Note that inFIG. 17D , other structures are similar to those inFIG. 12B . Although an example in which both the insulatinglayer 150 and the insulatinglayer 151 are used as dielectric layers of thecapacitor 164 is illustrated inFIG. 17D , it is not limited thereto. Only the insulatinglayer 150 may be used as a dielectric layer of thecapacitor 164. - For example, as illustrated in
FIG. 18A , thecapacitor 164 can include theelectrode 142 b, the insulatinglayer 842, thegate insulating layer 146, and theelectrode 840 which overlaps with theelectrode 142 b with the insulatinglayer 842 and thegate insulating layer 146 provided therebetween. Note that inFIG. 18A , other structures are similar to those inFIG. 12C . Note that inFIG. 18A , it is preferable that theelectrode 840 and theelectrode 148 a be provided so as not to overlap with each other. - For example, as illustrated in
FIG. 18B , thecapacitor 164 can include theelectrode 142 b, the insulatinglayer 150, the insulatinglayer 151, and theelectrode 841 which overlaps with theelectrode 142 b with the insulatinglayer 150 and the insulatinglayer 151 provided therebetween. Note that inFIG. 18B , other structures are similar to those inFIG. 12C . Although an example in which both the insulatinglayer 150 and the insulatinglayer 151 are used as dielectric layers of thecapacitor 164 is illustrated inFIG. 18B , it is not limited thereto. Only the insulatinglayer 150 may be used as a dielectric layer of thecapacitor 164. - For example, as illustrated in
FIG. 18C , thecapacitor 164 can include theelectrode 142 b, the insulatinglayer 842, thegate insulating layer 146, and theelectrode 840 which overlaps with theelectrode 142 b with the insulatinglayer 842 and thegate insulating layer 146 provided therebetween. Note that inFIG. 18C , other structures are similar to those inFIG. 12D . Note that inFIG. 18C , it is preferable that theelectrode 840 and theelectrode 148 a be provided so as not to overlap with each other. - For example, as illustrated in
FIG. 18D , thecapacitor 164 can include theelectrode 142 b, the insulatinglayer 150, and theelectrode 841 which overlaps with theelectrode 142 b with the insulatinglayer 150 provided therebetween. Note that inFIG. 18D , other structures are similar to those inFIG. 12D . - Note that any of the structures of the
capacitor 164 of the memory cell illustrated inFIGS. 17A to 17D andFIGS. 18A to 18D can be applied to the structures of the memory cells illustrated inFIGS. 11A and 11B . - As illustrated in
FIGS. 37A and 37B , theelectrode 154 a can be shared between twoadjacent memory cells electrode 154 a (and the opening which is provided with the electrode) is shared between the two adjacent memory cells, higher integration of a memory cell array can be achieved. - In the
memory cell 170 c and thememory cell 170 d inFIG. 37A , each of which includes atransistor 162 having a structure similar to that of thetransistor 162 illustrated inFIG. 12A and acapacitor 164 having a structure in which theoxide semiconductor layer 144 is also included as its dielectric layer in addition to the structure of the capacitor illustrated inFIG. 12A , theelectrode 154 a for electrically connecting thewiring 156 serving as a bit line and a source or a drain of thetransistor 162 is shared. - In the
memory cell 170 c and thememory cell 170 d inFIG. 37B , each of which includes atransistor 162 having a structure similar to that of thetransistor 162 illustrated inFIG. 18B and acapacitor 164 having a structure similar to that of thecapacitor 164 illustrated inFIG. 18B , theelectrode 154 a for electrically connecting thewiring 156 serving as a bit line and a source or a drain of thetransistor 162 is shared. - Further, an example in which the memory cell illustrated in
FIG. 18B is used as thememory cell 170 in the structure of the memory device illustrated inFIGS. 9A and 9B is illustrated inFIGS. 19A and 19B . InFIGS. 19A and 19B , the same portions as those inFIGS. 9A and 9B andFIG. 18B are denoted by the same reference numerals and description is omitted. In the memory cell illustrated inFIG. 18B , the area of a memory cell can be reduced. Therefore, in the memory device illustrated inFIGS. 19A and 19B , memory capacity per unit area can be increased. - Note that memory cells to be stacked are not limited to the memory cell illustrated in
FIG. 18B ; memory cells having any of structures illustrated inFIGS. 17A to 17D andFIGS. 18A to 18D can be used. Alternatively, a memory cell may have a structure in which a structure of a capacitor is different from those illustrated inFIGS. 17A to 17D andFIGS. 18A to 18D . - Next, a method for manufacturing a memory cell array is described with reference to
FIGS. 13A to 13E . Although one memory cell is illustrated as an example inFIGS. 13A to 13E , a plurality of memory cells can be manufactured at the same time to form a memory cell array. Further, by repeating the method similar to that illustrated inFIGS. 13A to 13E , a plurality of memory cell arrays stacked to be multilayered can be formed. - First, the
oxide semiconductor layer 144 is formed by forming an oxide semiconductor layer over the insulatinglayer 140 and then by processing the oxide semiconductor layer (seeFIG. 13A ). - The insulating
layer 140 is formed using a material including an inorganic insulating material such as silicon oxide, silicon oxynitride, silicon nitride oxide, silicon nitride, or aluminum oxide. It is preferable to use a low dielectric constant (low-k) material for the insulatinglayer 140 because capacitance due to overlap of electrodes or wirings can be sufficiently reduced. Note that a porous insulating layer with any of the above materials may be employed as the insulatinglayer 140. A porous insulating layer has a lower dielectric constant than an insulating layer with high density, and thus allows a further reduction in capacitance generated by electrodes or wirings. Alternatively, the insulatinglayer 140 can be formed using an organic insulating material such as polyimide or acrylic. The insulatinglayer 140 can be formed to have a single-layer structure or a stacked-layer structure using the above-described material. In this embodiment, the case of using silicon oxide for the insulatinglayer 140 is described. - An oxide semiconductor used for the
oxide semiconductor layer 144 preferably contains at least indium (In) or zinc (Zn). It is particularly preferable that In and Zn be contained. As a stabilizer for reducing change in electrical characteristics of a transistor including the oxide semiconductor, gallium (Ga) is preferably additionally contained. Tin (Sn) is preferably contained as a stabilizer. Hafnium (Hf) is preferably contained as a stabilizer. Aluminum (Al) is preferably contained as a stabilizer. - As another stabilizer, one or more lanthanoids which include lanthanum (La), cerium (Ce), praseodymium (Pr), neodymium (Nd), samarium (Sm), europium (Eu), gadolinium (Gd), terbium (Tb), dysprosium (Dy), holmium (Ho), erbium (Er), thulium (Tm), ytterbium (Yb), and lutetium (Lu) may be contained.
- For the oxide semiconductor layer 144, for example, an indium oxide, a tin oxide, a zinc oxide, a two-component metal oxide such as an In—Zn-based oxide, a Sn—Zn-based oxide, an Al—Zn-based oxide, a Zn—Mg-based oxide, a Sn—Mg-based oxide, an In—Mg-based oxide, or an In—Ga-based oxide, a three-component metal oxide such as an In—Ga—Zn-based oxide (also referred to as IGZO), an In—Al—Zn-based oxide, an In—Sn—Zn-based oxide, a Sn—Ga—Zn-based oxide, an Al—Ga—Zn-based oxide, a Sn—Al—Zn-based oxide, an In—Hf—Zn-based oxide, an In—La—Zn-based oxide, an In—Ce—Zn-based oxide, an In—Pr—Zn-based oxide, an In—Nd—Zn-based oxide, an In—Sm—Zn-based oxide, an In—Eu—Zn-based oxide, an In—Gd—Zn-based oxide, an In—Tb—Zn-based oxide, an In—Dy—Zn-based oxide, an In—Ho—Zn-based oxide, an In—Er—Zn-based oxide, an In—Tm—Zn-based oxide, an In—Yb—Zn-based oxide, or an In—Lu—Zn-based oxide, or a four-component metal oxide such as an In—Sn—Ga—Zn-based oxide, an In—Hf—Ga—Zn-based oxide, an In—Al—Ga—Zn-based oxide, an In—Sn—Al—Zn-based oxide, an In—Sn—Hf—Zn-based oxide, or an In—Hf—Al—Zn-based oxide can be used.
- Note that here, for example, an “In—Ga—Zn-based oxide” means an oxide containing In, Ga, and Zn as its main components and there is no particular limitation on the ratio of In:Ga:Zn. Further, a metal element in addition to In, Ga, and Zn may be contained.
- The
oxide semiconductor layer 144 may be formed using a material represented by the chemical formula, InMO3(ZnO)m, (m>0, where m is not an integer). Note that M represents one or more metal elements selected from Ga, Fe, Mn, and Co. Alternatively, a material represented by In3SnO5(ZnO)n (n>0, where n is an integer) may be used as an oxide semiconductor. - For example, an In—Ga—Zn-based oxide with an atomic ratio of In:Ga:Zn=1:1:1 (=1/3:1/3:1/3) or In:Ga:Zn=2:2:1 (=2/5:2/5:1/5), or an oxide with an atomic ratio close to the above atomic ratios can be used. Alternatively, an In—Sn—Zn-based oxide with an atomic ratio of In:Sn:Zn=1:1:1 (=1/3:1/3:1/3), In:Sn:Zn=2:1:3 (=1/3:1/6:1/2), or In:Sn:Zn=2:1:5 (=1/4:1/8:5/8), or an oxide with an atomic ratio close to the above atomic ratios may be used.
- However, the composition is not limited to those described above, and a material having an appropriate composition may be used in accordance with necessary semiconductor characteristics (such as mobility, threshold voltage, and variation). In order to obtain necessary semiconductor characteristics, it is preferable that the carrier density, the impurity concentration, the defect density, the atomic ratio of a metal element to oxygen, the interatomic distance, the density, and the like be set as appropriate.
- For example, with the In—Sn—Zn-based oxide, a high mobility can be relatively easily obtained. However, the mobility can be increased by reducing the defect density in the bulk also in the case of using the In—Ga—Zn-based oxide.
- Note that for example, the expression “the composition of an oxide including In, Ga, and Zn at the atomic ratio, In:Ga:Zn=a:b:c (a+b+c=1), is in the neighborhood of the composition of an oxide including In, Ga, and Zn at the atomic ratio, In:Ga:Zn=A:B:C (A+B+C=1)” means that a, b, and c satisfy the following relation: (a−A)2+(b−B)2+(c−C)2≦r2, and r may be 0.05, for example The same applies to other oxides.
- The
oxide semiconductor layer 144 may be either single crystal or non-single-crystal. In the latter case, theoxide semiconductor layer 144 may be either amorphous or polycrystalline. Further, the oxide semiconductor may have either an amorphous structure including a crystalline portion or a non-amorphous structure. - An amorphous oxide semiconductor can have a flat surface with relative ease; therefore, when a transistor is manufactured with the use of the oxide semiconductor, interface scattering can be reduced, and relatively high mobility can be obtained with relative ease.
- In a crystalline oxide semiconductor, defects in the bulk can be further reduced and when a surface flatness is improved, mobility higher than that of an amorphous oxide semiconductor can be obtained. In order to improve the surface flatness, the oxide semiconductor is preferably formed over a flat surface. Specifically, the oxide semiconductor is preferably formed over a surface with an average surface roughness (Ra) of less than or equal to 1 nm, preferably less than or equal to 0.3 nm, more preferably less than or equal to 0.1 nm.
- Note that Ra is obtained by three-dimensionally expanding centerline average roughness that is defined by JIS B 0601 so as to be able to be applied to a surface. Ra can be expressed as an “average value of the absolute values of deviations from a reference surface to a specific surface” and is defined by the following formula.
-
- Note that, in the above formula, S0 represents the area of a measurement surface (a rectangular region which is defined by four points represented by the coordinates (x1,y1), (x1,y2), (x2,y1), and (x2,y2)), and Z0 represents average height of a measurement surface. Ra can be measured using an atomic force microscope (AFM).
- The thickness of the
oxide semiconductor layer 144 is preferably greater than or equal to 3 nm and less than or equal to 30 nm This is because the transistor might be normally on when the oxide semiconductor layer is too thick (e.g., when the thickness is greater than or equal to 50 nm). - The
oxide semiconductor layer 144 is preferably formed by a method in which impurities such as hydrogen, water, a hydroxyl group, or hydride do not enter theoxide semiconductor layer 144. For example, the oxide semiconductor layer can be formed by a sputtering method or the like. - In this embodiment, the
oxide semiconductor layer 144 is formed by a sputtering method with the use of an In—Ga—Zn—O-based oxide target. - As an In—Ga—Zn—O-based oxide target, for example, an oxide target having a composition ratio of In2O3:Ga2O3:ZnO=1:1:1 [molar ratio] can be used. Note that it is not necessary to limit the material and the composition ratio of the target to the above. For example, an oxide target having a composition ratio of In2O3:Ga2O3:ZnO=1:1:2 [molar ratio] can be used.
- Further, in the case where an In—Sn—Zn-based oxide which is referred to as ITZO is formed, a target which has an atomic ratio of In:Sn:Zn of 1:2:2, 2:1:3, 1:1:1, 20:45:35, or the like is used.
- The filling rate of the oxide target is greater than or equal to 90% and less than or equal to 100%, preferably greater than or equal to 95% and less than or equal to 99.9%. This is because, with the use of the metal oxide target with a high filling rate, a dense oxide semiconductor layer can be formed.
- A film formation atmosphere may be a rare gas (typically, argon) atmosphere, an oxygen atmosphere, or a mixed atmosphere containing a rare gas and oxygen. An atmosphere of a high-purity gas from which impurities such as hydrogen, water, a hydroxyl group, or hydride are sufficiently removed is preferable, in order to prevent hydrogen, water, a hydroxyl group, hydride, or the like from entering the oxide semiconductor layer.
- For example, the
oxide semiconductor layer 144 can be formed as follows. - First, the substrate is held in a film formation chamber which is kept under reduced pressure, and is then heated so that the substrate temperature reaches a temperature higher than 200° C. and lower than or equal to 500° C., preferably higher than 300° C. and lower than or equal to 500° C., more preferably higher than or equal to 350° C. and lower than or equal to 450° C.
- Then, a high-purity gas from which impurities such as hydrogen, water, a hydroxyl group, or hydride are sufficiently removed is introduced into the film formation chamber from which remaining moisture is being removed, and the oxide semiconductor layer is formed over the substrate with the use of the target. To remove moisture remaining in the film formation chamber, an entrapment vacuum pump such as a cryopump, an ion pump, or a titanium sublimation pump is desirably used as an evacuation unit. Further, an evacuation unit may be a turbo pump provided with a cold trap. In the film formation chamber which is evacuated with a cryopump, for example, impurities such as hydrogen, water, a hydroxyl group, or hydride (preferably, also a compound containing a carbon atom) are removed, whereby the concentration of impurities such as hydrogen, water, a hydroxyl group, or hydride in the oxide semiconductor layer formed in the film formation chamber can be reduced.
- In the case where the substrate temperature is low (for example, lower than or equal to 100° C.) during film formation, a substance containing a hydrogen atom might enter the oxide semiconductor; thus, it is preferable that the substrate be heated at a temperature in the above range. When the oxide semiconductor layer is formed with the substrate heated at the temperature described above, since the substrate temperature is high, hydrogen bonds are cut by heat and a substance containing a hydrogen atom is less likely to be taken into the oxide semiconductor layer. Therefore, when the oxide semiconductor layer is formed with the substrate heated at the temperature described above, the concentration of impurities such as hydrogen, water, a hydroxyl group, or hydride in the oxide semiconductor layer can be sufficiently reduced. Moreover, damage due to sputtering can be reduced.
- As an example of film formation conditions, the following conditions are employed: the distance between the substrate and the target is 60 mm; the pressure is 0.4 Pa; the direct-current (DC) power is 0.5 kW; the substrate temperature is 400° C.; and the film formation atmosphere is an oxygen atmosphere (the proportion of the oxygen flow rate is 100%). Note that a pulse direct-current power source is preferable because powder substances (also referred to as particles or dust) generated in film formation can be reduced and the film thickness can be uniform.
- Note that before the oxide semiconductor layer is formed by a sputtering method, powder substances (also referred to as particles or dust) attached to a formation surface of the oxide semiconductor layer are preferably removed by reverse sputtering in which an argon gas is introduced and plasma is generated. The reverse sputtering refers to a method in which voltage is applied to a substrate to generate plasma in the vicinity of the substrate to modify a surface on the substrate side. Note that instead of argon, a gas of nitrogen, helium, oxygen, or the like may be used.
- The
oxide semiconductor layer 144 is formed by processing an oxide semiconductor layer. The oxide semiconductor layer can be processed by forming a mask having a desired shape over the oxide semiconductor layer and by etching the oxide semiconductor layer. The mask may be formed by a method such as photolithography. Alternatively, a method such as an inkjet method may be used to form the mask. For the etching of the oxide semiconductor layer, either dry etching or wet etching may be employed. It is needless to say that both of them may be employed in combination. - After that, heat treatment (first heat treatment) may be performed on the
oxide semiconductor layer 144. The heat treatment can further remove the substance containing a hydrogen atom from theoxide semiconductor layer 144. The heat treatment is performed in an inert gas atmosphere at a temperature higher than or equal to 250° C. and lower than or equal to 700° C., preferably higher than or equal to 450° C. and lower than or equal to 600° C., or lower than a strain point of the substrate. The inert gas atmosphere is preferably an atmosphere which contains nitrogen or a rare gas (e.g., helium, neon, or argon) as its main component and does not contain water, hydrogen, or the like. For example, the purity of nitrogen or a rare gas such as helium, neon, or argon introduced into a heat treatment apparatus is set to 6N (99.9999%) or more, preferably 7N (99.99999%) or more (i.e., the impurity concentration is 1 ppm or less, preferably 0.1 ppm or less). - For example, after an object to be processed is introduced into an electric furnace including a resistance heater or the like, the heat treatment can be performed at 450° C. for one hour in a nitrogen atmosphere. The
oxide semiconductor layer 144 is not exposed to the air during the heat treatment so that entry of water or hydrogen can be prevented. - Impurities are reduced by the heat treatment, so that a transistor with extremely excellent characteristics can be realized.
- Note that the
oxide semiconductor layer 144 may exhibit slight (weak) p-type conductivity by adding an impurity imparting p-type conductivity such as tin (Sn) to theoxide semiconductor layer 144. Theoxide semiconductor layer 144 which exhibits weak p-type conductivity can be obtained by adding a small amount of an impurity for controlling valence electrons to theoxide semiconductor layer 144 which is purified as described above. Thus, the threshold voltage of thetransistor 162 can be slightly shifted toward the positive side. Accordingly, thetransistor 162 is prevented from becoming normally on and off-state current can be further reduced. - The above heat treatment can also be referred to as dehydration treatment, dehydrogenation treatment, or the like because it has the effect of removing hydrogen, water, or the like. The heat treatment can be performed, for example, before the oxide semiconductor layer is processed into an island shape or after the gate insulating film is formed. Such dehydration treatment or dehydrogenation treatment may be conducted once or plural times.
- Next, the
electrodes oxide semiconductor layer 144 and the like and by processing the conductive layer (seeFIG. 13B ). - The conductive layer can be formed by a PVD method or a CVD method. As a material of the conductive layer, an element selected from aluminum, chromium, copper, tantalum, titanium, molybdenum, and tungsten, an alloy including any of these elements as a component, or the like can be used. A material including one of manganese, magnesium, zirconium, beryllium, neodymium, and scandium or a combination of a plurality of these elements may be used.
- The conductive layer may have a single-layer structure or a stacked-layer structure including two or more layers. For example, the conductive layer may have a single-layer structure of a titanium film or a titanium nitride film, a single-layer structure of an aluminum film including silicon, a two-layer structure in which a titanium film is stacked over an aluminum film, a two-layer structure in which a titanium film is stacked over a titanium nitride film, a three-layer structure in which a titanium film, an aluminum film, and a titanium film are stacked in this order, or the like. Note that in the case where the conductive layer has a single-layer structure of a titanium film or a titanium nitride film, there is an advantage that the conductive layer can be easily processed into the
electrodes - The conductive layer may be formed using a conductive metal oxide. As the conductive metal oxide, indium oxide (In2O3), tin oxide (SnO2), zinc oxide (ZnO), indium oxide-tin oxide alloy (In2O3—SnO2, which is abbreviated to ITO in some cases), indium oxide-zinc oxide alloy (In2O3—ZnO), or any of these metal oxide materials including silicon or silicon oxide can be used.
- The conductive layer is preferably etched such that the
electrodes electrodes electrodes gate insulating layer 146 which is formed later can be improved and disconnection of thegate insulating layer 146 can be prevented. - The channel length (L) of the transistor in the upper portion is determined by a distance between lower edge portions of the
electrode 142 a and theelectrode 142 b. Note that for light exposure for forming a mask in the case of manufacturing a transistor with a channel length (L) of less than 25 nm, light exposure is preferably performed with extreme ultraviolet rays whose wavelength is several nanometers to several tens of nanometers, which is extremely short. The resolution of light exposure with extreme ultraviolet rays is high and the focal depth is large. For these reasons, the channel length (L) of the transistor to be formed later can be set in the range of 10 nm to 1000 nm (1 μm), and the circuit can operate at higher speed. In addition, power consumption of the memory device can be reduced by miniaturization. - Next, the
gate insulating layer 146 is formed so as to cover theelectrodes FIG. 13C ). - The
gate insulating layer 146 can be formed by a CVD method, a sputtering method, or the like. Thegate insulating layer 146 is preferably formed so as to contain silicon oxide, silicon nitride, silicon oxynitride, gallium oxide, aluminum oxide, tantalum oxide, hafnium oxide, yttrium oxide, hafnium silicate (HfSixOy (x>0, y>0)), hafnium silicate (HfSixOy (x>0, y>0)) to which nitrogen is added, hafnium aluminate (HfAlxOy (x>0, y>0)) to which nitrogen is added, or the like. Thegate insulating layer 146 may have a single-layer structure or a stacked-layer structure in which these materials are combined. There is no particular limitation on the thickness of thegate insulating layer 146; the thickness is preferably small in order to ensure the operation of the transistor when the memory device is miniaturized. For example, in the case of using silicon oxide, the thickness can be in the range of 1 nm to 100 nm, preferably 10 nm to 50 nm. - When the gate insulating layer is thin as described above, gate leakage due to a tunneling effect or the like becomes a problem. In order to solve the problem of gate leakage, the
gate insulating layer 146 may be formed using a high dielectric constant (high-k) material such as hafnium oxide, tantalum oxide, yttrium oxide, hafnium silicate (HfSixOy (x>0, y>0)), hafnium silicate (HfSixOy (x>0, y>0)) to which nitrogen is added, hafnium aluminate (HfAlxOy (x>0, y>0)) to which nitrogen is added. The use of a high-k material for thegate insulating layer 146 makes it possible to increase the thickness in order to suppress gate leakage as well as ensuring electrical properties. Note that a stacked-layer structure of a film including a high-k material and a film including any of silicon oxide, silicon nitride, silicon oxynitride, silicon nitride oxide, aluminum oxide, and the like may also be employed. - Further, the insulating layer in contact with the oxide semiconductor layer 144 (in this embodiment, the insulating
layer 140 and the gate insulating layer 146) may be formed using an insulating material containing aGroup 13 element and oxygen. Many oxide semiconductor materials contain aGroup 13 element, and thus, an insulating material containing aGroup 13 element works well with the oxide semiconductor. By using such an insulating material for the insulating layer in contact with the oxide semiconductor, an interface with the oxide semiconductor layer can be kept in a favorable state. - Here, an insulating material containing a
Group 13 element refers to an insulating material containing one ormore Group 13 elements. As an example of the insulating material containing aGroup 13 element, gallium oxide, aluminum oxide, aluminum gallium oxide, gallium aluminum oxide, or the like can be given. Here, aluminum gallium oxide refers to a material in which the amount of aluminum is larger than that of gallium in atomic percent, and gallium aluminum oxide refers to a material in which the amount of gallium is larger than or equal to that of aluminum in atomic percent. - For example, in the case of forming a gate insulating layer in contact with an oxide semiconductor layer containing gallium, a material containing gallium oxide may be used for a gate insulating layer, so that favorable characteristics can be kept at the interface between the oxide semiconductor layer and the gate insulating layer. When the oxide semiconductor layer and the insulating layer containing gallium oxide are provided in contact with each other, pile-up of hydrogen at the interface between the oxide semiconductor layer and the insulating layer can be suppressed, for example Note that a similar effect can be obtained in the case where an element belonging to the same group as a constituent element of the oxide semiconductor is used for an insulating layer. For example, it is effective to form an insulating layer with the use of a material containing aluminum oxide. Note that aluminum oxide has a property of not easily transmitting water. Thus, it is preferable to use a material containing aluminum oxide in terms of preventing entry of water into the oxide semiconductor layer.
- The insulating material of the insulating layer in contact with the
oxide semiconductor layer 144 is preferably made to contain oxygen in a proportion higher than that in the stoichiometric proportion by heat treatment in an oxygen atmosphere or by oxygen doping. “Oxygen doping” refers to adding oxygen into a bulk. Note that the term “bulk” is used in order to clarify that oxygen is added not only to a surface of a thin film but also to the inside of the thin film In addition, “oxygen doping” includes oxygen plasma doping in which oxygen plasma is added to a bulk. The oxygen doping may be performed by an ion implantation method or an ion doping method. - For example, in the case where the insulating layer in contact with the
oxide semiconductor layer 144 is formed using gallium oxide, the composition of gallium oxide can be set to be Ga2Ox (x=3+α, 0<α<1) by heat treatment in an oxygen atmosphere or by oxygen doping. In the case where the insulating layer in contact with theoxide semiconductor layer 144 is formed using aluminum oxide, the composition of aluminum oxide can be set to be Al2Ox (x=3+α, 0<α<1) by heat treatment in an oxygen atmosphere or by oxygen doping. In the case where the insulating layer in contact with theoxide semiconductor layer 144 is formed using gallium aluminum oxide (aluminum gallium oxide), the composition of gallium aluminum oxide (aluminum gallium oxide) can be set to be GaxAl2−x,O3+α (0<x<2, 0<α<1) by heat treatment in an oxygen atmosphere or by oxygen doping. - By oxygen doping or the like, an insulating layer which has a region where the proportion of oxygen is higher than that in the stoichiometric proportion can be formed. When the insulating layer having such a region is in contact with the oxide semiconductor layer, excess oxygen in the insulating layer is supplied to the oxide semiconductor layer, and oxygen deficiency in the oxide semiconductor layer or at an interface between the oxide semiconductor layer and the insulating layer can be reduced. Thus, the oxide semiconductor layer can be an i-type or substantially i-type oxide semiconductor.
- Note that the insulating layer having a region where the proportion of oxygen is higher than that in the stoichiometric proportion may be applied to the insulating
layer 140 serving as a base film for theoxide semiconductor layer 144 instead of thegate insulating layer 146, or may be applied to both thegate insulating layer 146 and thebase insulating layer 140. - After the
gate insulating layer 146 is formed, second heat treatment is preferably performed in an inert gas atmosphere or an oxygen atmosphere. The temperature of the heat treatment is set in the range of 200° C. to 450° C., preferably 250° C. to 350° C. For example, the heat treatment may be performed at 250° C. for one hour in a nitrogen atmosphere. By the second heat treatment, variation in electrical characteristics of the transistor can be reduced. Further, in the case where thegate insulating layer 146 includes oxygen, oxygen can be supplied to theoxide semiconductor layer 144 to cover oxygen deficiency in theoxide semiconductor layer 144, so that an i-type (intrinsic semiconductor) or substantially i-type oxide semiconductor layer can also be formed. - Note that the second heat treatment is performed in this embodiment after the
gate insulating layer 146 is formed; there is no limitation on the timing of the second heat treatment. For example, the second heat treatment may be performed after the gate electrode is formed. Alternatively, the first heat treatment and the second heat treatment may be performed in succession, the first heat treatment may also serve as the second heat treatment, or the second heat treatment may also serve as the first heat treatment. - By performing at least one of the first heat treatment and the second heat treatment as described above, the
oxide semiconductor layer 144 can be purified so as to contain a substance including a hydrogen atom as little as possible. - Next, a conductive layer for forming a gate electrode (including a wiring formed using the same layer as the gate electrode) is formed and is processed, so that the
electrode 148 a and theconductive layer 148 b are formed (seeFIG. 13D ). - The
electrode 148 a and theconductive layer 148 b can be formed using a metal material such as molybdenum, titanium, tantalum, tungsten, aluminum, copper, neodymium, or scandium, or an alloy material containing any of these materials as its main component. Note that theelectrode 148 a and theconductive layer 148 b may have a single-layer structure or a stacked-layer structure. - Then, the insulating
layer 150 is formed over thegate insulating layer 146, theelectrode 148 a, and theconductive layer 148 b (seeFIG. 13E ). The insulatinglayer 150 can be formed by a PVD method, a CVD method, or the like. The insulatinglayer 150 can be formed using a material including an inorganic insulating material such as silicon oxide, silicon oxynitride, silicon nitride, hafnium oxide, gallium oxide, or aluminum oxide. Note that the insulatinglayer 150 is preferably formed using a low dielectric constant material or a low dielectric constant structure (such as a porous structure). This is because when the insulatinglayer 150 has a low dielectric constant, capacitance generated between wirings, electrodes, or the like can be reduced and operation at higher speed can be achieved. Note that although the insulatinglayer 150 has a single-layer structure in this embodiment, an embodiment of the disclosed invention is not limited to this example The insulatinglayer 150 may have a stacked-layer structure including two or more layers. - Next, the insulating
layer 152 is formed over the insulating layer 150 (seeFIG. 13E ). The feature of an embodiment of the present invention is that a plurality of memory cells is stacked. Therefore, it is desirable that the surface of the insulatinglayer 152 be planarized by CMP or the like. - Next, an opening reaching the
electrode 142 a is formed in thegate insulating layer 146, the insulatinglayer 150, and the insulatinglayer 152. Anelectrode 154 a is formed in the opening. Then, thewiring 156 in contact with theelectrode 154 a is formed over the insulating layer 152 (seeFIG. 13E ). The opening is formed by selective etching with a mask or the like. - The
wiring 156 is formed by forming a conductive layer by a PVD method or a CVD method and then by patterning the conductive layer. As a material of the conductive layer, an element selected from aluminum, chromium, copper, tantalum, titanium, molybdenum, and tungsten, an alloy including any of these elements as a component, or the like can be used. A material including one of manganese, magnesium, zirconium, beryllium, neodymium, and scandium or a combination of a plurality of these elements may be used. - Specifically, the
electrode 154 a can be formed in such a manner that a thin titanium film (about 5 nm) is formed in a region including the opening of the insulatinglayer 150 and the insulatinglayer 152 by a PVD method and then an aluminum film is formed so as to be embedded in the opening, for example Here, the titanium film formed by a PVD method functions to reduce an oxide film (e.g., a natural oxide film) formed on a surface where the titanium film is formed, and to decrease the contact resistance with a lower electrode or the like (here, theelectrode 142 a). In addition, hillock of the aluminum film can be prevented. A copper film may be formed by a plating method after the formation of a barrier film of titanium, titanium nitride, or the like. - Through the above process, the
transistor 162 including the purifiedoxide semiconductor layer 144 and thecapacitor 164 are completed (seeFIG. 13E ). - Here, in a structure in which a memory cell is stacked over the memory cell illustrated in
FIG. 13E , the insulatinglayer 140 is formed so as to cover thewiring 156. Then, an opening is formed in the insulatinglayer 140, and theelectrode 500 inFIG. 9A or theelectrode 553 inFIG. 16A is formed. After that, by repeating the manufacturing method illustrated inFIGS. 13A to 13E , a structure in which a plurality of memory cells is stacked can be realized. - The insulating
layer 140 can be formed by a PVD method, a CVD method, or the like. The insulatinglayer 140 can be formed so as to have a single-layer structure or a stacked-layer structure using a material including an inorganic insulating material such as silicon oxide, silicon oxynitride, silicon nitride, hafnium oxide, gallium oxide, or aluminum oxide or a material including an organic material such as polyimide or acrylic. - Note that the
electrode 501 a and theelectrode 501 b illustrated inFIG. 9A can be manufactured in a manner similar to that of theelectrode 142 a and theelectrode 142 b. Theelectrode 502 a and theelectrode 502 b illustrated inFIG. 9A can be manufactured in a manner similar to that of theelectrode 154 a. - Note that the
electrode 552 illustrated inFIG. 16A can be manufactured in a manner similar to that of thewiring 156. Theelectrode 551 illustrated inFIG. 16A can be manufactured in a manner similar to that of theelectrode 154 a. - Note that in the case of forming the
transistor 162 and thecapacitor 164 illustrated inFIG. 12A , theelectrodes layer 140, and theoxide semiconductor layer 144 is formed over the insulatinglayer 140 and theelectrodes gate insulating layer 146 is formed over theelectrodes oxide semiconductor layer 144. After that, over thegate insulating layer 146, thegate electrode 148 a is formed so as to overlap with theoxide semiconductor layer 144, and theconductive layer 148 b is formed so as to overlap with theelectrode 142 b. - In the case of forming the
transistor 162 and thecapacitor 164 illustrated inFIG. 12B , theelectrode 148 a and theconductive layer 148 b are formed over the insulatinglayer 140, and thegate insulating layer 146 is formed over the insulatinglayer 140, theelectrode 148 a, and theconductive layer 148 b. Then, theelectrodes gate insulating layer 146. After that, theoxide semiconductor layer 144 is formed over thegate insulating layer 146 so as to overlap with theelectrode 148 a; thus, thetransistor 162 and thecapacitor 164 are completed. Note that the insulatinglayer 150 and the insulatinglayer 151 may be formed so as to cover thetransistor 162 and thecapacitor 164. For example, the insulatinglayer 150 preferably contains oxygen in a proportion higher than that in the stoichiometric proportion by heat treatment in an oxygen atmosphere or by oxygen doping, and the insulatinglayer 151 preferably hardly allows water or hydrogen to pass through. This is because when the insulatinglayer 151 hardly allows water or hydrogen to pass through, it is possible to prevent water or hydrogen from entering theoxide semiconductor layer 144, and when the insulatinglayer 150 contains oxygen in a proportion higher than that in the stoichiometric proportion, it is possible to form theoxide semiconductor layer 144 which is i-type or substantially i-type by filling oxygen vacancies in theoxide semiconductor layer 144. - In the case of forming the
transistor 162 and thecapacitor 164 illustrated inFIG. 12C , theelectrode 148 a and theconductive layer 148 b are formed over the insulatinglayer 140, and thegate insulating layer 146 is formed over the insulatinglayer 140, theelectrode 148 a, and theconductive layer 148 b. Then, theoxide semiconductor layer 144 is formed over thegate insulating layer 146 so as to overlap with theelectrode 148 a. After that, theelectrodes oxide semiconductor layer 144; thus, thetransistor 162 and thecapacitor 164 are completed. Note that the description ofFIG. 12B can be referred to for the insulatinglayer 150 and the insulatinglayer 151. - In the case of forming the
transistor 162 and thecapacitor 164 illustrated inFIG. 12D , theelectrode 148 a and theconductive layer 148 b are formed over the insulatinglayer 140, and the gate insulating layer 146 (inFIG. 12D , the first gate insulating layer) is formed over the insulatinglayer 140, theelectrode 148 a (inFIG. 12D , the first gate electrode), and the electrode layer 148. Then, theoxide semiconductor layer 144 is formed over thegate insulating layer 146 so as to overlap with theelectrode 148 a, and theelectrodes oxide semiconductor layer 144. After that, the insulating layer 150 (inFIG. 12D , the second gate insulating layer) is formed over theoxide semiconductor layer 144 and theelectrodes FIG. 12D , the second gate electrode) is formed so as to overlap with theoxide semiconductor layer 144. Thus, thetransistor 162 and thecapacitor 164 are completed. Note that the description of the material and the manufacturing method of theelectrode 148 a can be referred to for the material and the manufacturing method of theconductive layer 159. - Next, methods for manufacturing the
transistors 162 and thecapacitors 164 illustrated inFIGS. 11A and 11B will be described. - A method for manufacturing the
transistor 162 and thecapacitor 164 illustrated inFIG. 11A will be described. - First, the
oxide semiconductor layer 144 is formed over the insulatinglayer 140, and an oxide conductive layer and a conductive layer are stacked over the insulatinglayer 140 and theoxide semiconductor layer 144. - As a method for forming the oxide conductive layer, a sputtering method, a vacuum evaporation method (an electron beam evaporation method or the like), an arc discharge ion plating method, or a spray method is used. As a material of the oxide conductive layer, zinc oxide, zinc aluminum oxide, zinc aluminum oxynitride, zinc gallium oxide, indium tin oxide, or the like can be used. In addition, any of the above materials may contain silicon oxide. Note that the description of the conductive layer used for forming the
electrodes - Next, the
electrodes conductive layers - Note that when etching treatment for the conductive layer and the oxide conductive layer is performed, etching conditions (e.g., type of an etching agent, the concentration of an etching agent, and etching time) are adjusted as appropriate in order to prevent excessive etching of the oxide semiconductor layer.
- Next, the
gate insulating layer 146 is formed over theelectrodes oxide semiconductor layer 144. After that, over thegate insulating layer 146, theelectrode 148 a is formed so as to overlap with theoxide semiconductor layer 144, and theconductive layer 148 b is formed so as to overlap with theelectrode 142 b. - Through the above steps, the
transistor 162 and thecapacitor 164 are completed (seeFIG. 11A ). - In the case of manufacturing the
transistor 162 and thecapacitor 164 illustrated inFIG. 11B , an oxide semiconductor layer and an oxide conductive layer are stacked and are processed in one photolithography step, so that an island-shaped oxide semiconductor layer and an island-shaped oxide conductive layer are formed. Next, the oxideconductive layers electrodes electrodes - Next, the
gate insulating layer 146 is formed over theelectrodes oxide semiconductor layer 144. After that, over thegate insulating layer 146, theelectrode 148 a is formed so as to overlap with theoxide semiconductor layer 144, and theconductive layer 148 b is formed so as to overlap with theelectrode 142 b. - Through the above steps, the
transistor 162 and thecapacitor 164 are completed (seeFIG. 11B ). - In each of the
transistors 162 described in this embodiment, theoxide semiconductor layer 144 is purified and thus contains hydrogen at a concentration of 5×1019 atoms/cm3 or less, preferably 5×1018 atoms/cm3 or less, more preferably 5×1017 atoms/cm3 or less. In addition, the carrier density of theoxide semiconductor layer 144 is, for example, less than 1×1012/cm3, preferably less than 1.45×1010/cm3, which is sufficiently lower than the carrier density of a general silicon wafer (approximately 1×1014/cm3). In addition, the off-state current of thetransistor 162 is sufficiently small. For example, the off-state current (per unit channel width (1 μm), here) of thetransistor 162 at room temperature (25° C.) is 100 zA (1 zA (zeptoampere) is 1×10−21 A) or less, preferably 10 zA or less. - The concentration of an alkali metal or an alkaline earth metal is sufficiently decreased in the
oxide semiconductor layer 144. The concentration of an alkali metal or an alkaline earth metal is decreased to such a degree that, for example, the concentrations of Na is 5×1016 cm−3 or less, preferably 1×1016 cm−3 or less, more preferably 1×1015 cm−3 or less, the concentration of Li is 5×1015 cm−3 or less, preferably 1×1015 cm−3 or less, and the concentration of K is 5×1015 cm−3 or less, preferably 1×1015 cm−3 or less. - In this manner, by using the
oxide semiconductor layer 144 which is purified and is intrinsic, it becomes easy to sufficiently reduce the off-state current of thetransistor 162. With the use of such atransistor 162 as described above, a memory device in which stored data can be held for an extremely long time can be provided. - The configurations, methods, and the like described in this embodiment can be combined as appropriate with any of the configurations, methods, and the like described in the other embodiments.
- One embodiment of an oxide semiconductor layer which can be used for a channel formation region of the
transistor 162 in the above embodiments will be described with reference toFIGS. 14A to 14D . - The oxide semiconductor layer of this embodiment has a stacked structure including a first crystalline oxide semiconductor layer and a second crystalline oxide semiconductor layer which is over the first crystalline oxide semiconductor layer and has a larger thickness than the first crystalline oxide semiconductor layer.
- A first oxide semiconductor film with a thickness greater than or equal to 1 nm and less than or equal to 10 nm is formed over an insulating
layer 140. - In this embodiment, an oxide insulating layer with a thickness greater than or equal to 50 nm and less than or equal to 600 nm is formed as the insulating
layer 140 by a PCVD method or a sputtering method. For example, a single layer selected from a silicon oxide film, a gallium oxide film, an aluminum oxide film, a silicon oxynitride film, an aluminum oxynitride film, and a silicon nitride oxide film or a stack of any of these films can be used. - The first oxide semiconductor film is formed by a sputtering method, and the substrate temperature in the film formation by a sputtering method is set to be higher than or equal to 200° C. and lower than or equal to 400° C. In this embodiment, the first oxide semiconductor film is formed to a thickness of 5 nm in an oxygen atmosphere, an argon atmosphere, or an atmosphere including argon and oxygen under conditions where a target for an oxide semiconductor (a target for an In—Ga—Zn—O-based oxide semiconductor (In2O3:Ga2O3:ZnO=1:1:2 [molar ratio])) is used, the distance between the substrate and the target is 170 mm, the substrate temperature is 250° C., the pressure is 0.4 Pa, and the direct-current (DC) power is 0.5 kW.
- Next, first heat treatment is performed under a condition where the atmosphere of a chamber in which the substrate is set is an atmosphere of nitrogen or dry air. The temperature of the first heat treatment is higher than or equal to 400° C. and lower than or equal to 750° C. Through the first heat treatment, a first crystalline
oxide semiconductor layer 145 a is formed (seeFIG. 14A ). - Although it depends on the temperature of the first heat treatment, the first heat treatment causes crystallization from a film surface and crystal grows from the film surface toward the inside of the film; thus, c-axis aligned crystals are obtained. By the first heat treatment, a large amount of zinc and oxygen gather about the film surface, and one or more layers of graphene-type two-dimensional crystal including zinc and oxygen and having a hexagonal upper plane are formed at the outermost surface; the one or more layers at the outermost surface grow in the thickness direction to form a stack of layers. By increasing the temperature of the heat treatment, crystal growth proceeds from the surface to the inside and further from the inside to the bottom.
- By the first heat treatment, oxygen in the insulating
layer 140 that is an oxide insulating layer is diffused to an interface between the insulatinglayer 140 and the first crystallineoxide semiconductor layer 145 a or the vicinity of the interface (within ±5 nm from the interface), whereby oxygen deficiencies in the first crystalline oxide semiconductor layer are reduced. Therefore, it is preferable that oxygen be included in (a bulk of) the insulatinglayer 140 used as a base insulating layer for the first crystalline oxide semiconductor layer or at the interface between the first crystallineoxide semiconductor layer 145 a and the insulatinglayer 140 at an amount that exceeds at least the stoichiometric proportion. - Next, a second oxide semiconductor film with a thickness more than 10 nm is formed over the first crystalline
oxide semiconductor layer 145 a. The second oxide semiconductor film is formed by a sputtering method, and the substrate temperature in the film formation is set to be higher than or equal to 200° C. and lower than or equal to 400° C. By setting the substrate temperature in the film formation to be higher than or equal to 200° C. and lower than or equal to 400° C., precursors can be arranged in the oxide semiconductor film formed above and in contact with the surface of the first crystalline oxide semiconductor layer, and so-called orderliness can be obtained. - In this embodiment, the second oxide semiconductor film is formed to a thickness of 25 nm in an oxygen atmosphere, an argon atmosphere, or an atmosphere including argon and oxygen under conditions where a target for an oxide semiconductor (a target for an In—Ga—Zn—O-based oxide semiconductor (In2O3:Ga2O3:ZnO=1:1:2 [molar ratio])) is used, the distance between the substrate and the target is 170 mm, the substrate temperature is 400° C., the pressure is 0.4 Pa, and the direct-current (DC) power is 0.5 kW.
- Next, second heat treatment is performed under a condition where the atmosphere of a chamber in which the substrate is set is an atmosphere of nitrogen or dry air. The temperature of the second heat treatment is higher than or equal to 400° C. and lower than or equal to 750° C. Through the second heat treatment, a second crystalline
oxide semiconductor layer 145 b is formed (seeFIG. 14B ). The second heat treatment is performed in a nitrogen atmosphere, an oxygen atmosphere, or a mixed atmosphere of nitrogen and oxygen, whereby the density of the second crystalline oxide semiconductor layer is increased and the number of defects therein is reduced. By the second heat treatment, crystal growth proceeds with the use of the first crystallineoxide semiconductor layer 145 a as a nucleus, in the thickness direction, that is, from the bottom to the inside; thus, the second crystallineoxide semiconductor layer 145 b is formed. - It is preferable that steps from the formation of the insulating
layer 140 to the second heat treatment be successively performed without exposure to the air. The steps from the formation of the insulatinglayer 140 to the second heat treatment are preferably performed in an atmosphere which is controlled to include little hydrogen and moisture (such as an inert gas atmosphere, a reduced-pressure atmosphere, or a dry-air atmosphere); in terms of moisture, for example, a dry nitrogen atmosphere with a dew point of −40° C. or lower, preferably a dew point of −50° C. or lower may be employed. - Next, the stack of the oxide semiconductor layers including the first crystalline
oxide semiconductor layer 145 a and the second crystallineoxide semiconductor layer 145 b is processed into anoxide semiconductor layer 145 including a stack of island-shaped oxide semiconductor layers (seeFIG. 14C ). InFIG. 14C , the interface between the first crystallineoxide semiconductor layer 145 a and the second crystallineoxide semiconductor layer 145 b is indicated by a dotted line, and the stacked structure of the first crystalline oxide semiconductor layer and the second crystalline oxide semiconductor layer is illustrated; however, the interface is actually not distinct and is illustrated for easy understanding. - The stack of the oxide semiconductor layers can be processed by being etched after a mask having a desired shape is formed over the stack of the oxide semiconductor layers. The mask may be formed by a method such as photolithography. Alternatively, a method such as an inkjet method may be used to form the mask.
- For the etching of the stack of oxide semiconductor layers, either wet etching or dry etching may be employed. It is needless to say that both of them may be employed in combination.
- A feature of the first crystalline oxide semiconductor layer and the second crystalline oxide semiconductor layer obtained by the above formation method is that these layers have c-axis alignment. Note that the first crystalline oxide semiconductor layer and the second crystalline oxide semiconductor layer comprise an oxide including a crystal with c-axis alignment (also referred to as c-axis aligned crystal (CAAC)), which has neither a single crystal structure nor an amorphous structure. The first crystalline oxide semiconductor layer and the second crystalline oxide semiconductor layer partly include a crystal grain boundary.
- Here, an oxide including crystals with c-axis alignment (also referred to as c-axis aligned crystal (CAAC)), which has a triangular or hexagonal atomic arrangement when seen from the direction of an a-b plane, a surface, or an interface will be described. In the crystal, metal atoms are arranged in a layered manner, or metal atoms and oxygen atoms are arranged in a layered manner along the c-axis, and the direction of the a-axis or the b-axis is varied in the a-b plane (the crystal rotates around the c-axis).
- In a broad sense, an oxide including CAAC means a non-single crystal oxide including a phase which has a triangular, hexagonal, regular triangular, or regular hexagonal atomic arrangement when seen from the direction perpendicular to the a-b plane and in which metal atoms are arranged in a layered manner or metal atoms and oxygen atoms are arranged in a layered manner when seen from the direction perpendicular to the c-axis direction.
- The CAAC is not a single crystal, but this does not mean that the CAAC is composed of only an amorphous component. Although the CAAC includes a crystallized portion (crystalline portion), a boundary between one crystalline portion and another crystalline portion is not clear in some cases.
- In the case where oxygen is included in the CAAC, nitrogen may be substituted for part of oxygen included in the CAAC. The c-axes of individual crystalline portions included in the CAAC may be aligned in one direction (e.g., a direction perpendicular to a surface of a substrate over which the CAAC is formed or a surface of the CAAC). Alternatively, the normals of the a-b planes of the individual crystalline portions included in the CAAC may be aligned in one direction (e.g., a direction perpendicular to a surface of a substrate over which the CAAC is formed or a surface of the CAAC).
- The CAAC becomes a conductor, a semiconductor, or an insulator depending on its composition or the like. The CAAC transmits or does not transmit visible light depending on its composition or the like.
- As an example of such a CAAC, there is a crystal which is formed into a film shape and has a triangular or hexagonal atomic arrangement when observed from the direction perpendicular to a surface of the film or a surface of a supporting substrate, and in which metal atoms are arranged in a layered manner or metal atoms and oxygen atoms (or nitrogen atoms) are arranged in a layered manner when a cross section of the film is observed.
- An example of a crystal structure of the CAAC will be described in detail with reference to
FIGS. 20A to 20E ,FIGS. 21A to 21C , andFIGS. 22A to 22C . InFIGS. 20A to 20E ,FIGS. 21A to 21C , andFIGS. 22A to 22C , the vertical direction corresponds to the c-axis direction and a plane perpendicular to the c-axis direction corresponds to the a-b plane, unless otherwise specified. When the expressions “an upper half” and “a lower half” are simply used, they refer to an upper half above the a-b plane and a lower half below the a-b plane (an upper half and a lower half with respect to the a-b plane). Furthermore, inFIGS. 20A to 20E , O surrounded by a circle represents tetracoodianate O and O surrounded by a double circle represents tricoodenate O. -
FIG. 20A illustrates a structure including one hexacoordinate In atom and six tetracoordinate oxygen (hereinafter referred to as tetracoordinate O) atoms proximate to the In atom. Here, a structure including one metal atom and oxygen atoms proximate thereto is referred to as a small group. The structure inFIG. 20A is actually an octahedral structure, but is illustrated as a planar structure for simplicity. Note that three tetracoordinate O atoms exist in each of an upper half and a lower half inFIG. 20A . In the small group illustrated inFIG. 20A , electric charge is 0. -
FIG. 20B illustrates a structure including one pentacoordinate Ga atom, three tricoordinate oxygen (hereinafter referred to as tricoordinate O) atoms proximate to the Ga atom, and two tetracoordinate O atoms proximate to the Ga atom. All the tricoordinate O atoms exist on the a-b plane. One tetracoordinate O atom exists in each of an upper half and a lower half inFIG. 20B . An In atom can also have the structure illustrated inFIG. 20B because an In atom can have five ligands. In the small group illustrated inFIG. 20B , electric charge is 0. -
FIG. 20C illustrates a structure including one tetracoordinate Zn atom and four tetracoordinate O atoms proximate to the Zn atom. InFIG. 20C , one tetracoordinate O atom exists in an upper half and three tetracoordinate O atoms exist in a lower half. Alternatively, three tetracoordinate O atoms may exist in the upper half and one tetracoordinate O atom may exist in the lower half inFIG. 20C . In the small group illustrated inFIG. 20C , electric charge is 0. -
FIG. 20D illustrates a structure including one hexacoordinate Sn atom and six tetracoordinate O atoms proximate to the Sn atom. InFIG. 20D , three tetracoordinate O atoms exist in each of an upper half and a lower half In the small group illustrated inFIG. 20D , electric charge is +1. -
FIG. 20E illustrates a small group including two Zn atoms. InFIG. 20E , one tetracoordinate O atom exists in each of an upper half and a lower half. In the small group illustrated inFIG. 20E , electric charge is −1. - Here, a plurality of small groups forms a medium group, and a plurality of medium groups forms a large group (also referred to as a unit cell).
- Now, a rule of bonding between the small groups will be described. The three O atoms in the upper half with respect to the hexacoordinate In atom in
FIG. 20A each have three proximate In atoms in the downward direction, and the three O atoms in the lower half each have three proximate In atoms in the upward direction. The one O atom in the upper half with respect to the pentacoordinate Ga atom inFIG. 20B has one proximate Ga atom in the downward direction, and the one O atom in the lower half has one proximate Ga atom in the upward direction. The one O atom in the upper half with respect to the tetracoordinate Zn atom inFIG. 20C has one proximate Zn atom in the downward direction, and the three O atoms in the lower half each have three proximate Zn atoms in the upward direction. In this manner, the number of the tetracoordinate O atoms above the metal atom is equal to the number of the metal atoms proximate to and below each of the tetracoordinate O atoms. Similarly, the number of the tetracoordinate O atoms below the metal atom is equal to the number of the metal atoms proximate to and above each of the tetracoordinate O atoms. Since the coordination number of the tetracoordinate O atom is 4, the sum of the number of the metal atoms proximate to and below the O atom and the number of the metal atoms proximate to and above the O atom is 4. Accordingly, when the sum of the number of tetracoordinate O atoms above a metal atom and the number of tetracoordinate O atoms below another metal atom is 4, the two kinds of small groups including the metal atoms can be bonded. For example, in the case where the hexacoordinate metal (In or Sn) atom is bonded through three tetracoordinate O atoms in the lower half, it is bonded to the pentacoordinate metal (Ga or In) atom or the tetracoordinate metal (Zn) atom. - A metal atom whose coordination number is 4, 5, or 6 is bonded to another metal atom through a tetracoordinate O atom in the c-axis direction. In addition to the above, a medium group can be formed in a different manner by combining a plurality of small groups so that the total electric charge of the layered structure is 0.
-
FIG. 21A illustrates a model of a medium group included in a layered structure of an In—Sn—Zn—O-based material.FIG. 21B illustrates a large group including three medium groups. Note thatFIG. 21C illustrates an atomic arrangement in the case where the layered structure inFIG. 21B is observed from the c-axis direction. - In
FIG. 21A , a tricoordinate O atom is omitted for simplicity, and a tetracoordinate O atom is illustrated by a circle; the number in the circle shows the number of tetracoordinate O atoms. For example, three tetracoordinate O atoms existing in each of an upper half and a lower half with respect to a Sn atom are denoted by circled 3. Similarly, inFIG. 21A , one tetracoordinate O atom existing in each of an upper half and a lower half with respect to an In atom is denoted by circled 1.FIG. 21A also illustrates a Zn atom proximate to one tetracoordinate O atom in a lower half and three tetracoordinate O atoms in an upper half, and a Zn atom proximate to one tetracoordinate O atom in an upper half and three tetracoordinate O atoms in a lower half. - In the medium group included in the layered structure of the In—Sn—Zn—O-based material in
FIG. 21A , in the order starting from the top, a Sn atom proximate to three tetracoordinate O atoms in each of an upper half and a lower half is bonded to an In atom proximate to one tetracoordinate O atom in each of an upper half and a lower half, the In atom is bonded to a Zn atom proximate to three tetracoordinate O atoms in an upper half, the Zn atom is bonded to an In atom proximate to three tetracoordinate O atoms in each of an upper half and a lower half through one tetracoordinate O atom in a lower half with respect to the Zn atom, the In atom is bonded to a small group that includes two Zn atoms and is proximate to one tetracoordinate O atom in an upper half, and the small group is bonded to a Sn atom proximate to three tetracoordinate O atoms in each of an upper half and a lower half through one tetracoordinate O atom in a lower half with respect to the small group. A plurality of such medium groups is bonded, so that a large group is formed. - Here, electric charge for one bond of a tricoordinate O atom and electric charge for one bond of a tetracoordinate O atom can be assumed to be −0.667 and −0.5, respectively. For example, electric charge of a (hexacoordinate or pentacoordinate) In atom, electric charge of a (tetracoordinate) Zn atom, and electric charge of a (pentacoordinate or hexacoordinate) Sn atom are +3, +2, and +4, respectively. Accordingly, electric charge in a small group including a Sn atom is +1. Therefore, electric charge of −1, which cancels +1, is needed to form a layered structure including a Sn atom. As a structure having electric charge of −1, the small group including two Zn atoms as illustrated in
FIG. 20E can be given. For example, with one small group including two Zn atoms, electric charge of one small group including a Sn atom can be cancelled, so that the total electric charge of the layered structure can be 0. - When the large group illustrated in
FIG. 21B is repeated, an In—Sn—Zn—O-based crystal (In2SnZn3O8) can be obtained. Note that a layered structure of the obtained In—Sn—Zn—O-based crystal can be expressed as a composition formula, In2SnZn2O7(ZnO)m (m is 0 or a natural number). - The above-described rule also applies to the following oxides: a four-component metal oxide such as an In—Sn—Ga—Zn-based oxide; a three-component metal oxide such as an In—Ga—Zn-based oxide (also referred to as IGZO), an In—Al—Zn-based oxide, a Sn—Ga—Zn-based oxide, an Al—Ga—Zn-based oxide, a Sn—Al—Zn-based oxide, an In—Hf—Zn-based oxide, an In—La—Zn-based oxide, an In—Ce—Zn-based oxide, an In—Pr—Zn-based oxide, an In—Nd—Zn-based oxide, an In—Sm—Zn-based oxide, an In—Eu—Zn-based oxide, an In—Gd—Zn-based oxide, an In—Tb—Zn-based oxide, an In—Dy—Zn-based oxide, an In—Ho—Zn-based oxide, an In—Er—Zn-based oxide, an In—Tm—Zn-based oxide, an In—Yb—Zn-based oxide, or an In—Lu—Zn-based oxide; a two-component metal oxide such as an In—Zn-based oxide, a Sn—Zn-based oxide, an Al—Zn-based oxide, a Zn—Mg-based oxide, a Sn—Mg-based oxide, an In—Mg-based oxide, or an In—Ga-based oxide; and the like.
- As an example,
FIG. 22A illustrates a model of a medium group included in a layered structure of an In—Ga—Zn—O-based material. - In the medium group included in the layered structure of the In—Ga—Zn—O-based material in
FIG. 22A , in the order starting from the top, an In atom proximate to three tetracoordinate O atoms in each of an upper half and a lower half is bonded to a Zn atom proximate to one tetracoordinate O atom in an upper half, the Zn atom is bonded to a Ga atom proximate to one tetracoordinate O atom in each of an upper half and a lower half through three tetracoordinate O atoms in a lower half with respect to the Zn atom, and the Ga atom is bonded to an In atom proximate to three tetracoordinate O atoms in each of an upper half and a lower half through one tetracoordinate O atom in a lower half with respect to the Ga atom. A plurality of such medium groups is bonded, so that a large group is formed. -
FIG. 22B illustrates a large group including three medium groups. Note thatFIG. 22C illustrates an atomic arrangement in the case where the layered structure inFIG. 22B is observed from the c-axis direction. - Here, since electric charge of a (hexacoordinate or pentacoordinate) In atom, electric charge of a (tetracoordinate) Zn atom, and electric charge of a (pentacoordinate) Ga atom are +3, +2, and +3, respectively, electric charge of a small group including any of an In atom, a Zn atom, and a Ga atom is 0. As a result, the total electric charge of a medium group having a combination of such small groups is always 0.
- In order to form the layered structure of the In—Ga—Zn—O-based material, a large group can be formed using not only the medium group illustrated in
FIG. 22A but also a medium group in which the arrangement of the In atom, the Ga atom, and the Zn atom is different from that inFIG. 22A . - In any case, in order to obtain CAAC, it is important to form hexagonal crystals in an initial stage of deposition of an oxide semiconductor film and to cause crystal growth from the hexagonal crystals as a seed. In order to achieve this, it is preferable that a substrate heating temperature be 100° C. to 500° C., more preferably 200° C. to 400° C., still preferably 250° C. to 300° C. In addition, the deposited oxide semiconductor film is subjected to heat treatment at a temperature higher than the substrate heating temperature in the film formation. Accordingly, microdefects in the film and defects at the interface of stacked layers can be repaired.
- Note that the first and second crystalline oxide semiconductor layers are formed using an oxide material containing at least Zn, for example, a four-component metal oxide such as an In—Al—Ga—Zn—O-based material, or an In—Sn—Ga—Zn—O-based material; a three-component metal oxide such as an In—Ga—Zn—O-based material, an In—Al—Zn—O-based material, an In—Sn—Zn—O-based material, a Sn—Ga—Zn—O-based material, an Al—Ga—Zn—O-based material, or a Sn—Al—Zn—O-based material; a two-component metal oxide such as an In—Zn—O-based material, a Sn—Zn—O-based material, an Al—Zn—O-based material, or a Zn—Mg—O-based material; or a Zn—O-based material. In addition, an In—Si—Ga—Zn—O-based material, an In—Ga—B—Zn—O-based material, or an In—B—Zn—O-based material may be used. In addition, the above materials may contain SiO2. Here, for example, an In—Ga—Zn—O-based material means an oxide material containing indium (In), gallium (Ga), and zinc (Zn), and there is no limitation on the composition ratio thereof. Further, the In—Ga—Zn—O-based material may include an element other than In, Ga, and Zn.
- Without limitation to the two-layer structure in which the second crystalline oxide semiconductor layer is formed over the first crystalline oxide semiconductor layer, a stacked structure including three or more layers may be formed by repeatedly performing a process of film formation and heat treatment for forming a third crystalline oxide semiconductor layer after the second crystalline oxide semiconductor layer is formed.
- After that, the
electrodes gate insulating layer 146, theelectrode 148 a, and theconductive layer 148 b are formed; thus, thetransistor 162 and thecapacitor 164 are completed (seeFIG. 14D ).Embodiment 2 can be referred to for materials and formation methods of theelectrodes gate insulating layer 146, theelectrode 148 a, and theconductive layer 148 b. - The
oxide semiconductor layer 145 including the stack of the oxide semiconductor layers formed by the above formation method can be used as appropriate for thetransistor 162 described inEmbodiment 2. - In the
transistor 162, in which the stack of the oxide semiconductor layers of this embodiment is used as theoxide semiconductor layer 144, an electric field is not applied from one surface to the other surface of the oxide semiconductor layer and current does not flow in the thickness direction of the stack of the oxide semiconductor layers. The transistor has a structure in which current mainly flows along the interface of the stack of the oxide semiconductor layers; therefore, even when thetransistor 162 is irradiated with light or even when a BT stress is applied to thetransistor 162, deterioration of transistor characteristics is suppressed or reduced. - By forming the
transistor 162 with the use of a stack of a first crystalline oxide semiconductor layer and a second crystalline oxide semiconductor layer, like theoxide semiconductor layer 145, the transistor can have stable electrical characteristics and high reliability. - This embodiment can be implemented in an appropriate combination with the structures described in the other embodiments.
- In this embodiment, application of the memory device described in any of the above embodiments to a semiconductor device such as an electronic device will be described with reference to
FIGS. 15A to 15F . In this embodiment, application of the above-described memory device to electronic devices such as a computer, a cellular phone (also referred to as a mobile phone or a mobile phone set), a portable information terminal (including a portable game machine, an audio reproducing device, and the like), a camera such as a digital camera or a digital video camera, electronic paper, and a television set (also referred to as a television or a television receiver) is described. -
FIG. 15A illustrates a notebook personal computer that includes ahousing 701, ahousing 702, adisplay portion 703, akeyboard 704, and the like. In at least one of thehousings -
FIG. 15B illustrates a personal digital assistant (PDA). In amain body 711, adisplay portion 713, anexternal interface 715, anoperation button 714, and the like are provided. Further, astylus 712 and the like for operation of the personal digital assistant are provided. In themain body 711, the memory device described in any of the above embodiments is provided. Therefore, a personal digital assistant in which writing and reading of data are performed at high speed, data is stored for a long time, and power consumption is sufficiently reduced can be realized. -
FIG. 15C illustrates ane-book reader 720 mounted with electronic paper, which includes two housings, ahousing 721 and ahousing 723. Thehousing 721 and thehousing 723 are provided with adisplay portion 725 and adisplay portion 727, respectively. Thehousings hinge portion 737 and can be opened or closed with thehinge portion 737. Thehousing 721 is provided with apower switch 731, anoperation key 733, aspeaker 735, and the like. At least one of thehousings -
FIG. 15D illustrates a cellular phone which includes two housings, ahousing 740 and ahousing 741. Moreover, thehousings FIG. 15D can overlap with each other by sliding; thus, the size of the cellular phone can be reduced, which makes the cellular phone suitable for being carried. Thehousing 741 includes adisplay panel 742, aspeaker 743, amicrophone 744, anoperation key 745, apointing device 746, acamera lens 747, anexternal connection terminal 748, and the like. Thehousing 740 includes asolar cell 749 for charging the cellular phone, anexternal memory slot 750, and the like. In addition, an antenna is incorporated in thehousing 741. At least one of thehousings -
FIG. 15E illustrates a digital camera which includes amain body 761, adisplay portion 767, aneyepiece 763, anoperation switch 764, adisplay portion 765, abattery 766, and the like. In themain body 761, the memory device described in any of the above embodiments is provided. Therefore, a digital camera in which writing and reading of data are performed at high speed, data is stored for a long time, and power consumption is sufficiently reduced can be realized. -
FIG. 15F illustrates atelevision set 770 which includes ahousing 771, adisplay portion 773, astand 775, and the like. Thetelevision set 770 can be operated with an operation switch of thehousing 771 or aremote controller 780. The memory device described in any of the above embodiments is mounted on thehousing 771 and theremote controller 780. Therefore, a television set in which writing and reading of data are performed at high speed, data is stored for a long time, and power consumption is sufficiently reduced can be realized. - As described above, the memory device in any of the above embodiments is mounted on each of the electronic devices described in this embodiment. Therefore, electronic devices in which power consumption is reduced can be realized.
- The actually measured field-effect mobility of an insulated gate transistor can be lower than its intrinsic mobility because of a variety of reasons; this phenomenon occurs not only in the case of using an oxide semiconductor. One of the reasons that reduce the mobility is a defect inside a semiconductor or a defect at an interface between the semiconductor and an insulating film When a Levinson model is used, the field-effect mobility on the assumption that no defect exists inside the semiconductor can be calculated theoretically. In this embodiment, the field-effect mobility of an ideal oxide semiconductor without a defect inside the semiconductor is calculated theoretically, and calculation results of characteristics of minute transistors that are manufactured using such an oxide semiconductor are shown.
- Assuming that the intrinsic mobility and the measured field-effect mobility of a semiconductor are μ0 and μ, respectively, and a potential barrier (such as a grain boundary) exists in the semiconductor, the measured field-effect mobility can be expressed as the following formula.
-
- Here, E represents the height of the potential barrier, k represents the Boltzmann constant, and T represents the absolute temperature. When the potential barrier is assumed to be attributed to a defect, the height of the potential barrier can be expressed as the following formula according to the Levinson model.
-
- Here, e represents the elementary charge, N represents the average defect density per unit area in a channel, e represents the dielectric constant of the semiconductor, n represents the number of carriers per unit area in the channel, Cox represents the capacitance per unit area, Vg represents the gate voltage, and t represents the thickness of the channel. In the case where the thickness of the semiconductor layer is less than or equal to 30 nm, the thickness of the channel may be regarded as being the same as the thickness of the semiconductor layer. The drain current Id in a linear region can be expressed as the following formula.
-
- Here, L represents the channel length and W represents the channel width, and L and W are each 10 μm. In addition, Vd represents the drain voltage. When dividing both sides of the above equation by Vg and then taking logarithms of both sides, the following formula can be obtained.
-
- The right side of
Formula 5 is a function of Vg. From the formula, it is found that the defect density N can be obtained from the slope of a line in a graph which is obtained by plotting actual measured values with ln(Id/Vg) as the ordinate and 1/Vg as the abscissa. That is, the defect density can be evaluated from the Id-Vg characteristics of the transistor. The defect density N of an oxide semiconductor in which the ratio of indium (In), tin (Sn), and zinc (Zn) is 1:1:1 is approximately 1×1012/cm2. - On the basis of the defect density obtained in this manner, or the like, μ0 can be calculated to be 120 cm2/Vs from
Formula 2 andFormula 3. The measured mobility of an In—Sn—Zn oxide including a defect is approximately 35 cm2/Vs. However, assuming that no defect exists inside the semiconductor and at the interface between the semiconductor and an insulating film, the mobility μ0 of the oxide semiconductor is expected to be 120 cm2/Vs. - Note that even when no defect exists inside a semiconductor, scattering at an interface between a channel and a gate insulating layer affects the transport property of the transistor. In other words, the mobility μ1 at a position that is distance x away from the interface between the channel and the gate insulating layer can be expressed as the following formula.
-
- Here, D represents the electric field in the gate direction, and B and G are constants. B and G can be obtained from actual measurement results; according to the above measurement results, B is 4.75×107 cm/s and G is 10 nm (the depth to which the influence of interface scattering reaches). When D is increased (i.e., when the gate voltage is increased), the second term of
Formula 6 is increased and accordingly the mobility μ1 is decreased. - Calculation results of the mobility μ2 of a transistor whose channel includes an ideal oxide semiconductor without a defect inside the semiconductor are shown in
FIG. 23 . For the calculation, device simulation software Sentaurus Device manufactured by Synopsys, Inc. was used, and the band gap, the electron affinity, the relative permittivity, and the thickness of the oxide semiconductor were assumed to be 2.8 eV, 4.7 eV, 15, and 15 nm, respectively. These values were obtained by measurement of a thin film that was formed by a sputtering method. - Further, the work functions of a gate, a source, and a drain were assumed to be 5.5 eV, 4.6 eV, and 4.6 eV, respectively. The thickness of a gate insulating layer was assumed to be 100 nm, and the relative permittivity thereof was assumed to be 4.1. The channel length and the channel width were each assumed to be 10 μm, and the drain voltage Vd was assumed to be 0.1 V.
- As shown in
FIG. 23 , the mobility has a peak of more than 100 cm2/Vs at a gate voltage that is a little over 1 V and is decreased as the gate voltage becomes higher because the influence of interface scattering is increased. Note that in order to reduce interface scattering, it is desirable that a surface of the semiconductor layer be flat at the atomic level (atomic layer flatness). - Calculation results of characteristics of minute transistors which are manufactured using an oxide semiconductor having such a mobility are shown in
FIGS. 24A to 24C ,FIGS. 25A to 25C , andFIGS. 26A to 26C .FIGS. 27A and 27B illustrate cross-sectional structures of the transistors used for the calculation. The transistors illustrated inFIGS. 27A and 27B each include asemiconductor region 8103 a and asemiconductor region 8103 c which have n+-type conductivity in an oxide semiconductor layer. The resistivities of thesemiconductor region 8103 a and thesemiconductor region 8103 c are 2×10−3 Ωcm. - The transistor illustrated in
FIG. 27A is formed over abase insulating layer 8101 and an embeddedinsulator 8102 which is embedded in thebase insulating layer 8101 and formed of aluminum oxide. The transistor includes thesemiconductor region 8103 a, thesemiconductor region 8103 c, anintrinsic semiconductor region 8103 b serving as a channel formation region therebetween, and agate 8105. - A
gate insulating layer 8104 is formed between thegate 8105 and thesemiconductor region 8103 b. In addition, asidewall insulator 8106 a and asidewall insulator 8106 b are formed on both side surfaces of thegate 8105, and aninsulator 8107 is formed over thegate 8105 so as to prevent a short circuit between thegate 8105 and another wiring. The sidewall insulator has a width of 5nm A source 8108 a and adrain 8108 b are provided in contact with thesemiconductor region 8103 a and thesemiconductor region 8103 c, respectively. Note that the channel width of this transistor is 40 nm. - The transistor of
FIG. 27B is the same as the transistor ofFIG. 27A in that it is formed over thebase insulating layer 8101 and the embeddedinsulator 8102 formed of aluminum oxide and that it includes thesemiconductor region 8103 a, thesemiconductor region 8103 c, theintrinsic semiconductor region 8103 b provided therebetween, thegate 8105 having a width of 33 nm, thegate insulating layer 8104, thesidewall insulator 8106 a, thesidewall insulator 8106 b, theinsulator 8107, thesource 8108 a, and thedrain 8108 b. - The transistor illustrated in
FIG. 27B is different from the transistor illustrated inFIG. 27A in the conductivity type of semiconductor regions under thesidewall insulator 8106 a and thesidewall insulator 8106 b. In the transistor illustrated inFIG. 27A , the semiconductor regions under thesidewall insulator 8106 a and thesidewall insulator 8106 b are part of thesemiconductor region 8103 a having n+-type conductivity and part of thesemiconductor region 8103 c having n+-type conductivity, whereas in the transistor illustrated inFIG. 27B , the semiconductor regions under thesidewall insulator 8106 a and thesidewall insulator 8106 b are part of theintrinsic semiconductor region 8103 b. In other words, in the semiconductor layer ofFIG. 27B , a region having a width of Loff which overlaps with neither thesemiconductor region 8103 a (thesemiconductor region 8103 c) nor thegate 8105 is provided. This region is called an offset region, and the width Loff is called an offset length. As is seen from the drawing, the offset length is equal to the width of thesidewall insulator 8106 a (thesidewall insulator 8106 b). - The other parameters used in calculation are as described above. For the calculation, device simulation software Sentaurus Device manufactured by Synopsys, Inc. was used.
FIGS. 24A to 24C show the gate voltage (Vg: a potential difference between the gate and the source) dependence of the drain current (Id, a solid line) and the mobility (μ, a dotted line) of the transistor having the structure illustrated inFIG. 27A . The drain current Id is obtained by calculation under the assumption that the drain voltage (a potential difference between the drain and the source) is +1 V and the mobility μ is obtained by calculation under the assumption that the drain voltage is +0.1 V. -
FIG. 24A shows the gate voltage dependence of the transistor in the case where the thickness of the gate insulating layer is 15 nm,FIG. 24B shows that of the transistor in the case where the thickness of the gate insulating layer is 10 nm, andFIG. 24C shows that of the transistor in the case where the thickness of the gate insulating layer is 5 nm. As the gate insulating layer is thinner, the drain current Id (off-state current) particularly in an off state is significantly decreased. In contrast, there is no noticeable change in the peak value of the mobility μ and the drain current Id in an on state (on-state current). The graphs show that the drain current exceeds 10 μA, which is required in a memory cell and the like, at a gate voltage of around 1 V. -
FIGS. 25A to 25C show the gate voltage Vg dependence of the drain current Id (a solid line) and the mobility μ (a dotted line) of the transistor having the structure illustrated inFIG. 27B where the offset length Loff is 5 nm The drain current Id is obtained by calculation under the assumption that the drain voltage is +1 V and the mobility μ is obtained by calculation under the assumption that the drain voltage is +0.1 V.FIG. 25A shows the gate voltage dependence of the transistor in the case where the thickness of the gate insulating layer is 15 nm,FIG. 25B shows that of the transistor in the case where the thickness of the gate insulating layer is 10 nm, andFIG. 25C shows that of the transistor in the case where the thickness of the gate insulating layer is 5 nm. - Further,
FIGS. 26A to 26C show the gate voltage dependence of the drain current Id (a solid line) and the mobility μ(a dotted line) of the transistor having the structure illustrated inFIG. 27B where the offset length Loff is 15 nm The drain current Id is obtained by calculation under the assumption that the drain voltage is +1 V and the mobility μ is obtained by calculation under the assumption that the drain voltage is +0.1 V.FIG. 26A shows the gate voltage dependence of the transistor in the case where the thickness of the gate insulating layer is 15 nm,FIG. 26B shows that of the transistor in the case where the thickness of the gate insulating layer is 10 nm, andFIG. 26C shows that of the transistor in the case where the thickness of the gate insulating layer is 5 nm. - In either of the structures, as the gate insulating layer is thinner, the off-state current is significantly decreased, whereas no noticeable change arises in the peak value of the mobility μ and the on-state current.
- Note that the peak of the mobility μ is approximately 80 cm2/Vs in
FIGS. 24A to 24C , approximately 60 cm2/Vs inFIGS. 25A to 25C , and approximately 40 cm2/Vs inFIGS. 26A to 26C ; thus, the peak of the mobility μ is decreased as the offset length Loff is increased. Further, the same applies to the off-state current. The on-state current is also decreased as the offset length Loff is increased; however, the decrease in the on-state current is much more gradual than the decrease in the off-state current. Further, the graphs show that in either of the structures, the drain current exceeds 10 μA, which is required in a memory cell and the like, at a gate voltage of around 1 V. - This embodiment can be implemented by being combined as appropriate with any of the above-described embodiments.
- A transistor in which an oxide semiconductor containing In, Sn, and Zn as main components is used as a channel formation region can have favorable characteristics by depositing the oxide semiconductor while heating a substrate or by performing heat treatment after an oxide semiconductor film is formed. Note that a main component refers to an element included in a composition at greater than or equal to 5 atomic %. In this embodiment, the case where the field effect mobility of the transistor is improved by intentionally heating the substrate after formation of the oxide semiconductor film will be described with reference to
FIGS. 28A to 28C ,FIGS. 29A and 29B ,FIGS. 30A and 30B ,FIG. 31 ,FIG. 32 ,FIG. 33 , andFIGS. 34A and 34B . - By intentionally heating the substrate after formation of the oxide semiconductor film including In, Sn, and Zn as main components, the field-effect mobility of the transistor can be improved. Further, the threshold voltage of the transistor can be positively shifted to make the transistor normally off.
- As an example,
FIGS. 28A to 28C each show characteristics of a transistor in which an oxide semiconductor film including In, Sn, and Zn as main components and having a channel length L of 3 μm and a channel width W of 10 μm, and a gate insulating film with a thickness of 100 nm are used. Note that Vd was set to 10 V. -
FIG. 28A shows characteristics of a transistor whose oxide semiconductor film including In, Sn, and Zn as main components was formed by a sputtering method without heating a substrate intentionally. The field-effect mobility of the transistor is 18.8 cm2/Vsec. On the other hand, when the oxide semiconductor film including In, Sn, and Zn as main components is formed while heating the substrate intentionally, the field-effect mobility can be improved.FIG. 28B shows characteristics of a transistor whose oxide semiconductor film including In, Sn, and Zn as main components was formed while heating a substrate at 200° C. The field-effect mobility of the transistor is 32.2 cm2/Vsec. - The field-effect mobility can be further improved by performing heat treatment after formation of the oxide semiconductor film including In, Sn, and Zn as main components.
FIG. 28C shows characteristics of a transistor whose oxide semiconductor film including In, Sn, and Zn as main components was formed by sputtering at 200° C. and then subjected to heat treatment at 650° C. The field-effect mobility of the transistor is 34.5 cm2/Vsec. - The intentional heating of the substrate is expected to have an effect of reducing moisture taken into the oxide semiconductor film during the formation by sputtering. Further, the heat treatment after film formation enables hydrogen, a hydroxyl group, or moisture to be released and removed from the oxide semiconductor film. In this manner, the field-effect mobility can be improved. Such an improvement in field-effect mobility is presumed to be achieved not only by removal of impurities by dehydration or dehydrogenation but also by a reduction in interatomic distance due to an increase in density. The oxide semiconductor can be crystallized by being purified by removal of impurities from the oxide semiconductor. In the case of using such a purified non-single crystal oxide semiconductor, ideally, a field-effect mobility exceeding 100 cm2/Vsec is expected to be realized.
- The oxide semiconductor including In, Sn, and Zn as main components may be crystallized in the following manner: oxygen ions are implanted into the oxide semiconductor, hydrogen, a hydroxyl group, or moisture included in the oxide semiconductor is released by heat treatment, and the oxide semiconductor is crystallized through the heat treatment or by another heat treatment performed later. By such crystallization treatment or recrystallization treatment, a non-single-crystal oxide semiconductor having favorable crystallinity can be obtained.
- The intentional heating of the substrate during film formation and/or the heat treatment after the film formation contributes not only to improving field-effect mobility but also to making the transistor normally off. In a transistor in which an oxide semiconductor film that includes In, Sn, and Zn as main components and is formed without heating a substrate intentionally is used as a channel formation region, the threshold voltage tends to be shifted negatively. However, when the oxide semiconductor film formed while heating the substrate intentionally is used, the problem of the negative shift of the threshold voltage can be solved. That is, the threshold voltage is shifted so that the transistor becomes normally off; this tendency can be confirmed by comparison between
FIGS. 28A and 28B . - Note that the threshold voltage can also be controlled by changing the ratio of In, Sn, and Zn; when the composition ratio of In, Sn, and Zn is 2:1:3, a normally-off transistor is expected to be formed. In addition, an oxide semiconductor film having high crystallinity can be obtained by setting the composition ratio of a target as follows: In:Sn:Zn=2:1:3.
- The temperature of the intentional heating of the substrate or the temperature of the heat treatment is 150° C. or higher, preferably 200° C. or higher, further preferably 400° C. or higher. When film formation or heat treatment is performed at a high temperature, the transistor can be normally off.
- By intentionally heating the substrate during film formation and/or by performing heat treatment after the film formation, the stability against a gate-bias stress can be increased. For example, when a gate bias is applied under a condition of 2 MV/cm at 150° C. for one hour, drift of the threshold voltage can be less than ±1.5 V, preferably less than ±1.0 V.
- A BT test was performed on the following two transistors:
Sample 1 on which heat treatment was not performed after formation of an oxide semiconductor film, andSample 2 on which heat treatment at 650° C. was performed after formation of an oxide semiconductor film. - First, Vg-Id characteristics of the transistors were measured at a substrate temperature of 25° C. and Vds of 10 V. Note that Vds refers to a drain voltage (a potential difference between a drain and a source). Then, the substrate temperature was set to 150° C. and Vds was set to 0.1 V. After that, 20 V of Vg was applied so that an electric field intensity applied to gate insulating films was 2 MV/cm, and the condition was kept for one hour. Next, Vg was set to 0 V. Then, Vg-Id characteristics of the transistors were measured at a substrate temperature of 25° C. and Vds of 10 V. This process is called a positive BT test.
- In a similar manner, first, Vg-Id characteristics of the transistors were measured at a substrate temperature of 25° C. and Vds of 10 V. Then, the substrate temperature was set at 150° C. and Vds was set to 0.1 V. After that, −20 V of Vg was applied so that an electric field intensity applied to the gate insulating films was −2 MV/cm, and the condition was kept for one hour. Next, Vg was set to 0 V. Then, Vg-Id characteristics of the transistors were measured at a substrate temperature of 25° C. and Vds of 10 V. This process is called a negative BT test.
-
FIGS. 29A and 29B show a result of the positive BT test ofSample 1 and a result of the negative BT test ofSample 1, respectively.FIGS. 30A and 30B show a result of the positive BT test ofSample 2 and a result of the negative BT test ofSample 2, respectively. - The amount of shift in the threshold voltage of
Sample 1 due to the positive BT test and that due to the negative BT test were 1.80 V and −0.42 V, respectively. The amount of shift in the threshold voltage ofSample 2 due to the positive BT test and that due to the negative BT test were 0.79 V and 0.76 V, respectively. It is found that, in each ofSample 1 andSample 2, the amount of shift in the threshold voltage between before and after the BT tests is small and the reliability is high. - The heat treatment can be performed in an oxygen atmosphere; alternatively, the heat treatment may be performed first in an atmosphere of nitrogen or an inert gas or under reduced pressure, and then in an atmosphere including oxygen. Oxygen is supplied to the oxide semiconductor after dehydration or dehydrogenation, whereby an effect of the heat treatment can be further increased. As a method for supplying oxygen after dehydration or dehydrogenation, a method in which oxygen ions are accelerated by an electric field and implanted into the oxide semiconductor film may be employed.
- A defect due to oxygen deficiency is easily caused in the oxide semiconductor or at an interface between the oxide semiconductor and a film in contact with the oxide semiconductor; however, when excess oxygen is included in the oxide semiconductor by the heat treatment, oxygen deficiency caused constantly can be compensated for with excess oxygen. The excess oxygen is oxygen existing mainly between lattices. When the concentration of excess oxygen is set to higher than or equal to 1×1016/cm3 and lower than or equal to 2×1020/cm3, excess oxygen can be included in the oxide semiconductor without causing crystal distortion or the like.
- When heat treatment is performed so that at least part of the oxide semiconductor includes crystal, a more stable oxide semiconductor film can be obtained. For example, when an oxide semiconductor film which is formed by sputtering using a target having a composition ratio of In:Sn:Zn=1:1:1 without heating a substrate intentionally is analyzed by X-ray diffraction (XRD), a halo pattern is observed. The formed oxide semiconductor film can be crystallized by being subjected to heat treatment. The temperature of the heat treatment can be set as appropriate; when the heat treatment is performed at 650° C., for example, a clear diffraction peak can be observed in an X-ray diffraction analysis.
- An XRD analysis of an In—Sn—Zn—O film was conducted. The XRD analysis was conducted using an X-ray diffractometer D8 ADVANCE manufactured by Bruker AXS, and measurement was performed by an out-of-plane method.
- Sample A and Sample B were prepared and the XRD analysis was performed thereon. A method for manufacturing Sample A and Sample B will be described below.
- An In—Sn—Zn—O film with a thickness of 100 nm was formed over a quartz substrate that had been subjected to dehydrogenation treatment.
- The In—Sn—Zn—O film was formed with a sputtering apparatus with a power of 100 W (DC) in an oxygen atmosphere. An In—Sn—Zn—O target having an atomic ratio of In:Sn:Zn=1:1:1 was used as a target. Note that the substrate heating temperature in film formation was set at 200° C. A sample manufactured in this manner was used as Sample A.
- Next, a sample manufactured by a method similar to that of Sample A was subjected to heat treatment at 650° C. As the heat treatment, heat treatment in a nitrogen atmosphere was first performed for one hour and heat treatment in an oxygen atmosphere was further performed for one hour without lowering the temperature. A sample manufactured in this manner was used as Sample B.
-
FIG. 31 shows XRD spectra of Sample A and Sample B. No peak derived from crystal was observed in Sample A, whereas peaks derived from crystal were observed when 2θ was around 35 deg. and 37 deg. to 38 deg. in Sample B. - These substrate heating and heat treatment have an effect of preventing hydrogen and a hydroxyl group, which are unfavorable impurities for an oxide semiconductor, from being included in the film or an effect of removing hydrogen and a hydroxyl group from the film. That is, an oxide semiconductor can be purified by removing hydrogen serving as a donor impurity from the oxide semiconductor, whereby a normally-off transistor can be obtained. The purification of an oxide semiconductor enables the off-state current of the transistor to be 1 aA/μm or lower. Here, the unit of the off-state current is used to indicate current per micrometer of a channel width.
-
FIG. 32 shows a relation between the off-state current of a transistor and the inverse of substrate temperature (absolute temperature) T at measurement. Here, for simplicity, the horizontal axis represents a value (1000/T) obtained by multiplying an inverse of substrate temperature at measurement by 1000. - Specifically, as shown in
FIG. 32 , the off-state current can be 1 aA/μm (1×10−18 A/μm) or lower, 100 zA/μm (1×10−19 A/μm) or lower, and 1 zA/μm (1×10−21 A/μm) or lower when the substrate temperature is 125° C., 85° C., and room temperature (27° C.), respectively. Preferably, the off-state current can be 0.1 aA/μm (1×10−19 A/μm) or lower, 10 zA/μm (1×10−20 A/μm) or lower, and 0.1 zA/μm (1×10−22 A/μm) or lower at 125° C., 85° C., and room temperature, respectively. The above values of off-state currents are clearly much lower than that of the transistor using Si as a semiconductor film. - Note that in order to prevent hydrogen and moisture from being included in the oxide semiconductor film during formation thereof, it is preferable to increase the purity of a sputtering gas by sufficiently suppressing leakage from the outside of a deposition chamber and degasification through an inner wall of the deposition chamber. For example, a gas with a dew point of −70° C. or lower is preferably used as the sputtering gas in order to prevent moisture from being included in the film. In addition, it is preferable to use a target which is purified so as not to include impurities such as hydrogen and moisture. Although it is possible to remove moisture from a film of an oxide semiconductor including In, Sn, and Zn as main components by heat treatment, a film which does not include moisture originally is preferably formed because moisture is released from the oxide semiconductor including In, Sn, and Zn as main components at a higher temperature than from an oxide semiconductor including In, Ga, and Zn as main components.
- The relation between the substrate temperature and electrical characteristics of a transistor formed using Sample B, on which heat treatment at 650° C. was performed after formation of the oxide semiconductor film, was evaluated.
- The transistor used for the measurement has a channel length L of 3 μm, a channel width W of 10 μm, Lov of 0 μm, and dW of 0 μm. Note that Vds was set to 10 V. Note that the substrate temperature was −40° C., −25° C., 25° C., 75° C., 125° C., and 150° C. Here, in a transistor, the width of a portion where a gate electrode overlaps with one of a pair of electrodes is referred to as Lov, and the width of a portion of the pair of electrodes, which does not overlap with an oxide semiconductor film, is referred to as dW.
-
FIG. 33 shows the Vg dependence of Id (a solid line) and field-effect mobility (a dotted line).FIG. 34A shows a relation between the substrate temperature and the threshold voltage, andFIG. 34B shows a relation between the substrate temperature and the field-effect mobility. - From
FIG. 34A , it is found that the threshold voltage gets lower as the substrate temperature increases. Note that the threshold voltage is decreased from 1.09 V to −0.23 V in the range from −40° C. to 150° C. - From
FIG. 34B , it is found that the field-effect mobility gets lower as the substrate temperature increases. Note that the field-effect mobility is decreased from 36 cm2/Vs to 32 cm2/Vs in the range from −40° C. to 150° C. Thus, it is found that variation in electrical characteristics is small in the above temperature range. - In a transistor in which such an oxide semiconductor including In, Sn, and Zn as main components is used as a channel formation region, a field-effect mobility of 30 cm2/Vsec or higher, preferably 40 cm2/Vsec or higher, further preferably 60 cm2/Vsec or higher can be obtained with the off-state current maintained at 1 aA/μm or lower, which can achieve on-state current needed for an LSI. For example, in an FET where L/W is 33 nm/40 nm, an on-state current of 12 μA or higher can flow when the gate voltage is 2.7 V and the drain voltage is 1.0 V. In addition, sufficient electrical characteristics can be ensured in a temperature range needed for operation of a transistor. With such characteristics, an integrated circuit having a novel function can be realized without decreasing the operation speed even when a transistor including an oxide semiconductor is also provided in an integrated circuit formed using a Si semiconductor.
- As described above, by intentionally heating a substrate during deposition of an oxide semiconductor including In, Sn, and Zn as main components and/or by performing heat treatment after the deposition, characteristics of a transistor can be improved.
- This embodiment can be implemented by being combined as appropriate with any of the above embodiments.
- In this example, an example of a transistor in which an In—Sn—Zn—O film is used as an oxide semiconductor film will be described with reference to
FIGS. 35A and 35B and the like. -
FIGS. 35A and 35B are a top view and a cross-sectional view of a coplanar transistor having a top-gate top-contact structure.FIG. 35A is the top view of the transistor.FIG. 35B illustrates cross section A-B along dashed-dotted line A-B inFIG. 35A . - The transistor illustrated in
FIG. 35B includes asubstrate 1101; abase insulating layer 1102 provided over thesubstrate 1101; a protectiveinsulating film 1104 provided in the periphery of thebase insulating layer 1102; anoxide semiconductor film 1106 provided over thebase insulating layer 1102 and the protectiveinsulating film 1104 and including a high-resistance region 1106 a and low-resistance regions 1106 b; agate insulating film 1108 provided over theoxide semiconductor film 1106; agate electrode 1110 provided to overlap with theoxide semiconductor film 1106 with thegate insulating film 1108 positioned therebetween; asidewall insulating film 1112 provided in contact with a side surface of thegate electrode 1110; a pair ofelectrodes 1114 provided in contact with at least the low-resistance regions 1106 b; aninterlayer insulating film 1116 provided to cover at least theoxide semiconductor film 1106, thegate electrode 1110, and the pair ofelectrodes 1114; and awiring 1118 provided to be electrically connected to at least one of the pair ofelectrodes 1114 through an opening formed in theinterlayer insulating film 1116. - Although not illustrated, a protective film may be provided to cover the
interlayer insulating film 1116 and thewiring 1118. With the protective film, a minute amount of leakage current generated by surface conduction of theinterlayer insulating film 1116 can be reduced and thus the off-state current of the transistor can be reduced. - This example can be implemented by being combined as appropriate with any of the above embodiments.
- In this example, another example of a transistor in which an In—Sn—Zn—O film is used as an oxide semiconductor film will be described.
-
FIGS. 36A and 36B are a top view and a cross-sectional view which illustrate a structure of a transistor manufactured in this example.FIG. 36A is the top view of the transistor.FIG. 36B is a cross-sectional view along dashed-dotted line A-B inFIG. 36A . - The transistor illustrated in
FIG. 36B includes asubstrate 600; abase insulating layer 602 provided over thesubstrate 600; anoxide semiconductor film 606 provided over thebase insulating layer 602; a pair ofelectrodes 614 in contact with theoxide semiconductor film 606; agate insulating film 608 provided over theoxide semiconductor film 606 and the pair ofelectrodes 614; agate electrode 610 provided to overlap with theoxide semiconductor film 606 with thegate insulating film 608 positioned therebetween; aninterlayer insulating film 616 provided to cover thegate insulating film 608 and thegate electrode 610;wirings 618 electrically connected to the pair ofelectrodes 614 through openings formed in thegate insulating film 608 and theinterlayer insulating film 616; and aprotective film 620 provided to cover theinterlayer insulating film 616 and thewirings 618. - As the
substrate 600, a glass substrate can be used. As thebase insulating layer 602, a silicon oxide film can be used. As theoxide semiconductor film 606, an In—Sn—Zn—O film can be used. As the pair ofelectrodes 614, a tungsten film can be used. As thegate insulating film 608, a silicon oxide film can be used. Thegate electrode 610 can have a stacked structure of a tantalum nitride film and a tungsten film. Theinterlayer insulating film 616 can have a stacked structure of a silicon oxynitride film and a polyimide film. Thewirings 618 can each have a stacked structure in which a titanium film, an aluminum film, and a titanium film are formed in this order. As theprotective film 620, a polyimide film can be used. - Note that in the transistor having the structure illustrated in
FIG. 36A , the width of a portion where thegate electrode 610 overlaps with one of the pair ofelectrodes 614 is referred to as Lov. Similarly, the width of a portion of the pair ofelectrodes 614, which does not overlap with theoxide semiconductor film 606, is referred to as dW. - This example can be implemented by being combined as appropriate with any of the above embodiments and example.
- 100: substrate, 106: element separation insulating layer, 108: gate insulating layer, 110: gate electrode, 116: channel formation region, 120: impurity region, 124: metal compound region, 126: electrode, 128: insulating layer, 140: insulating layer, 144: oxide semiconductor layer, 145: oxide semiconductor layer, 146: gate insulating layer, 148: electrode layer, 150: insulating layer, 151: insulating layer, 152: insulating layer, 156: wiring, 159: conductive layer, 160: transistor, 162: transistor, 164: capacitor, 170: memory cell, 201: memory cell array, 210: peripheral circuit, 211: driver circuit, 212: driver circuit, 213: driver circuit, 214: driver circuit, 215: driver circuit, 218: controller, 219: mode register, 220: I/O buffer, 221: address buffer, 222: sense amplifier, 250: center point, 401: transistor, 402: transistor, 403: transistor, 404: transistor, 405: transistor, 406: transistor, 407: transistor, 408: transistor, 409: transistor, 410: transistor, 411: transistor, 500: electrode, 551: electrode, 552: electrode, 553: electrode, 556: electrode, 557: electrode, 601: memory cell array, 611: bit line driver circuit, 612: word line driver circuit, 600: substrate, 602: base insulating layer, 604: one pair of electrodes, 606: oxide semiconductor film, 608: gate insulating film, 610: gate electrode, 614: one pair of electrodes, 616: interlayer insulating film, 618: wiring, 620: protective film, 701: housing, 702: housing, 703: display portion, 704: keyboard, 711: main body, 712: stylus, 713: display portion, 714: operation button, 715: external interface, 720: e-book reader, 721: housing, 723: housing, 725: display portion, 727: display portion, 731: power switch, 733: operation key, 735: speaker, 737: hinge portion, 740: housing, 741: housing, 742: display panel, 743: speaker, 744: microphone, 745: operation key, 746: pointing device, 747: camera lens, 748: external connection terminal, 749: solar cell, 750: external memory slot, 761: main body, 763: eyepiece, 764: operation switch, 765: display portion, 766: battery, 767: display portion, 770: television device, 771: housing, 773: display portion, 775: stand, 780: remote controller, 840: electrode, 841: electrode, 842: insulating layer, 130 a: drain electrode, 130 b: drain electrode, 136 a: electrode, 136 b: electrode, 136 c: electrode, 142 a: electrode, 142 b: electrode, 143 a: oxide conductive layer, 143 b: oxide conductive layer, 145 a: crystalline oxide semiconductor layer, 145 b: crystalline oxide semiconductor layer, 148 a: electrode, 148 b: conductive layer, 154 a: electrode, 170 a: memory cell, 170 b: memory cell, 170 c: memory cell, 170 d: memory cell, 201 a: memory cell array, 201 b: memory cell array, 211 a: driver circuit, 211 b: driver circuit, 212 a: driver circuit, 212 b: driver circuit, 213 a: driver circuit, 213 b: driver circuit, 214 a: driver circuit, 214 b: driver circuit, 216 a: sense amplifier group, 216 b: sense amplifier group, 217 a: column decoder, 217 b: column decoder, 223 a: row decoder, 223 b: row decoder, 501 a: electrode, 501 b: electrode, 502 a: electrode, 502 b: electrode, 601A: memory cell array, 601B: memory cell array, 601C: memory cell array, 601D: memory cell array, 1101: substrate, 1102: base insulating layer, 1104: protective insulating film, 1106 a: high-resistance region, 1106 b: low-resistance region, 1106: oxide semiconductor film, 1108: gate insulating film, 1110: gate electrode, 1112: sidewall insulating film, 1114: one pair of electrodes, 1116: interlayer insulating film, 1118: wiring, 8101: base insulating layer, 8102: embedded insulator, 8103 a: semiconductor region, 8103 b: semiconductor region, 8103 c: semiconductor region, 8104: gate insulating layer, 8105: gate, 8106 a: sidewall insulator, 8106 b: sidewall insulator, 8107: insulator, 8108 a: source, and 8108 b: drain.
Claims (1)
1. A memory device comprising:
a driver circuit; and
a plurality of memory cell arrays which is provided over the driver circuit and is configured to be driven by the driver circuit,
wherein each of the plurality of memory cell arrays comprises a plurality of memory cells arranged in matrix,
wherein each of the plurality of memory cells comprises a first transistor comprising an oxide semiconductor layer, and
wherein the plurality of memory cell arrays is stacked to overlap.
Priority Applications (1)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US15/043,063 US20160163374A1 (en) | 2010-09-13 | 2016-02-12 | Memory device |
Applications Claiming Priority (7)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
JP2010204090 | 2010-09-13 | ||
JP2010-204090 | 2010-09-13 | ||
JP2011108899 | 2011-05-14 | ||
JP2011-108899 | 2011-05-14 | ||
US13/230,184 US9042161B2 (en) | 2010-09-13 | 2011-09-12 | Memory device |
US14/717,071 US9263116B2 (en) | 2010-09-13 | 2015-05-20 | Memory device |
US15/043,063 US20160163374A1 (en) | 2010-09-13 | 2016-02-12 | Memory device |
Related Parent Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US14/717,071 Continuation US9263116B2 (en) | 2010-09-13 | 2015-05-20 | Memory device |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
US20160163374A1 true US20160163374A1 (en) | 2016-06-09 |
Family
ID=45806590
Family Applications (3)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US13/230,184 Active 2032-11-22 US9042161B2 (en) | 2010-09-13 | 2011-09-12 | Memory device |
US14/717,071 Active US9263116B2 (en) | 2010-09-13 | 2015-05-20 | Memory device |
US15/043,063 Abandoned US20160163374A1 (en) | 2010-09-13 | 2016-02-12 | Memory device |
Family Applications Before (2)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US13/230,184 Active 2032-11-22 US9042161B2 (en) | 2010-09-13 | 2011-09-12 | Memory device |
US14/717,071 Active US9263116B2 (en) | 2010-09-13 | 2015-05-20 | Memory device |
Country Status (6)
Country | Link |
---|---|
US (3) | US9042161B2 (en) |
JP (4) | JP2012256821A (en) |
KR (3) | KR101901761B1 (en) |
DE (1) | DE112011103061T5 (en) |
TW (3) | TWI539452B (en) |
WO (1) | WO2012036001A1 (en) |
Cited By (8)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US20190057741A1 (en) * | 2016-02-18 | 2019-02-21 | Sandisk Technologies Llc | Word Line Decoder Circuitry under a Three-Dimensional Memory Array |
US10223194B2 (en) | 2016-11-04 | 2019-03-05 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Storage device, semiconductor device, electronic device, and server system |
US20190206495A1 (en) * | 2016-09-23 | 2019-07-04 | Toshiba Memory Corporation | Memory device |
US10790025B2 (en) | 2018-06-01 | 2020-09-29 | Toshiba Memory Corporation | Semiconductor memory including plural memory blocks, a sequencer that controls a driver, a row decoder, and sense amplifier modules based on commands held in a command register to perform read, write, erase |
US10886221B2 (en) | 2018-09-14 | 2021-01-05 | Toshiba Memory Corporation | Semiconductor device |
CN112599528A (en) * | 2020-12-14 | 2021-04-02 | 武汉新芯集成电路制造有限公司 | Semiconductor device and method for manufacturing the same |
US10984840B2 (en) | 2017-09-06 | 2021-04-20 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device |
US11488668B2 (en) | 2014-05-22 | 2022-11-01 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device and healthcare system |
Families Citing this family (52)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
WO2012029638A1 (en) | 2010-09-03 | 2012-03-08 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device |
JP2012256821A (en) * | 2010-09-13 | 2012-12-27 | Semiconductor Energy Lab Co Ltd | Memory device |
TWI574259B (en) | 2010-09-29 | 2017-03-11 | 半導體能源研究所股份有限公司 | Semiconductor memory device and method for driving the same |
TWI492368B (en) | 2011-01-14 | 2015-07-11 | Semiconductor Energy Lab | Semiconductor memory device |
TWI614747B (en) | 2011-01-26 | 2018-02-11 | 半導體能源研究所股份有限公司 | Memory device and semiconductor device |
TWI520273B (en) | 2011-02-02 | 2016-02-01 | 半導體能源研究所股份有限公司 | Semiconductor memory device |
US8780614B2 (en) | 2011-02-02 | 2014-07-15 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor memory device |
CN103022012B (en) * | 2011-09-21 | 2017-03-01 | 株式会社半导体能源研究所 | Semiconductor storage |
US8829528B2 (en) * | 2011-11-25 | 2014-09-09 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device including groove portion extending beyond pixel electrode |
US8981367B2 (en) | 2011-12-01 | 2015-03-17 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device |
JP6081171B2 (en) | 2011-12-09 | 2017-02-15 | 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 | Storage device |
US10002968B2 (en) | 2011-12-14 | 2018-06-19 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device and display device including the same |
JP6105266B2 (en) | 2011-12-15 | 2017-03-29 | 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 | Storage device |
CN107863122B (en) * | 2012-03-26 | 2021-05-11 | 英特尔公司 | Three-dimensional memory control circuit |
JP6250883B2 (en) * | 2013-03-01 | 2017-12-20 | 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 | Semiconductor device |
JP6438727B2 (en) * | 2013-10-11 | 2018-12-19 | 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 | Semiconductor device and manufacturing method of semiconductor device |
KR102244460B1 (en) * | 2013-10-22 | 2021-04-23 | 가부시키가이샤 한도오따이 에네루기 켄큐쇼 | Semiconductor device |
US9558791B2 (en) * | 2013-12-05 | 2017-01-31 | Taiwan Semiconductor Manufacturing Company Limited | Three-dimensional static random access memory device structures |
KR20230065379A (en) * | 2013-12-27 | 2023-05-11 | 가부시키가이샤 한도오따이 에네루기 켄큐쇼 | Semiconductor device |
US9716100B2 (en) * | 2014-03-14 | 2017-07-25 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device, method for driving semiconductor device, and electronic device |
JP6635670B2 (en) * | 2014-04-11 | 2020-01-29 | 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 | Semiconductor device |
WO2015170220A1 (en) * | 2014-05-09 | 2015-11-12 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Memory device and electronic device |
JP6616102B2 (en) * | 2014-05-23 | 2019-12-04 | 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 | Storage device and electronic device |
WO2015182000A1 (en) | 2014-05-30 | 2015-12-03 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device, manufacturing method thereof, and electronic device |
JP5940691B1 (en) * | 2015-02-04 | 2016-06-29 | ウィンボンド エレクトロニクス コーポレーション | Voltage generation circuit, semiconductor device, and flash memory |
US9711224B2 (en) * | 2015-03-13 | 2017-07-18 | Micron Technology, Inc. | Devices including memory arrays, row decoder circuitries and column decoder circuitries |
KR20170140194A (en) * | 2015-04-27 | 2017-12-20 | 소니 세미컨덕터 솔루션즈 가부시키가이샤 | MEMORY DEVICE, MEMORY SYSTEM AND MEMORY CONTROL METHOD |
US9728243B2 (en) * | 2015-05-11 | 2017-08-08 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device or electronic component including the same |
US10424671B2 (en) | 2015-07-29 | 2019-09-24 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device, circuit board, and electronic device |
US9749567B2 (en) | 2015-11-29 | 2017-08-29 | United Microelectronics Corp. | Operating method of image sensor |
KR102579920B1 (en) | 2015-12-17 | 2023-09-18 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Memory device having cop structure and memory package including the same |
JP6517720B2 (en) * | 2016-03-16 | 2019-05-22 | 東芝メモリ株式会社 | Semiconductor memory device |
KR102601214B1 (en) | 2016-05-16 | 2023-11-10 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Memory device having vertical structure and memory system including the same |
TWI734781B (en) * | 2016-05-20 | 2021-08-01 | 日商半導體能源研究所股份有限公司 | Semiconductor device, electronic component, and electronic device |
KR102583770B1 (en) | 2016-09-12 | 2023-10-06 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | Memory transistor and display apparatus having the same |
DE112018000776T5 (en) * | 2017-02-10 | 2019-12-05 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device and method of making same |
JP7328146B2 (en) | 2017-09-06 | 2023-08-16 | 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 | Storage devices and electronic equipment |
TW202105678A (en) | 2019-01-25 | 2021-02-01 | 日商半導體能源研究所股份有限公司 | Semiconductor device and electric apparatus having said semiconductor device |
KR20210127721A (en) | 2019-02-22 | 2021-10-22 | 가부시키가이샤 한도오따이 에네루기 켄큐쇼 | A semiconductor device and an electric device having the semiconductor device |
KR20210130734A (en) | 2019-02-22 | 2021-11-01 | 가부시키가이샤 한도오따이 에네루기 켄큐쇼 | A memory device having an error detection function, a semiconductor device, and an electronic device |
US11948626B2 (en) | 2019-03-29 | 2024-04-02 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device comprising transistors with silicon and metal oxide channels |
TWI735860B (en) * | 2019-04-08 | 2021-08-11 | 華邦電子股份有限公司 | Method of manufacturing memory device |
WO2020222068A1 (en) | 2019-04-30 | 2020-11-05 | 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 | Storage device having redundant memory cell, semiconductor device, and electronic device |
KR20220008837A (en) | 2019-05-23 | 2022-01-21 | 가부시키가이샤 한도오따이 에네루기 켄큐쇼 | semiconductor device |
US12015012B2 (en) | 2019-06-07 | 2024-06-18 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device |
US11217291B2 (en) * | 2019-07-11 | 2022-01-04 | Micron Technology, Inc. | Circuitry borrowing for memory arrays |
JP2021089972A (en) * | 2019-12-04 | 2021-06-10 | キオクシア株式会社 | Semiconductor storage device |
JP2021108307A (en) * | 2019-12-27 | 2021-07-29 | キオクシア株式会社 | Semiconductor storage |
CN113451270B (en) * | 2020-03-25 | 2023-12-05 | 长鑫存储技术有限公司 | Bit line structure and semiconductor memory |
WO2022049448A1 (en) | 2020-09-06 | 2022-03-10 | 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 | Semiconductor device and electronic equipment |
KR20240006569A (en) | 2021-05-10 | 2024-01-15 | 가부시키가이샤 한도오따이 에네루기 켄큐쇼 | semiconductor device |
JPWO2022248985A1 (en) | 2021-05-28 | 2022-12-01 |
Citations (17)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US5495439A (en) * | 1993-09-27 | 1996-02-27 | Mitsubishi Denki Kabushiki Kaisha | Semiconductor memory device having SOI structure and manufacturing method thereof |
US5877978A (en) * | 1996-03-04 | 1999-03-02 | Mitsubishi Denki Kabushiki Kaisha | Semiconductor memory device |
US20020163834A1 (en) * | 2000-08-14 | 2002-11-07 | Scheuerlein Roy E. | Integrated systems using vertically-stacked three-dimensional memory cells |
US20030047785A1 (en) * | 2001-09-10 | 2003-03-13 | Masahi Kawasaki | Thin film transistor and matrix display device |
US20030067043A1 (en) * | 2001-10-07 | 2003-04-10 | Guobiao Zhang | Three-dimensional memory |
US20030141504A1 (en) * | 2001-11-16 | 2003-07-31 | Hideaki Kuwabara | Semiconductor device and manufacturing method thereof |
US20040160846A1 (en) * | 2002-08-02 | 2004-08-19 | Darrell Rinerson | Line drivers that use minimal metal layers |
US20040257847A1 (en) * | 2003-04-21 | 2004-12-23 | Yoshinori Matsui | Memory module and memory system |
US20050105371A1 (en) * | 1998-11-16 | 2005-05-19 | Johnson Mark G. | Integrated circuit incorporating three-dimensional memory array with dual opposing decoder arrangement |
US20060129755A1 (en) * | 2004-12-10 | 2006-06-15 | Siva Raghuram | Memory rank decoder for a Multi-Rank Dual Inline Memory Module (DIMM) |
US20070211535A1 (en) * | 2005-12-08 | 2007-09-13 | Juhan Kim | Dynamic random access memory |
US20080025122A1 (en) * | 2006-07-31 | 2008-01-31 | Metaram, Inc. | Memory refresh system and method |
US20100289832A1 (en) * | 2009-05-12 | 2010-11-18 | Sony Corporation | Display apparatus |
US20110156028A1 (en) * | 2009-12-28 | 2011-06-30 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device |
US20120011310A1 (en) * | 2006-07-31 | 2012-01-12 | Google Inc. | Simulating a memory standard |
US8508967B2 (en) * | 2010-09-03 | 2013-08-13 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device and driving method of semiconductor device |
US8559258B1 (en) * | 2011-12-13 | 2013-10-15 | Michael C. Stephens, Jr. | Self-refresh adjustment in memory devices configured for stacked arrangements |
Family Cites Families (184)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
DE3171836D1 (en) | 1980-12-08 | 1985-09-19 | Toshiba Kk | Semiconductor memory device |
JPS60198861A (en) | 1984-03-23 | 1985-10-08 | Fujitsu Ltd | Thin film transistor |
JPH0244256B2 (en) | 1987-01-28 | 1990-10-03 | Kagaku Gijutsucho Mukizaishitsu Kenkyushocho | INGAZN2O5DESHIMESARERUROTSUHOSHOKEINOSOJOKOZOOJUSURUKAGOBUTSUOYOBISONOSEIZOHO |
JPH0244260B2 (en) | 1987-02-24 | 1990-10-03 | Kagaku Gijutsucho Mukizaishitsu Kenkyushocho | INGAZN5O8DESHIMESARERUROTSUHOSHOKEINOSOJOKOZOOJUSURUKAGOBUTSUOYOBISONOSEIZOHO |
JPS63210023A (en) | 1987-02-24 | 1988-08-31 | Natl Inst For Res In Inorg Mater | Compound having laminar structure of hexagonal crystal system expressed by ingazn4o7 and its production |
JPH0244258B2 (en) | 1987-02-24 | 1990-10-03 | Kagaku Gijutsucho Mukizaishitsu Kenkyushocho | INGAZN3O6DESHIMESARERUROTSUHOSHOKEINOSOJOKOZOOJUSURUKAGOBUTSUOYOBISONOSEIZOHO |
JPH0244262B2 (en) | 1987-02-27 | 1990-10-03 | Kagaku Gijutsucho Mukizaishitsu Kenkyushocho | INGAZN6O9DESHIMESARERUROTSUHOSHOKEINOSOJOKOZOOJUSURUKAGOBUTSUOYOBISONOSEIZOHO |
JPH0244263B2 (en) | 1987-04-22 | 1990-10-03 | Kagaku Gijutsucho Mukizaishitsu Kenkyushocho | INGAZN7O10DESHIMESARERUROTSUHOSHOKEINOSOJOKOZOOJUSURUKAGOBUTSUOYOBISONOSEIZOHO |
JP2788290B2 (en) | 1988-07-08 | 1998-08-20 | オリンパス光学工業株式会社 | Ferroelectric memory |
JP2788265B2 (en) | 1988-07-08 | 1998-08-20 | オリンパス光学工業株式会社 | Ferroelectric memory, driving method and manufacturing method thereof |
JP2908095B2 (en) * | 1991-01-25 | 1999-06-21 | 日本電気アイシーマイコンシステム株式会社 | Semiconductor storage device |
US5652723A (en) * | 1991-04-18 | 1997-07-29 | Mitsubishi Denki Kabushiki Kaisha | Semiconductor memory device |
JP2775040B2 (en) | 1991-10-29 | 1998-07-09 | 株式会社 半導体エネルギー研究所 | Electro-optical display device and driving method thereof |
JPH05251705A (en) | 1992-03-04 | 1993-09-28 | Fuji Xerox Co Ltd | Thin-film transistor |
JPH0697366A (en) * | 1992-09-10 | 1994-04-08 | Hitachi Ltd | High reliability computor chip |
US5375085A (en) | 1992-09-30 | 1994-12-20 | Texas Instruments Incorporated | Three-dimensional ferroelectric integrated circuit without insulation layer between memory layers |
JPH0831176A (en) * | 1994-07-18 | 1996-02-02 | Hitachi Ltd | Semiconductor storage device |
JP3479375B2 (en) | 1995-03-27 | 2003-12-15 | 科学技術振興事業団 | Metal oxide semiconductor device in which a pn junction is formed with a thin film transistor made of a metal oxide semiconductor such as cuprous oxide, and methods for manufacturing the same |
JPH11505377A (en) | 1995-08-03 | 1999-05-18 | フィリップス エレクトロニクス ネムローゼ フェンノートシャップ | Semiconductor device |
JP3625598B2 (en) | 1995-12-30 | 2005-03-02 | 三星電子株式会社 | Manufacturing method of liquid crystal display device |
JP4103968B2 (en) | 1996-09-18 | 2008-06-18 | 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 | Insulated gate type semiconductor device |
JP4085459B2 (en) | 1998-03-02 | 2008-05-14 | セイコーエプソン株式会社 | Manufacturing method of three-dimensional device |
JP4170454B2 (en) | 1998-07-24 | 2008-10-22 | Hoya株式会社 | Article having transparent conductive oxide thin film and method for producing the same |
JP2000150861A (en) | 1998-11-16 | 2000-05-30 | Tdk Corp | Oxide thin film |
JP3276930B2 (en) | 1998-11-17 | 2002-04-22 | 科学技術振興事業団 | Transistor and semiconductor device |
JP4654471B2 (en) | 1999-07-29 | 2011-03-23 | ソニー株式会社 | Semiconductor device |
TW460731B (en) | 1999-09-03 | 2001-10-21 | Ind Tech Res Inst | Electrode structure and production method of wide viewing angle LCD |
TW587252B (en) * | 2000-01-18 | 2004-05-11 | Hitachi Ltd | Semiconductor memory device and data processing device |
JP3735855B2 (en) | 2000-02-17 | 2006-01-18 | 日本電気株式会社 | Semiconductor integrated circuit device and driving method thereof |
US6567287B2 (en) | 2001-03-21 | 2003-05-20 | Matrix Semiconductor, Inc. | Memory device with row and column decoder circuits arranged in a checkerboard pattern under a plurality of memory arrays |
JP4632107B2 (en) | 2000-06-29 | 2011-02-16 | エルピーダメモリ株式会社 | Semiconductor memory device |
JP3915868B2 (en) | 2000-07-07 | 2007-05-16 | セイコーエプソン株式会社 | Ferroelectric memory device and manufacturing method thereof |
JP2002025246A (en) * | 2000-07-07 | 2002-01-25 | Toshiba Corp | Semiconductor storage device |
JP4089858B2 (en) * | 2000-09-01 | 2008-05-28 | 国立大学法人東北大学 | Semiconductor device |
KR20020038482A (en) | 2000-11-15 | 2002-05-23 | 모리시타 요이찌 | Thin film transistor array, method for producing the same, and display panel using the same |
JP3997731B2 (en) | 2001-03-19 | 2007-10-24 | 富士ゼロックス株式会社 | Method for forming a crystalline semiconductor thin film on a substrate |
JP2002289859A (en) | 2001-03-23 | 2002-10-04 | Minolta Co Ltd | Thin-film transistor |
JP4306142B2 (en) | 2001-04-24 | 2009-07-29 | 株式会社日立製作所 | Image display device and manufacturing method thereof |
JP3925839B2 (en) | 2001-09-10 | 2007-06-06 | シャープ株式会社 | Semiconductor memory device and test method thereof |
JP2003123488A (en) * | 2001-10-11 | 2003-04-25 | Toshiba Corp | Semiconductor memory |
EP1443130B1 (en) | 2001-11-05 | 2011-09-28 | Japan Science and Technology Agency | Natural superlattice homologous single crystal thin film, method for preparation thereof, and device using said single crystal thin film |
JP4164562B2 (en) | 2002-09-11 | 2008-10-15 | 独立行政法人科学技術振興機構 | Transparent thin film field effect transistor using homologous thin film as active layer |
JP4083486B2 (en) | 2002-02-21 | 2008-04-30 | 独立行政法人科学技術振興機構 | Method for producing LnCuO (S, Se, Te) single crystal thin film |
CN1445821A (en) | 2002-03-15 | 2003-10-01 | 三洋电机株式会社 | Forming method of ZnO film and ZnO semiconductor layer, semiconductor element and manufacturing method thereof |
JP3933591B2 (en) | 2002-03-26 | 2007-06-20 | 淳二 城戸 | Organic electroluminescent device |
US7189992B2 (en) | 2002-05-21 | 2007-03-13 | State Of Oregon Acting By And Through The Oregon State Board Of Higher Education On Behalf Of Oregon State University | Transistor structures having a transparent channel |
US7339187B2 (en) | 2002-05-21 | 2008-03-04 | State Of Oregon Acting By And Through The Oregon State Board Of Higher Education On Behalf Of Oregon State University | Transistor structures |
JP2004022625A (en) | 2002-06-13 | 2004-01-22 | Murata Mfg Co Ltd | Manufacturing method of semiconductor device and its manufacturing method |
US7105868B2 (en) | 2002-06-24 | 2006-09-12 | Cermet, Inc. | High-electron mobility transistor with zinc oxide |
US7067843B2 (en) | 2002-10-11 | 2006-06-27 | E. I. Du Pont De Nemours And Company | Transparent oxide semiconductor thin film transistors |
TW556303B (en) | 2002-10-25 | 2003-10-01 | Nanya Technology Corp | Test key of detecting whether the overlay of active area and memory cell structure of DRAM with vertical transistors is normal and test method of the same |
US6881975B2 (en) | 2002-12-17 | 2005-04-19 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device and method of manufacturing the same |
JP2004235427A (en) * | 2003-01-30 | 2004-08-19 | Seiko Epson Corp | Semiconductor storage device |
JP3944455B2 (en) | 2003-01-31 | 2007-07-11 | 松下電器産業株式会社 | Semiconductor device and manufacturing method thereof |
JP4166105B2 (en) | 2003-03-06 | 2008-10-15 | シャープ株式会社 | Semiconductor device and manufacturing method thereof |
JP2004273732A (en) | 2003-03-07 | 2004-09-30 | Sharp Corp | Active matrix substrate and its producing process |
US7233024B2 (en) | 2003-03-31 | 2007-06-19 | Sandisk 3D Llc | Three-dimensional memory device incorporating segmented bit line memory array |
JP2004362696A (en) | 2003-06-05 | 2004-12-24 | Nec Electronics Corp | Semiconductor storage |
JP4108633B2 (en) | 2003-06-20 | 2008-06-25 | シャープ株式会社 | THIN FILM TRANSISTOR, MANUFACTURING METHOD THEREOF, AND ELECTRONIC DEVICE |
US7262463B2 (en) | 2003-07-25 | 2007-08-28 | Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. | Transistor including a deposited channel region having a doped portion |
US7282782B2 (en) | 2004-03-12 | 2007-10-16 | Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. | Combined binary oxide semiconductor device |
US7297977B2 (en) | 2004-03-12 | 2007-11-20 | Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. | Semiconductor device |
US7145174B2 (en) | 2004-03-12 | 2006-12-05 | Hewlett-Packard Development Company, Lp. | Semiconductor device |
WO2005088726A1 (en) | 2004-03-12 | 2005-09-22 | Japan Science And Technology Agency | Amorphous oxide and thin film transistor |
US6972985B2 (en) | 2004-05-03 | 2005-12-06 | Unity Semiconductor Corporation | Memory element having islands |
KR100652352B1 (en) * | 2004-05-10 | 2006-12-01 | 엘지.필립스 엘시디 주식회사 | Organic Electro luminescence Device and fabrication method thereof |
US7211825B2 (en) | 2004-06-14 | 2007-05-01 | Yi-Chi Shih | Indium oxide-based thin film transistors and circuits |
JP4927321B2 (en) | 2004-06-22 | 2012-05-09 | ルネサスエレクトロニクス株式会社 | Semiconductor memory device |
JP2006100760A (en) | 2004-09-02 | 2006-04-13 | Casio Comput Co Ltd | Thin-film transistor and its manufacturing method |
US7285501B2 (en) | 2004-09-17 | 2007-10-23 | Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. | Method of forming a solution processed device |
US7298084B2 (en) | 2004-11-02 | 2007-11-20 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Methods and displays utilizing integrated zinc oxide row and column drivers in conjunction with organic light emitting diodes |
CN101057338B (en) | 2004-11-10 | 2011-03-16 | 佳能株式会社 | Field effect transistor employing an amorphous oxide |
US7791072B2 (en) | 2004-11-10 | 2010-09-07 | Canon Kabushiki Kaisha | Display |
KR100998527B1 (en) | 2004-11-10 | 2010-12-07 | 고쿠리츠다이가쿠호진 토쿄고교 다이가꾸 | Amorphous oxide and field effect transistor |
CN101057333B (en) | 2004-11-10 | 2011-11-16 | 佳能株式会社 | Light emitting device |
US7829444B2 (en) | 2004-11-10 | 2010-11-09 | Canon Kabushiki Kaisha | Field effect transistor manufacturing method |
US7863611B2 (en) | 2004-11-10 | 2011-01-04 | Canon Kabushiki Kaisha | Integrated circuits utilizing amorphous oxides |
US7453065B2 (en) | 2004-11-10 | 2008-11-18 | Canon Kabushiki Kaisha | Sensor and image pickup device |
WO2006057417A1 (en) | 2004-11-26 | 2006-06-01 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device |
US7579224B2 (en) | 2005-01-21 | 2009-08-25 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Method for manufacturing a thin film semiconductor device |
TWI505473B (en) | 2005-01-28 | 2015-10-21 | Semiconductor Energy Lab | Semiconductor device, electronic device, and method of manufacturing semiconductor device |
US7608531B2 (en) | 2005-01-28 | 2009-10-27 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device, electronic device, and method of manufacturing semiconductor device |
US7858451B2 (en) | 2005-02-03 | 2010-12-28 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Electronic device, semiconductor device and manufacturing method thereof |
US7948171B2 (en) | 2005-02-18 | 2011-05-24 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Light emitting device |
US20060197092A1 (en) | 2005-03-03 | 2006-09-07 | Randy Hoffman | System and method for forming conductive material on a substrate |
JP4466853B2 (en) * | 2005-03-15 | 2010-05-26 | セイコーエプソン株式会社 | Organic ferroelectric memory and manufacturing method thereof |
US8681077B2 (en) | 2005-03-18 | 2014-03-25 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device, and display device, driving method and electronic apparatus thereof |
WO2006105077A2 (en) | 2005-03-28 | 2006-10-05 | Massachusetts Institute Of Technology | Low voltage thin film transistor with high-k dielectric material |
US7645478B2 (en) | 2005-03-31 | 2010-01-12 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Methods of making displays |
US8300031B2 (en) | 2005-04-20 | 2012-10-30 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device comprising transistor having gate and drain connected through a current-voltage conversion element |
JP2006344849A (en) | 2005-06-10 | 2006-12-21 | Casio Comput Co Ltd | Thin film transistor |
US7691666B2 (en) | 2005-06-16 | 2010-04-06 | Eastman Kodak Company | Methods of making thin film transistors comprising zinc-oxide-based semiconductor materials and transistors made thereby |
US7402506B2 (en) | 2005-06-16 | 2008-07-22 | Eastman Kodak Company | Methods of making thin film transistors comprising zinc-oxide-based semiconductor materials and transistors made thereby |
US7507618B2 (en) | 2005-06-27 | 2009-03-24 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Method for making electronic devices using metal oxide nanoparticles |
KR100711890B1 (en) | 2005-07-28 | 2007-04-25 | 삼성에스디아이 주식회사 | Organic Light Emitting Display and Fabrication Method for the same |
JP2007059128A (en) | 2005-08-23 | 2007-03-08 | Canon Inc | Organic electroluminescent display device and manufacturing method thereof |
JP4560502B2 (en) | 2005-09-06 | 2010-10-13 | キヤノン株式会社 | Field effect transistor |
JP4850457B2 (en) | 2005-09-06 | 2012-01-11 | キヤノン株式会社 | Thin film transistor and thin film diode |
JP5116225B2 (en) | 2005-09-06 | 2013-01-09 | キヤノン株式会社 | Manufacturing method of oxide semiconductor device |
JP2007073705A (en) | 2005-09-06 | 2007-03-22 | Canon Inc | Oxide-semiconductor channel film transistor and its method of manufacturing same |
JP4280736B2 (en) | 2005-09-06 | 2009-06-17 | キヤノン株式会社 | Semiconductor element |
JP5064747B2 (en) * | 2005-09-29 | 2012-10-31 | 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 | Semiconductor device, electrophoretic display device, display module, electronic device, and method for manufacturing semiconductor device |
EP1770788A3 (en) | 2005-09-29 | 2011-09-21 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device having oxide semiconductor layer and manufacturing method thereof |
JP5078246B2 (en) | 2005-09-29 | 2012-11-21 | 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 | Semiconductor device and manufacturing method of semiconductor device |
JP5037808B2 (en) | 2005-10-20 | 2012-10-03 | キヤノン株式会社 | Field effect transistor using amorphous oxide, and display device using the transistor |
KR101103374B1 (en) | 2005-11-15 | 2012-01-05 | 가부시키가이샤 한도오따이 에네루기 켄큐쇼 | Semiconductor Device |
JP2007157854A (en) * | 2005-12-01 | 2007-06-21 | Toshiba Corp | Nonvolatile semiconductor memory device, and manufacturing method thereof |
TWI292281B (en) | 2005-12-29 | 2008-01-01 | Ind Tech Res Inst | Pixel structure of active organic light emitting diode and method of fabricating the same |
US7867636B2 (en) | 2006-01-11 | 2011-01-11 | Murata Manufacturing Co., Ltd. | Transparent conductive film and method for manufacturing the same |
JP4977478B2 (en) | 2006-01-21 | 2012-07-18 | 三星電子株式会社 | ZnO film and method of manufacturing TFT using the same |
US7576394B2 (en) | 2006-02-02 | 2009-08-18 | Kochi Industrial Promotion Center | Thin film transistor including low resistance conductive thin films and manufacturing method thereof |
US7977169B2 (en) | 2006-02-15 | 2011-07-12 | Kochi Industrial Promotion Center | Semiconductor device including active layer made of zinc oxide with controlled orientations and manufacturing method thereof |
US8008137B2 (en) * | 2006-03-15 | 2011-08-30 | Marvell World Trade Ltd. | Method for fabricating 1T-DRAM on bulk silicon |
KR20070101595A (en) | 2006-04-11 | 2007-10-17 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Zno thin film transistor |
US20070252928A1 (en) | 2006-04-28 | 2007-11-01 | Toppan Printing Co., Ltd. | Structure, transmission type liquid crystal display, reflection type display and manufacturing method thereof |
JP5028033B2 (en) | 2006-06-13 | 2012-09-19 | キヤノン株式会社 | Oxide semiconductor film dry etching method |
JP4999400B2 (en) | 2006-08-09 | 2012-08-15 | キヤノン株式会社 | Oxide semiconductor film dry etching method |
JP4609797B2 (en) * | 2006-08-09 | 2011-01-12 | Nec液晶テクノロジー株式会社 | Thin film device and manufacturing method thereof |
JP4332545B2 (en) | 2006-09-15 | 2009-09-16 | キヤノン株式会社 | Field effect transistor and manufacturing method thereof |
JP5164357B2 (en) | 2006-09-27 | 2013-03-21 | キヤノン株式会社 | Semiconductor device and manufacturing method of semiconductor device |
JP4274219B2 (en) | 2006-09-27 | 2009-06-03 | セイコーエプソン株式会社 | Electronic devices, organic electroluminescence devices, organic thin film semiconductor devices |
US7622371B2 (en) | 2006-10-10 | 2009-11-24 | Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. | Fused nanocrystal thin film semiconductor and method |
US7772021B2 (en) | 2006-11-29 | 2010-08-10 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Flat panel displays comprising a thin-film transistor having a semiconductive oxide in its channel and methods of fabricating the same for use in flat panel displays |
JP2008140684A (en) | 2006-12-04 | 2008-06-19 | Toppan Printing Co Ltd | Color el display, and its manufacturing method |
KR101303578B1 (en) | 2007-01-05 | 2013-09-09 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Etching method of thin film |
US8207063B2 (en) | 2007-01-26 | 2012-06-26 | Eastman Kodak Company | Process for atomic layer deposition |
KR100851215B1 (en) | 2007-03-14 | 2008-08-07 | 삼성에스디아이 주식회사 | Thin film transistor and organic light-emitting dislplay device having the thin film transistor |
US7795613B2 (en) | 2007-04-17 | 2010-09-14 | Toppan Printing Co., Ltd. | Structure with transistor |
KR101325053B1 (en) | 2007-04-18 | 2013-11-05 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | Thin film transistor substrate and manufacturing method thereof |
KR20080094300A (en) | 2007-04-19 | 2008-10-23 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Thin film transistor and method of manufacturing the same and flat panel display comprising the same |
KR101334181B1 (en) | 2007-04-20 | 2013-11-28 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Thin Film Transistor having selectively crystallized channel layer and method of manufacturing the same |
WO2008133345A1 (en) | 2007-04-25 | 2008-11-06 | Canon Kabushiki Kaisha | Oxynitride semiconductor |
KR101345376B1 (en) | 2007-05-29 | 2013-12-24 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Fabrication method of ZnO family Thin film transistor |
KR101402189B1 (en) | 2007-06-22 | 2014-06-02 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Oxide thin film transistor and etchant of Zn oxide |
US8354674B2 (en) | 2007-06-29 | 2013-01-15 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device wherein a property of a first semiconductor layer is different from a property of a second semiconductor layer |
KR20090002841A (en) | 2007-07-04 | 2009-01-09 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Oxide semiconductor, thin film transistor comprising the same and manufacturing method |
TWI353063B (en) | 2007-07-27 | 2011-11-21 | Au Optronics Corp | Photo detector and method for fabricating the same |
TW200921226A (en) | 2007-11-06 | 2009-05-16 | Wintek Corp | Panel structure and manufacture method thereof |
JP2009122250A (en) | 2007-11-13 | 2009-06-04 | Seiko Epson Corp | Electro-optical device and electronic apparatus |
JP5366517B2 (en) * | 2007-12-03 | 2013-12-11 | 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 | Method for manufacturing semiconductor device |
JP5430846B2 (en) * | 2007-12-03 | 2014-03-05 | 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 | Method for manufacturing semiconductor device |
US7872934B2 (en) | 2007-12-14 | 2011-01-18 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device and method for writing data into memory |
JP5215158B2 (en) * | 2007-12-17 | 2013-06-19 | 富士フイルム株式会社 | Inorganic crystalline alignment film, method for manufacturing the same, and semiconductor device |
JP5213458B2 (en) | 2008-01-08 | 2013-06-19 | キヤノン株式会社 | Amorphous oxide and field effect transistor |
KR101412761B1 (en) | 2008-01-18 | 2014-07-02 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | Thin film transistor array substrate and method of fabricating the same |
JP5121478B2 (en) | 2008-01-31 | 2013-01-16 | 株式会社ジャパンディスプレイウェスト | Optical sensor element, imaging device, electronic device, and memory element |
JP4709868B2 (en) | 2008-03-17 | 2011-06-29 | 株式会社東芝 | Semiconductor memory device |
KR101496148B1 (en) * | 2008-05-15 | 2015-02-27 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Semiconductor device and method of manufacturing the same |
KR101442175B1 (en) | 2008-05-23 | 2014-09-18 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Semiconductor memory device and arrangement methode of memory cell array thereof |
JP4623179B2 (en) | 2008-09-18 | 2011-02-02 | ソニー株式会社 | Thin film transistor and manufacturing method thereof |
EP2172977A1 (en) * | 2008-10-03 | 2010-04-07 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Display device |
JP5451280B2 (en) | 2008-10-09 | 2014-03-26 | キヤノン株式会社 | Wurtzite crystal growth substrate, manufacturing method thereof, and semiconductor device |
KR101547325B1 (en) | 2008-10-27 | 2015-08-26 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Transistor and semiconductor device comprising the same |
KR101547326B1 (en) | 2008-12-04 | 2015-08-26 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Transistor and method of manufacturing the same |
JP5781720B2 (en) | 2008-12-15 | 2015-09-24 | ルネサスエレクトロニクス株式会社 | Semiconductor device and manufacturing method of semiconductor device |
KR101034686B1 (en) * | 2009-01-12 | 2011-05-16 | 삼성모바일디스플레이주식회사 | Organic light emitting display device and method of manufacturing the same |
JP2010182819A (en) | 2009-02-04 | 2010-08-19 | Sony Corp | Thin-film transistor, and display device |
US8198666B2 (en) * | 2009-02-20 | 2012-06-12 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device including a nonvolatile memory element having first, second and third insulating films |
CN102265392A (en) * | 2009-02-24 | 2011-11-30 | 松下电器产业株式会社 | Semiconductor memory cells and manufacturing method therefor as well as semiconductor memory devices |
US8359178B2 (en) | 2009-03-04 | 2013-01-22 | Honeywell International Inc. | Method and apparatus for identifying erroneous sensor outputs |
JP5500907B2 (en) | 2009-08-21 | 2014-05-21 | 株式会社日立製作所 | Semiconductor device and manufacturing method thereof |
KR101591613B1 (en) | 2009-10-21 | 2016-02-03 | 가부시키가이샤 한도오따이 에네루기 켄큐쇼 | Semiconductor device |
KR20190006091A (en) | 2009-10-29 | 2019-01-16 | 가부시키가이샤 한도오따이 에네루기 켄큐쇼 | Semiconductor device |
MY164205A (en) | 2009-10-29 | 2017-11-30 | Semiconductor Energy Lab | Semiconductor device |
EP2494597A4 (en) | 2009-10-30 | 2015-03-18 | Semiconductor Energy Lab | Semiconductor device |
CN105070717B (en) | 2009-10-30 | 2019-01-01 | 株式会社半导体能源研究所 | Semiconductor device |
KR101810254B1 (en) | 2009-11-06 | 2017-12-18 | 가부시키가이샤 한도오따이 에네루기 켄큐쇼 | Semiconductor device and operating method thereof |
WO2011055660A1 (en) | 2009-11-06 | 2011-05-12 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device |
KR101645680B1 (en) | 2009-11-06 | 2016-08-04 | 가부시키가이샤 한도오따이 에네루기 켄큐쇼 | Semiconductor device |
KR101753927B1 (en) | 2009-11-06 | 2017-07-04 | 가부시키가이샤 한도오따이 에네루기 켄큐쇼 | Semiconductor device |
KR101893332B1 (en) | 2009-11-13 | 2018-08-31 | 가부시키가이샤 한도오따이 에네루기 켄큐쇼 | Semiconductor device and driving method thereof |
JP2011108899A (en) | 2009-11-18 | 2011-06-02 | Seiko Epson Corp | Light emitting element, light emitting device, display device, and electronic apparatus |
KR101811999B1 (en) | 2009-11-20 | 2017-12-26 | 가부시키가이샤 한도오따이 에네루기 켄큐쇼 | Semiconductor device |
WO2011062067A1 (en) | 2009-11-20 | 2011-05-26 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device |
CN102668063B (en) | 2009-11-20 | 2015-02-18 | 株式会社半导体能源研究所 | Semiconductor device |
KR101662359B1 (en) | 2009-11-24 | 2016-10-04 | 가부시키가이샤 한도오따이 에네루기 켄큐쇼 | Semiconductor device including memory cell |
KR101803254B1 (en) | 2009-11-27 | 2017-11-30 | 가부시키가이샤 한도오따이 에네루기 켄큐쇼 | Semiconductor device |
EP2513966B1 (en) | 2009-12-18 | 2020-09-16 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device |
KR101866734B1 (en) | 2009-12-25 | 2018-06-15 | 가부시키가이샤 한도오따이 에네루기 켄큐쇼 | Semiconductor device |
KR101870119B1 (en) | 2009-12-25 | 2018-06-25 | 가부시키가이샤 한도오따이 에네루기 켄큐쇼 | Semiconductor device |
WO2012002186A1 (en) | 2010-07-02 | 2012-01-05 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device |
JP2012256821A (en) * | 2010-09-13 | 2012-12-27 | Semiconductor Energy Lab Co Ltd | Memory device |
KR101872926B1 (en) | 2010-09-13 | 2018-06-29 | 가부시키가이샤 한도오따이 에네루기 켄큐쇼 | Semiconductor device |
TWI539453B (en) | 2010-09-14 | 2016-06-21 | 半導體能源研究所股份有限公司 | Memory device and semiconductor device |
-
2011
- 2011-08-26 JP JP2011184291A patent/JP2012256821A/en not_active Withdrawn
- 2011-08-30 KR KR1020187013071A patent/KR101901761B1/en active IP Right Grant
- 2011-08-30 DE DE112011103061T patent/DE112011103061T5/en active Pending
- 2011-08-30 KR KR1020187026561A patent/KR101941143B1/en active IP Right Grant
- 2011-08-30 WO PCT/JP2011/070095 patent/WO2012036001A1/en active Application Filing
- 2011-08-30 KR KR1020137008591A patent/KR20130119421A/en active Application Filing
- 2011-09-06 TW TW100132084A patent/TWI539452B/en active
- 2011-09-06 TW TW105110327A patent/TWI627629B/en active
- 2011-09-06 TW TW106142155A patent/TW201824273A/en unknown
- 2011-09-12 US US13/230,184 patent/US9042161B2/en active Active
-
2015
- 2015-02-18 JP JP2015029169A patent/JP5957551B2/en active Active
- 2015-05-20 US US14/717,071 patent/US9263116B2/en active Active
-
2016
- 2016-02-12 US US15/043,063 patent/US20160163374A1/en not_active Abandoned
- 2016-06-20 JP JP2016121517A patent/JP6263230B2/en not_active Expired - Fee Related
-
2017
- 2017-12-15 JP JP2017240762A patent/JP6483794B2/en not_active Expired - Fee Related
Patent Citations (19)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US5495439A (en) * | 1993-09-27 | 1996-02-27 | Mitsubishi Denki Kabushiki Kaisha | Semiconductor memory device having SOI structure and manufacturing method thereof |
US5877978A (en) * | 1996-03-04 | 1999-03-02 | Mitsubishi Denki Kabushiki Kaisha | Semiconductor memory device |
US20050105371A1 (en) * | 1998-11-16 | 2005-05-19 | Johnson Mark G. | Integrated circuit incorporating three-dimensional memory array with dual opposing decoder arrangement |
US20020163834A1 (en) * | 2000-08-14 | 2002-11-07 | Scheuerlein Roy E. | Integrated systems using vertically-stacked three-dimensional memory cells |
US20030047785A1 (en) * | 2001-09-10 | 2003-03-13 | Masahi Kawasaki | Thin film transistor and matrix display device |
US20030067043A1 (en) * | 2001-10-07 | 2003-04-10 | Guobiao Zhang | Three-dimensional memory |
US20030141504A1 (en) * | 2001-11-16 | 2003-07-31 | Hideaki Kuwabara | Semiconductor device and manufacturing method thereof |
US20040160846A1 (en) * | 2002-08-02 | 2004-08-19 | Darrell Rinerson | Line drivers that use minimal metal layers |
US20040257847A1 (en) * | 2003-04-21 | 2004-12-23 | Yoshinori Matsui | Memory module and memory system |
US20060129755A1 (en) * | 2004-12-10 | 2006-06-15 | Siva Raghuram | Memory rank decoder for a Multi-Rank Dual Inline Memory Module (DIMM) |
US20070211535A1 (en) * | 2005-12-08 | 2007-09-13 | Juhan Kim | Dynamic random access memory |
US20120011310A1 (en) * | 2006-07-31 | 2012-01-12 | Google Inc. | Simulating a memory standard |
US8077535B2 (en) * | 2006-07-31 | 2011-12-13 | Google Inc. | Memory refresh apparatus and method |
US20080025122A1 (en) * | 2006-07-31 | 2008-01-31 | Metaram, Inc. | Memory refresh system and method |
US20100289832A1 (en) * | 2009-05-12 | 2010-11-18 | Sony Corporation | Display apparatus |
US20110156028A1 (en) * | 2009-12-28 | 2011-06-30 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device |
US8450783B2 (en) * | 2009-12-28 | 2013-05-28 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device |
US8508967B2 (en) * | 2010-09-03 | 2013-08-13 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device and driving method of semiconductor device |
US8559258B1 (en) * | 2011-12-13 | 2013-10-15 | Michael C. Stephens, Jr. | Self-refresh adjustment in memory devices configured for stacked arrangements |
Non-Patent Citations (1)
Title |
---|
Atsumi, T., et al. "DRAM Using Crystalline Oxide Semiconductor for Access Transistors and Not Requiring Refresh for More Than Ten Days." 2012 4th IEEE International Memory Workshop, 2012. * |
Cited By (18)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US11488668B2 (en) | 2014-05-22 | 2022-11-01 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device and healthcare system |
US10991429B2 (en) * | 2016-02-18 | 2021-04-27 | Sandisk Technologies Llc | Word line decoder circuitry under a three-dimensional memory array |
US20190057741A1 (en) * | 2016-02-18 | 2019-02-21 | Sandisk Technologies Llc | Word Line Decoder Circuitry under a Three-Dimensional Memory Array |
US10720213B2 (en) * | 2016-02-18 | 2020-07-21 | Sandisk Technologies Llc | Word line decoder circuitry under a three-dimensional memory array |
US11270981B2 (en) | 2016-09-23 | 2022-03-08 | Kioxia Corporation | Memory device |
EP3518286A4 (en) * | 2016-09-23 | 2020-08-19 | Toshiba Memory Corporation | Memory device |
US10790266B2 (en) * | 2016-09-23 | 2020-09-29 | Toshiba Memory Corporation | Memory device with a plurality of stacked memory core chips |
US10811393B2 (en) | 2016-09-23 | 2020-10-20 | Toshiba Memory Corporation | Memory device |
US20190206495A1 (en) * | 2016-09-23 | 2019-07-04 | Toshiba Memory Corporation | Memory device |
US10223194B2 (en) | 2016-11-04 | 2019-03-05 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Storage device, semiconductor device, electronic device, and server system |
US10984840B2 (en) | 2017-09-06 | 2021-04-20 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device |
US11721370B2 (en) | 2017-09-06 | 2023-08-08 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device |
US10790025B2 (en) | 2018-06-01 | 2020-09-29 | Toshiba Memory Corporation | Semiconductor memory including plural memory blocks, a sequencer that controls a driver, a row decoder, and sense amplifier modules based on commands held in a command register to perform read, write, erase |
US10886221B2 (en) | 2018-09-14 | 2021-01-05 | Toshiba Memory Corporation | Semiconductor device |
US11824003B2 (en) | 2018-09-14 | 2023-11-21 | Kioxia Corporation | Semiconductor device |
CN112599528A (en) * | 2020-12-14 | 2021-04-02 | 武汉新芯集成电路制造有限公司 | Semiconductor device and method for manufacturing the same |
WO2022126686A1 (en) * | 2020-12-14 | 2022-06-23 | 武汉新芯集成电路制造有限公司 | Semiconductor device and preparation method threefor |
TWI815217B (en) * | 2020-12-14 | 2023-09-11 | 大陸商武漢新芯集成電路製造有限公司 | Semiconductor device and fabrication method thereof |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
JP5957551B2 (en) | 2016-07-27 |
TW201638947A (en) | 2016-11-01 |
US20150255141A1 (en) | 2015-09-10 |
JP6263230B2 (en) | 2018-01-17 |
JP2018082189A (en) | 2018-05-24 |
TW201218200A (en) | 2012-05-01 |
KR20130119421A (en) | 2013-10-31 |
JP2012256821A (en) | 2012-12-27 |
TWI627629B (en) | 2018-06-21 |
KR101941143B1 (en) | 2019-01-22 |
KR101901761B1 (en) | 2018-11-08 |
DE112011103061T5 (en) | 2013-07-04 |
TW201824273A (en) | 2018-07-01 |
TWI539452B (en) | 2016-06-21 |
US20120063208A1 (en) | 2012-03-15 |
JP6483794B2 (en) | 2019-03-13 |
US9042161B2 (en) | 2015-05-26 |
WO2012036001A1 (en) | 2012-03-22 |
US9263116B2 (en) | 2016-02-16 |
KR20180105264A (en) | 2018-09-27 |
KR20180052781A (en) | 2018-05-18 |
JP2016187047A (en) | 2016-10-27 |
JP2015146422A (en) | 2015-08-13 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
US9263116B2 (en) | Memory device | |
US8508967B2 (en) | Semiconductor device and driving method of semiconductor device | |
US9825037B2 (en) | Semiconductor device and driving method thereof | |
US9263473B2 (en) | Oxide semiconductor memory device | |
US9461047B2 (en) | Semiconductor device | |
US8537600B2 (en) | Low off-state leakage current semiconductor memory device | |
US8582348B2 (en) | Semiconductor device and method for driving semiconductor device | |
US8675394B2 (en) | Semiconductor memory device with oxide semiconductor transistor | |
US20120063203A1 (en) | Driving method of semiconductor device | |
US20120056647A1 (en) | Semiconductor device and driving method thereof |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
AS | Assignment |
Owner name: SEMICONDUCTOR ENERGY LABORATORY CO., LTD., JAPAN Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNORS:KOYAMA, JUN;YAMAZAKI, SHUNPEI;SIGNING DATES FROM 20110824 TO 20110825;REEL/FRAME:037949/0781 |
|
STCB | Information on status: application discontinuation |
Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO RESPOND TO AN OFFICE ACTION |